KHAPP 


SILVER,  BURDETT  0 COMPANY 


FRA{J2  J< 


LA\D 


[Kara  Sea 


AR^ 


ICELAN] 


Petersburg^  i ^ 

R Tj  )S.  S IAN. 


Cape  Farewell 


Knst\aain 

North 

U &a  H 

V Berli 


-Stockbol 


BRITISH 


JDN’DLAND 


FRANCE; 


M«drid. 


^biUdelphii 


'yCHINESE 
1'^  . EMPIRE 


TROPIC  OF  CANCER 


ARABIA 


Arabian 

Sea 


irifc&eaTi  >S'crt 


>^^C.1ANJ 


EQUATOR 


^Zauzibar 


ma^a'gascar' 


OR^tAr 

‘Dueoos  Airos 


y^trait  of  Magellan 


AHAM  LANDl 


ANTARCTIC  CIRCLE 


Loogitude  East  fnim  Oreeo^ 


Baffin 


INDIES 


DUKE 

UNIVERSITY 


LIBRARY 


THE  STORY 

OF 


THE  PHILIPPINES 


Digitized  by  the  Internet  Archive 
in  2017  with  funding  from 
Duke  University  Libraries 


https://archive.org/details/storyofphilippin01knap_0 


VIEW  FROM  THE  CITY  WALL,  MANILA. 


THE  STORY 

OF 

THE  PHILIPPINES 


FOR  USE  IN  THE  SCHOOLS  OF 
THE  PHILIPPINE  ISLANDS 

. • 

BY 

ADELINE  KNAPP 

Author  of  “ How  to  Livfj”  etc. 


WITH  MANY  ILLUSTRATIONS 


SILVER,  BURDETT  AND  COMPANY 


NEW  YORK 


BOSTON 


CHICAGO 


Copyright,  1902,  by 

SILVER,  BURDETT  AND  COMPANY 


PREFATORY 


■Kirs 


NOTE. 

The  history  of  the  Philippine  Islands  is  little  known 
to  its  people  to-day,  for  the  records  are  few  and  not 
easy  of  access.  Just  at  the  present  time  this  knowl- 
edge is  especially  necessary  to  the  Filipino  people.  A 
knowledge  of  the  conditions  of  the  past  is  of  the  great- 
est importance  to  a people  desirous  of  planning  wisely 
and  well  for  the  future. 

“ The  Story  of  the  Philippines  ” aims  to  teach  Fili- 
pino young  people  the  salient  facts  regarding  the  past 
of  their  country,  and,  besides  this,  it  points  out  some  of 
the  things  needful  to  the  best  growth  and  progress 
of  the  islands.  Certain  chapters  are  devoted  to  matters 
pertaining  to  geography,  commerce,  and  government, 
directing  attention  to  the  main  physical  features  of  the 
country  and  the  possibilities  of  its  successful  develop- 
ment, and  touching  upon  lines  of  commercial  and  social 
advancement  which  lie  just  ahead.  The  book  shows 
that  the  Filipinos  have  a past  filled  with  the  records  of 
brave  deeds  and  patient  forbearance ; that  they  have  a 
beautiful  country,  rich  in  natural  resources  ; and  that  the 
future  development  and  prosperity  of  their  islands  de- 
pend largely  upon  themselves. 

The  volume  has  been  prepared  in  order  to  fill  a defi- 
nite educational  need  in  the  schools  of  the  Philippine 
Islands,  and  as  the  first  secular  history  of  their  land  to 


3S5895 


6 


PREFATORY  NOTE. 


be  brought  within  reach  of  Filipino  school  children  it 
should  be  of  real  value.  But  it  is  not  only  to  the 
teachers  and  pupils  in  the  schools  that  this  book  is 
useful ; it  should  appeal  to  all  who  live  in  the  Philip- 
pine Islands  and  all  others  who  are  interested  in  them. 

The  author  has  had  access  to  the  best  historical  ma- 
terial available  in  the  Philippines  and  in  America.  The 
book  was  written  in  the  islands,  and  as  nearly  as  pos- 
sible from  the  standpoint  of  the  people.  It  is  impos- 
sible to  name  the  many  devoted  friends  of  the  islands — 
Filipinos  and  Americans — who  have  helped  to  make 
this  book  possible.  No  mere  words  of  thanks  can  ex- 
press the  obligation  of  the  author  and  publishers  to 
them ; but  their  aid  was  given  in  a spirit  of  desire  to 
help  in  the  education  of  Filipino  young  people.  If  the 
book  does  this,  their  reward  will  be  commensurate  with 
the  great  service  they  have  rendered. 


CONTENTS. 


CHAPTER.  PAGE. 


I. 

The  Discovery  of  the  Islands 

13 

II. 

E.arly  Settlements 

27 

III. 

The  Country  and  its  People  . 

42 

IV. 

Early  Troubles 

52 

V. 

Beginnings  of  Strife  .... 

61 

VI. 

Colonial  Wars  and  Difficulties  . 

70 

VII. 

The  Spanish  and  the  Filipinos 

78 

VIII. 

A New  Beginning 

88 

IX. 

Trade  in  the  Philippines 

99 

X. 

The  Islands  under  Arandia’s  Rule 

109 

XL 

British  Occupation  ..... 

117 

XII. 

To  THE  End  of  the  Eighteenth  Century 

124 

XIII. 

The  Constitution  of  1812 

132 

XIV. 

Changes  in  the  I-slands  .... 

142 

XV. 

Efforts  to  Keep  Peace  .... 

151 

XVI. 

The  Insurrection  at  Cavite  . 

162 

XVII. 

The  Uprising  of  1896  .... 

177 

XVIII. 

The  End  of  Spanish  Rule 

191 

XIX. 

The  Beginning  of  American  Occupation 

203 

XX. 

Civil  Government  for  the  Philippines  . 

212 

XXL 

Physical  Geography  of  the  Archipelago 

- 

221 

XXII. 

The  Future 

236 

385895 


ILLUSTRATIONS 


PAGE. 

View  from  the  City  Wall,  Manila  . . . Frontispiece 

King  Charles  1 15 

In  the  Straits  of  Magellan ig 

Map  of  Magellan’s  Route  .......  20 

The  Landing  of  Magellan 22 

The  Tomb  of  Magellan,  on  the  Island  of  Mactan  . . 24 

Statue  of  Sebastian  del  Cano  . . . . ' . .29 

Ancient  Fort  Commanding  Cebu  Harbor  ....  32 

The  Monument  to  Legaspi  at  Cebu  City  ....  35 

Legaspi  Sailing  to  Manila 38 

Aborigines  of  Mindanao  . 44 

A Moro  of  Jol6,  in  the  Sulu  Archipelago  . . -47 

Ancient  Alphabets 49 

Negritos  in  a Prahu  ........  50 

Plaza  de  Goiti,  Manila 55 

Chinese  War  Junks  Attacking  Manila  ....  57 

King  Philip  II. 63 

The  City  Wall  and  Moat,  Manila 66 

A Member  of  the  Guianga  Tribe  of  Mindanao  . . 72 

Warriors  of  Mindanao 73 

Dutch  Ships  Attacking  a Chinese  Trading  Junk  . . 75 

Fuerza  del  Pilar,  Mindanao  . . . . . . .81 

St.  Lazarus  Hospital,  Manila  ......  83 

A Church  at  Malate go 

The  Manila  Cathedral  ........  93 


10 


ILLUSTRATIONS. 


PAGE. 

An  Old  Spanish  Fort  at  Siassi g5 

The  Arrival  of  a Spanish  Galleon  . . . . . loi 

The  Santa  Lucia  Gate,  Manila 104 

Taal  Volcano no 

Igorrotes 113 

A Street.  IN  Jol6 114 

Royal  Gate  and  Sally  Port  in  the  City  Wall,  Manila.  119 
The  British  Assault  on  the  Walls  of  Manila.  . . 121 

Monument  to  Simon  de  Anda  on  the  Malacon,  Manila  . 127 

A Modern  War  Ship 133 

King  Ferdinand  VII 137 

A Street  in  Manila i3g 

The  Magellan  Monument,  Manila  .....  143 

Queen  Christina 146 

Manila  Bay  from  the  City  Walls 148 

Pirate  Fleet  Attacking  a Coast  Town  ....  153 

The  Parian  Gate 155 

Ruins  of  Manila  Cathedral  after  an  Earthquake  . . 157 

Queen  Isabella  II.  as  a Child 158 

The  Grounds  of  the  Cavite  Arsenal 165 

Pumping  Station,  Carriedo  Waterworks  ....  167 

The  Bridge  of  Spain 171 

Fort  General  Weyler  in  Mindanao 178 

The  Bridge  of  San  Juan  del  Monte 182 

Dungeon  at  Cavite . . 185 

Biac-na-’Bato,  where  the  Treaty  was  Made  . . . 195 

Emilio  Aguinaldo . 199 

Admiral  Montojo 204 

Governor-General  Augusti  206 

The  First  American  Flag  Raised  in  Manila  . . . 209 

Governor  William  H.  Taft 215 

General  Adna  R.  Chaffee  . .....  217 


ILLUSTRATIONS. 


1 1 

PAGE. 

Mayon  Volcano  .........  225 

Weaving  Jusi 227 

The  Falls  of  Botocan  in  Luzon  230 

A River  Scene  on  the  Island  of  Luzon  ....  233 

The  Cagayan  de  Oro  River  .......  238 

Manila  Schoolboys 241 

COLORED  MAPS 

The  World  .......  Inside  Front  Cover 

The  Philippine  Islands  .....  Inside  Back  Cover 


KEY  TO  PRONUNCIATION  OF  PROPER  NAMES. 


a as  in  fat. 
a as  in  fate. 
a as  in  father. 
a as  in  ask. 
e as  in  peti. 


e as  in  mete. 
e as  in  her. 
i as  in  pm. 

I as  in  pine. 
o as  in  not. 
oi  as  in  oil,  boy. 
on  as  in  p02ind,  prond. 


6 as  in  note. 
6 as  in  move. 
u as  in  tub. 
ti  as  in  unite. 
u as  in  pull. 


A double  dot  under  a vowel  in  an  unaccented  syllable  indi- 
cates that  its  sound  is  almost  that  of  the  short  u in  but,  tub,  etc. : 
as  a in  America,  e in  prudent,  i in  charity,  o in  actor,  e in  the 
book,  u in  nature. 


THE  STORY  OF  THE  PHILIPPINES. 


Chapter  I. 

THE  DISCOVERY  OF  THE  ISLANDS. 

HEN  Christopher  Columbus  (kris'to  fer  ko- 
lum'bus)  discovered  America,  in  the  year 
1492,  he  set  all  Europe  talking  about  the 
unknown  lands  that  lay  beyond  seas. 

At  that  time  little  was  known  of  geography.  Most 
people  believed  that  the  world  was  flat,  and  that  if 
a man  were  to  reach  the  edge  he  could  jump  off  into 
space.  Some  people  thought,  too,  that  this  great, 
flat  earth  rested  on  the  backs  of  four  huge  tortoises, 
and  that  the  movements  of  these  creatures  caused 
earthquakes. 

Sailors  believed  that  somewhere  in  the  Atlantic 
Ocean  Satan  lived.  When  a ship  was  wrecked  they 
thought  that  Satan  had  reached  out  an  awful  hand 
and  dragged  the  ship  down  into  the  sea.  Even  learned 


14 


THE  STORT  OF  THE  PHILIPPINES. 


captains  believed  this,  and  declared  that  they  had  seen 
ships  drawn  under  in  this  manner.  To  them  the  great, 
dashing  waves  in  a storm  must  have  looked  like  huge 
hands,  and  so  they  made  this  mistake. 

The  sea  was  full  of  terror  to  those  sailors  of  long 
ago ; yet  they  braved  it.  They  went  forth  in  frail 
little  ships,  such  as  a modern  sailor  would  hardly  risk 
a voyage  in.  Until  a short  time  before  Columbus’s 
day  they  even  had  no  compass,  but  were  guided  by 
the  winds  and  the  stars.  They  made  long  voyages 
in  their  tiny  ships,  and  little  by  little  they  began  to 
see  that  those  who  said  that  the  world  is  round,  and 
not  flat,  must  be  right. 

In  the  year  1513,  a little  over  twenty  years  after 
Columbus’s  discovery,  a Spanish  captain  named  Balboa 
(bal  boa)  reached  Central  America.  With  his  soldiers 
he  crossed  the  Isthmus  of  Darien  (da  re  an'),  and  discov- 
ered the  great  ocean  which  washes  the  western  coast  of 
America.  This  ocean  he  named  the  “ Southern  Sea.” 

Men  were  in  those  days  slowly  groping  their  way 
across  seas  to  the  new  lands.  Of  course,  as  soon  as 
they  knew'  of  this  ocean,  they  wanted  to  find  a way  to 
sail  into  it  from  the  Atlantic  Ocean.  They  knew  that 
if  they  could  do  this  they  would  have  a shorter  route 
from  Europe  to  the  famed  ‘‘  spice  islands  ” which  were 
believed  to  be  in  the  South  Seas. 

About  this  time  there  came  to  Spain  a great  soldier 
and  sea-captain  named  Ferdinand  Magellan  (ferd'I  nand 
ma  jel'an).  He  was  a Portuguese  noble,  a clever  man 
of  much  learning.  While  yet  a very  young  man  he 
became  an  officer  in  the  Portuguese  navy,  and  fought 
for  his  king  in  many  far  countries. 


THE  DISCOVERT  OF  THE  ISLANDS.  15 

During  a war  which  Portugal  waged  in  Africa,  Magel- 
lan was  badly  wounded  in  one  knee,  so  that  he  was 
ever  after  lame.  On  his  return  to  Portugal  from 
Africa,  other  captains  of  the  king  became  jealous  of 
his  fame  and  tried  to  belittle  all  that  he  had  done. 

They  told  the  king  untrue  tales  about  him,  and 
made  the  sovereign  be- 
lieve evil  against  him. 

Among  other  things, 
they  said  that  he  was 
pretending  to  suffer 
from  a malady  of 
which  he  had  once 
been  a victim,  but  of 
which  he  was  really 
cured.  They  said  that 
he  did  this  because  he 
did  not  wish  to  serve 
the  king  any  longen 
So  they  stirred  up  the 
king’s  mind  against 
the  brave  captain,  and 
Magellan  was  very 
badly  treated.  At 
last,  deeply  hurt  by  the  king’s  unfairness,  he  left  the 
country.  He  went  to  Spain,  and  became  a subject  of 
King  Charles  I. 

The  king  of  Spain  gave  Magellan  a warm  welcome. 
He  was  glad  to  have  him  at  court,  and  listened  eagerly 
to  what  Magellan  had  to  say  about  certain  rich  islands 
that  lay  in  the  Southern  Sea.  Many  sailors  from  Spain 
and  from  Portugal  had  heard  of  these  islands,  and 


KING  CHARLES  I. 


l6  THE  STORT  OF  THE  PHILIPPINES. 

when  they  returned  from  their  voyages  to  the  Malay 
Peninsula  in  the  East,  they  told  how  they  had  seen, 
in  Malacca  harbor,  dusky  traders  from  that  unknown 
land.  None  of  them  knew,  however,  just  where  these 
islands  lay. 

At  last  King  Charles  I.  made  a compact  with  Magel- 
lan. He  made  the  captain  a cavalier  of  Spain,  and 
fitted  out  a fleet  for  him.  Magellan  pledged  himself 
to  spend  ten  years  trying  to  find  the  southern  islands 
for  Spain,  and  the  king  gave  to  him  and  to  his  heirs 
the  governorship  of  all  islands  that  he  might  discover 
and  conquer. 

It  was  on  August  lo,  1519,  that  Magellan’s  fleet, 
flying  the  royal  standard  of  Spain,  left  San  Lucar  de 
Barrameda  (san  lo'car  da  bar  ra  ma'tha).  There  were 
five  ships,  La  Trinidad  (la  tre'ne  dath),  San  Antonio 
(san  an  to'ne  6),  Victoria  (vik  to're  ii),  Santiago  (san 
te  a'go),  and  Concepcion  (kon  thep'the  on).  They  sailed 
southward,  from  San  Lucar  de  Barrameda  toward  the 
Canary  Islands,  and  on  the  13th  of  December  reached 
Rio  de  Janeiro  (re'o  da  zha  na'ro). 

From  there  they  went  along  down  the  eastern  coast 
of  South  America,  trying  every  opening  which  they 
thought  might  be  a passage  into  the  sea  they  sought. 
They  lost  a good  deal  of  time  sailing  up  the  Rio  de  la 
Plata  (re'o  da  la  pla'ta),  and  at  last  had  to  come  back 
to  the  Atlantic.  By  this  time  it  was  late  in  winter, 
and  the  weather  was  very  cold. 

By  now  the  officers  and  sailors  on  all  save  Magellan’s 
own  ship  had  become  rebellious.  They  were  sure  that 
no  passage  could  be  found  into  the  Southern  Sea,  and 
they  wanted  to  go  back  to  Spain.  This  rebellion  grew 


THE  DISCOFERT  OF  THE  ISLANDS. 


17 


until  Magellan  had  to  put  it  down  by  the  use  of  force. 
He  was  able  to  win  over  the  sailors,  but  the  officers 
still  made  trouble,  and  at  last  their  revolt  was  so  seri- 
ous that  the  fleet  could  not  go  on  until  this  matter 
was  ended.  One  captain  even  made  an  attack  on  La 
Trhiidad,  the  ship  which  Magellan  commanded.  Not 
until  one  of  the  rebellious  captains,  with  a companion, 
was  put  ashore,  another  killed,  and  a third  executed 
for  mutiny,  was  order  restored  so  that  the  fleet  could 
continue  the  voyage. 

But  the  way  was  long  and  trying.  The  sailors  began 
to  lose  courage  again,  and  only  the  bravery  and  strong 
will  of  Magellan  kept  the  fleet  together.  One  ship, 
the  Santiago,  was  wrecked  in  a great  gale,  and  while 
off  the  coast  of  New  Guinea  (no  gin'ne)  the  crew  and 
most  of  the  officers  of  the  San  Antonio  mutinied.  They 
put  their  captain  in  irons  and  sailed  back  to  Spain. 

There  they  lodged  a complaint  against  their  captain 
and  against  Magellan.  They  accused  the  latter  of 
great  cruelty,  and  raised  much  ill  feeling  against  him. 
Magellan’s  wife  and  family  were  put  into  prison,  and 
if  the  cavalier  himself  had  been  in  Spain,  it  would  have 
gone  hard  with  him. 

But  Magellan  was  very  far  from  Spain.  With  the 
three  remaining  ships  he  was  still  sailing  in  search  of 
a passage  into  the  sea  which  Balboa  had  discovered. 
On  the  28th  day  of  October,  1520,  the  fleet  reached 
the  seaway  now  known  as  the  Straits  of  Magellan,  be- 
tween Patagonia  (pat  a go'nl  a)  and  Tierra  del  Fuego 
(te  er'ra  del  fwa'go). 

Hardly  daring  to  hope  that  this  was  the  passage  they 
sought,  they  entered  it  and  sailed  on.  Nearly  a month 
2 


1 8 THE  STORT  OF  THE  PHILIPPINES. 

later,  on  November  26,  1520,  they  passed  out  of  the 
Straits  and  found  themselves  on  the  broad,  blue  South- 
ern Sea.  This  sea  was  so  quiet,  so  fair  and  beautiful, 
that  Magellan  at  once  named  it  the  “ Pacific,”  or 
” peaceful,”  Ocean. 

The  longed-for  seaway  was  discovered,  and  they 
were  the  first  to  sail  through  it ! We  may  be  sure  that 
the  hearts  of  the  little  company  were  glad.  There  was 
no  more  doubt ; no  more  grumbling ; no  more  rebellion 
against  their  leader.  They  knew,  at  last,  that  he  was 
a great  captain,  and  they  followed  him  willingly  across 
the  unknown  sea.  They  were  now  full  of  hope  for  the 
success  of  their  voyage.  They  were  eager  to  reach 
the  rich  spice  islands  which  they  were  sure  lay  before 
them,  and  the  ships  sailed  bravely  forward  over  the 
beautiful  Pacific. 

On  March  16,  1521,  they  came  to  the  Ladrone 
(la  drone')  Islands.  To  these  Magellan  gave  the  name 
Islas  de  las  Velas  (es  las  da  las  va'las).  It  was  Miguel 
de  Legaspi  (me  ga'el  da  la  gath'pe)  who,  when  he 
visited  them  in  1564,  called  them  the  Ladrones.  The 
expedition  did  not  linger  here,  however,  but  soon  sailed 
away  toward  the  southwest,  where  the  Spaniards  hoped 
to  find  the  spice  islands  which  they  sought. 

They  held  steadily  to  their  westward  course,  and  in 
due  time  reached  Jomohol  (ho  mo  hoi'),  now  called 
Malhon  (mal  hon'),  in  the  Straits  of  Suragao  (so  ra  ga'o), 
between  Samar  (sam'ar)  and  Dinegat  (de  na  gat').  Here 
they  touched,  but  did  not  remain.  They  sailed  on 
along  the  coast  of  Mindanao  (men  da  nao),  instead, 
and  early  in  Easter  week  came  to  the  mouth  of  the 
Butuan  (bo  to  an')  River. 


THE  DISCOFERT  OF  THE  ISLANDS. 


19 


They  were  nearly  out  of  food  and  water  by  this  time, 
so  they  landed  to  see  what  supplies  they  could  find. 
The  chief  of  Butuan  and  his  people  were  at  first  fright- 
ened by  the  sight  of  these  white  strangers.  The  Span- 
iards wore  armor  and  carried  firearms.  They  must 
have  seemed  strange  to  those  simple  people,  who  had 
never  before  seen  such  men  or  such  weapons.  The 
natives  welcomed  the  strangers,  and  brought  them  fresh 


IN  THE  STRAITS  OF  MAGELLAN. 


food  and  water.  They  helped  the  Spaniards  to  load 
these  on  their  ships,  and  were  in  every  way  friendly. 

Afterwards  Magellan  claimed  the  country  for  King 
Charles  I.  of  Spain,  and  raised  the  Spanish  flag.  The 
chief  looked  on  during  this  act,  and  consented  to  it ; 
but  it  is  not  likely  that  he  knew  what  Magellan  was 
doing.  Then  Magellan  named  the  country  the  San 
Lazarus  (san  lath'ar  us)  Isles. 


w 

h 

D 

O 


The  Map  shows  the  World  as  known  about  1500. 


THE  DISCOFERT  OF  THE  ISLANDS. 


21 


Magellan  learned  from  the  Butuan  people  that  a rich 
and  fertile  island  called  Cebu  (sa'bo)  lay  to  the  north, 
and  to  this  island  he  wished  to  go.  The  chief  of 
Butuan  then  offered  to  go  with  him  and  show  him 
the  way;  so,  with  the  chief  and  some  of  his  people, 
the  fleet  sailed  to  Cebu.  They  reached  harbor  there 
April  7,  1521. 

At  first  the  Cebuans  (sa'bo  ans)  were  very  unfriendly 
toward  the  strangers,  and,  but  for  the  chief  of  Butuan, 
would  have  driven  them  away.  He  answered  for  the 
Spaniards,  however.  He  told  the  king  of  Cebu  that 
they  wished  to  be  friends,  and  at  last  the  Spaniards 
were  allowed  to  land. 

Magellan  must  have  had  the  good  gift  of  making 
friends,  for  he  soon  won  over  the  king  of  Cebu  just  as 
he  had  won  over  the  chief  of  Butuan.  He  and  the 
king  swore  friendship,  and  each  drank  blood  drawn 
from  the  breast  of  the  other.  This  they  did  for  a sign 
that  thereafter  they  were  to  be  brothers.  Magellan 
also  made  a treaty  with  the  king  in  the  name  of  King 
Charles  I.  of  Spain. 

There  were  a number  of  Spanish  friars  with  the  fleet. 
These  at  once  began  to  teach  the  people,  and  before 
long  the  king  was  baptized  as  King  Charles  I.  of  Cebu. 
Many  of  his  people  were  baptized  also.  Magellan  then 
promised  the  Cebuans  to  help  them  in  a war  which 
they  were  having  with  the  people  of  Mactan  (mak'tan). 
an  island  near  Cebu.  To  keep  this  promise,  Magellan 
crossed  to  Mactan  with  forty  of  his  men  in  the  evening 
of  April  25th.  He  would  not  let  any  of  the  Cebuans 
go  with  him,  as  he  wished  to  show  them  how  quickly 
Spanish  soldiers  would  defeat  such  a foe. 


From  a Painting  in  the  Municipal  School^  Mafiila. 


THE  DISCOVERT  OF  THE  ISLANDS.  23 

The  Spanish  landed  at  night,  and  as  soon  as  it  was 
light  the  people  of  Mactan  came  down  to  the  beach  in 
great  numbers.  A fierce  battle  was  fought,  in  which 
the  Europeans,  being  greatly  outnumbered,  were  de- 
feated. One  old  Spanish  account  says  that  the  Spanish 
soldiers  sprang  into  the  water  and  swam  to  the  ships, 
leaving  their  leader  on  shore.  Magellan  was  a skillful 
swordsman,  and  killed  many  of  the  enemy.  At  last, 
however,  a savage,  who  fought  with  a huge  club,  struck 
him  a blow  that  crushed  both  his  helmet  and  his  skull. 
He  died,  there  by  the  sea,  on  the  island  of  Mactan, 
and  a monument  to  his  memory  now  stands  on  the 
spot  where  it  is  supposed  that  he  fell. 

On  the  right  bank  of  the  River  Pasig  (pa'sig),  in 
Manila,  near  the  bridge  of  Spain,  is  another  monu- 
ment in  honor  of  this  brave  nobleman  and  soldier. 
Ferdinand  Magellan  ranks  with  the  great  sailors  of  the 
world.  Not  even  Columbus  was  wiser  or  more  skillful 
than  he.  The  discovery  of  the  passage  between  the 
two  great  oceans,  and  the  long,  dangerous  journey 
across  seas  to  these  islands,  are  feats  that  make  him 
worthy  of  a high  and  honorable  place  in  the  world’s 
history. 

After  the  death  of  Magellan,  Captain  Duarte  Barbosa 
(d5  ar'ta  bar  bo'tha)  took  command  of  the  fleet.  The 
king  of  Cebu  had  not  sworn  friendship  with  him,  how- 
ever, and  the  chief  of  Butuan  had  gone  back  to  his 
home,  so  the  Spanish  had  no  strong  friend  in  the 
island.  The  king  invited  Barbosa  and  his  men  to  a 
feast  on  the  island,  and  at  this  feast  the  captain  and 
twenty-six  of  his  men  were  killed.  The  Cebuans 
offered  to  give  up  a Spanish  sailor  named  Juan  Serrano 


24 


THE  STORT  OF  THE  PHILIPPINES. 


THE  TOMB  OF  MAGELLAN,  ON  THE  ISLAND  OF  MACTAN. 


(ho  an'  sa  ra'no)  for  two  cannons  from  one  of  the  ships, 
but  the  Spanish  would  not  come  inshore  to  bring  the 
cannons  and  take  their  shipmate  on  board.  They 
sailed  away  and  left  him  to  his  fate. 

In  all,  thirty-two  Spaniards  were  killed  at  Cebu. 
This  left  them  so  short  of  men  that  they  could  not  get 


THE  DISCOFERT  OF  THE  ISLANDS. 


25 


the  three  ships  away.  So,  as  the  Concepcion  was  the 
poorest  of  the  three,  they  sunk  her  in  Cebu  harbor. 
After  doing  this  they  made  haste  to  get  away  from  the 
scene  of  their  ill  fortune.  Captain  Juan  Caraballo 
(kar  a bal'yo)  was  now  made  commander  of  the  expe- 
dition, and  with  less  than  a hundred  men  all  told,  the 
two  ships  went  on  to  Borneo. 

Sumjna?y. — Ferdinand  Magellan,  a Portuguese  noble,  leav- 
ing his  own  country  because  of  ill  treatment,  became  a sub- 
ject of  Spain.  King  Charles  I.  fitted  out  a fleet  for  him, 
and  Magellan  agreed  to  spend  ten  years  seeking  for  islands 
in  the  Southern  Sea,  to  conquer  for  Spain.  On  August  to, 
1519,  the  fleet  sailed  from  San  Lucar  de  Barrameda,  south- 
ward. Magellan  sailed  down  the  eastern  coast  of  South 
America,  seeking  a passage  into  the  ocean  which  Balboa  had 
discovered  and  named  the  Southern  Sea.  They  had  many 
hardships.  One  ship  was  wrecked  and  one  deserted;  but  on 
October  28,  r520,  they  reached  the  passage  now  known  as 
the  Straits  of  Magellan.  This  passage  is  between  Patagonia 
and  Tierra  del  Fuego.  They  sailed  through  the  Straits,  and 
on  November  26,  r520,  entered  the  Southern  Sea.  Magellan 
named  this  sea  the  Pacific  Ocean.  On  March  r6,  r52r,  the 
fleet  reached  the  Ladrone  Islands.  They  did  not  remain  long, 
but  sailed  toward  the  southwest.  They  touched  at  Malhon, 
and  went  on  along  the  coast  of  Mindanao.  They  landed  at  the 
mouth  of  the  Butuan  River,  and  were  well  received  by  the 
chief  and  his  people.  Magellan  claimed  the  country  for 
Spain.  The  chief  of  Butuan  went  with  the  Spanish  to  Cebu. 
Magellan  swore  friendship  with  the  king  of  Cebu,  and  the 
latter  was  baptized.  Magellan,  with  forty  Spaniards,  offered 
to  fight  the  people  of  Mactan,  who  were  at  war  with  the 
Cebuans.  Magellan  was  killed,  however,  and  the  Spaniards 
were  driven  back.  The  new  Spanish  leader  was  killed,  with 


26 


THE  STORT  OF  THE  PHILIPPINES. 


twenty-six  of  his  men,  at  a feast  given  by  the  king  of  Cebu 
on  shore.  The  Spanish  sunk  one  of  their  ships;  and  the 
other  two,  with  all  the  Spaniards  left,  sailed  for  Borneo. 

Questions. — What  did  people  believe  in  the  time  of  Colum- 
bus about  the  shape  of  the  earth  ? What  did  they  think 
about  the  sea  ? What  European  first  saw  the  Pacific  Ocean  ? 
How  did  he  reach  it  ? Who  was  Magellan  ? How  did  he 
come  to  take  service  with  the  king  of  Spain  ? When  did 
Magellan’s  fleet  leave  Spain  ? What  course  did  it  take  ? 
Tell  when  he  discovered  the  Straits.  Where  did  Magellan 
go  after  entering  the  Pacific  ? Give  an  account  of  his  land- 
ing at  Butuan.  Where  did  he  go  next  ? How  did  he  die  ? 
What  then  became  of  the  fleet  ? 


Chapter  II. 

EARLY  SETTLEMENTS. 

N the  month  of  September,  1522,  a few 
weeks  over  three  years  after  Magellan’s 
proud  fleet  sailed  from  San  Lucar  de  Barra- 
meda,  in  Spain,  a single  ship  put  into  that 
port.  She  was  seaworn  and  battered,  with  torn  sails, 
and  timbers  warped  and  scarred  by  many  a storm.  The 
people  hailed  her  with  joy,  and  everywhere  in  Spain 
men  were  glad  when  they  heard  of  her  safe  home-com- 
ing. This  ship  was  the  Victoria,  commanded  by  Cap- 
tain Juan  Sebastian  del  Cano  (sa  bas'te  an  del  ka'no), 
a statue  of  whom  now  stands  in  the  main  hall  of  the 
Palacio  in  Manila.  She  was  the  only  one  left  of  the 
five  ships  that  had  gone  out  with  Magellan  three  years 
before. 

But  battered  and  scarred  as  she  was,  the  Victoria  was 
a ship  to  be  proud  of.  She  had  sailed  clear  around  the 
world,  and  at  that  time  no  other  ship  had  ever  done 
such  a thing.  No  wonder,  then,  that  everybody  was 
glad  to  see  her,  and  was  proud  of  her.  The  people  were 


28 


THE  STORT  OF  THE  PHILIPPINES. 


sorry  when  they  learned  of  the  sad  fate  of  Magellan, 
but  there  were  still  brave  captains  and  clever  seamen 
in  Spain,  and  these  at  once  began  making  plans  to  go 
to  the  new-found  San  Lazarus  Isles. 

One  of  the  expeditions  that  were  fitted  out  was  lost; 
but  in  1542  a second  company  left  the  city  of  Navidad 
(na  ve  dath')  in  Mexico,  or  New  Spain,  as  that  country 
was  often  called.  This  one  was  commanded  by  a Spanish 
nobleman  named  Ruy  Lopez  de  Villalobos  (re  lo  peth'  da 
vel  ya  lo'bos).  After  a long,  hard  journey  the  expe- 
dition reached  the  island  now  called  Samar.  The 
Spanish  did  not  try  to  settle  there,  but  Ruy  Lopez 
named  this  island  Isla  Filipina,  in  honor  of  Prince 
Philip  of  Spain. 

/ That  one  little  fact  is  of  interest  to  us,  because  about 
I a year  later  a certain  Spanish  gentleman  who  was  writ- 
1 ing  a letter  home  from  Mexico  spoke  of  the  whole 
\ group  of  islands  as  Las  Islas  Filipinas.  This  name  was 
c at  once  taken  up  in  Spain,  No  one  remembered  that 
Magellan  had  named  the  islands  San  Lazarus,  but 
every  one  called  them  Islas  Filipinas;  and  so  these 
V^Philippine  Islands  received  a name  which  they  have 
ever  since  kept. 

The  Spanish  gentleman  who  wrote  that  letter  was 
Don  Miguel  Lopez  de  Legaspi.  He  was  a nobleman 
of  Spain,  but  for  many  years  he  lived  in  Mexico. 
He  was  one  of  the  many  great  men  who,  in  early  times, 
made  Spain’s  name  a proud  one.  He  was  a young  man 
when  he  went  to  New  Spain  and  began  to  practice  law. 
He  was  an  honest  gentleman  and  an  able  statesman, 
and  before  many  years  he  was  made  mayor  of  the  City 
of  Mexico.  He  seems  to  have  been  a truly  religious 


EARLY  SETTLEMENTS. 


29 


man,  wise  and  just ; 
a man  to  trust,  and 
one  well  able  to 
lead  other  men. 
For  such  men 
there  are  always 
high  places  in  the 
world.  Legaspi 
was,  moreover,  a 
brave  soldier  and 
a skillful  sailor. 

It  is  not  strange, 
therefore,  that  the 
king  of  Spain 
should  have  known 
about  him.  The 
king  at  this  time 
was  Philip  II.,  for 
whom,  when  he 
was  prince,  these 
islands  were 
named.  He  came 
to  the  throne  in 
1555,  and  soon  after 
was  minded  to  send 
out  an  expedition 
to  settle  in  the 
country  named  for 
him.  He  looked 
about  for  a man  to 
command  this  ex- 
pedition, and  his 


STATUE  OF  SEBASTIAN  DEL  CANO. 
In  the  Palacio,  Manila. 


30 


THE  STORT  OF  THE  PHILIPPINES. 


choice  fell  upon  Legaspi,  So  he  made  him  general  of 
the  whole  force. 

There  were  four  ships  and  a frigate  in  the  new  fleet, 
and  all  were  strongly  armed  and  well  stocked  for  the 
journey.  The  force  of  men  numbered  400  soldiers 
and  sailors,  carefully  chosen,  and  fit  for  the  brave  ad- 
venture before  them. 

With  the  fleet  there  were  also  six  friars  of  the  Order 
of  St.  Augustine,  and  the  leader  of  these  was  a man 
after  Legaspi’s  own  heart.  His  name  was  Andres  de 
Urdaneta  (an'dias  da  ur'da  na'ta).  He  had  been  at 
one  time  a captain  in  King  Charles’s  navy,  and  had 
long  wanted  King  Charles  I.  to  send  him  on  an  expe- 
dition to  the  Pacific.  But  the  king  was  weary  of  wars 
and  longed  for  rest.  Of  his  own  accord  he  left  the 
throne,  to  retire  into  private  life;  and  Urdaneta  took 
holy  orders. 

When  Philip  H.  was  making  ready  his  great  expedi- 
tion, he  remembered  his  father’s  friend  Urdaneta, 
and  chose  him  to  go  with  Legaspi  as  captain  of  the 
spiritual  forces  of  the  fleet.  These  two  men,  Legaspi 
and  Urdaneta,  were  warm  friends.  It  i-s  very  fitting 
that  in  the  monument  on  the  Luneta  in  Manila,  their 
figures  should  to-day  stand  side  by  side.  When  we 
see  this  monument,  we  should  remember  the  brave 
journey  these  two  men  made  together  years  ago,  and 
the  bright  future  which  they  hoped  to  secure  for  these 
islands. 

This  new  fleet  sailed  from  Navidad,  on  the  coast 
of  Mexico,  on  the  21st  day  of  November,  1564.  The 
expedition  was  unlike  the  ones  that  had  gone  before 
it.  It  had  for  its  aim  the  setting  up  of  Spain’s  rule  in 


EARLY  SETTLEMENTS. 


31 

the  islands,  whereas  the  others  had  gone  out  to  seek 
new  lands  and  to  conquer  them.  The  men  with  Le- 
gaspi  meant  to  stay  in  the  islands  and  to  make  their 
homes  there. 

Legaspi  had  been  warned  not  to  go  first  to  Cebu. 
His  advisers  thought  it  would  be  better  to  settle  on 
one  of  the  other  islands  and  slowly  to  make  friends 
with  the  Cebuans  before  going  to  live  among  them. 
This,  however,  was  not  Legaspi’s  plan.  He  knew 
that  the  Cebuans  were  the  very  people  whom  he  must 
win  over  at  first,  if  he  hoped  to  have  peace  in  his  new 
home.  You  see,  the  Spaniards  as  yet  knew  nothing 
about  the  great  island  of  Luzon.  They  had  no  knowl- 
edge of  the  size  and  nature  of  this  new  country,  but 
thought  the  best  part  of  it  lay  to  the  south. 

Legaspi  sailed  for  Cebu,  but  when  he  began  to  draw 
near  to  the  archipelago  he  sent  one  of  his  ships  ahead 
to  learn  what  sort  of  welcome  the  expedition  might 
look  for  from  the  Cebuans.  The  commander  of  this 
ship  brought  back  a gloomy  report.  The  Cebuans 
had  not  been  at  all  friendly.  Instead,  they  had  caught 
and  killed  one  of  the  men  of  the  landing  crew  from  the 
ship,  and  would  have  killed  the  others  had  not  the  Span- 
ish pulled  off  from  shore  and  gone  back  to  their  ship. 

When  this  report  was  brought  to  Legaspi  he  was 
very  sorry.  He  at  once,  however,  made  up  his  mind 
to  go  to  Cebu  and  subdue  the  people.  This  he  thought 
was  his  duty  toward  his  king;  so  the  fleet  sailed  to 
Cebu.  It  came  safe  into  harbor,  and  the  soldiers 
landed  in  front  of  the  town  of  Cebu  on  the  27th  day  of 
April,  1565.  The  Spanish  were  amazed  and  delighted 
with  the  beauty  and  fruitfulness  of  the  island.  Weary 


32  THE  STORT  OF  THE  PHILIPPINES. 

with  their  long  voyage,  they  would  gladly  have  made 
friends  with  the  people  and  been  at  peace  in  that  lovely 
spot. 

The  people,  however,  would  not  be  friends.  They 
had  driven  the  Spanish  from  their  shore  once,  and  did 
not  mean  that  the  strangers  should  come  back  to  live 
there.  The  chief.  King  Tupas  (to'pas),  was  a brave 


ANCIENT  FORT  COMMANDING  CEBU  HARBOR. 

and  warlike  man,  and  with  a large  army  he  came  down 
to  the  shore  to  beat  off  the  newcomers.  A fierce  bat- 
tle was  fought  there  by  the  sea,  but  it  did  not  last 
long.  The  spears  and  arrows  of  the  Cebuans  were  of 
little  use  against  Spanish  armor,  while  the  Spanish  fire- 
arms did  deadly  work  among  the  lightly-clad  Cebuan 
warriors.  After  a few  hours  the  Cebuans  were  forced 
back  from  the  shore,  and  the  Spanish  held  the  town. 

Legaspi  now  set  to  work  to  win  the  liking  of  the 


EARir  SETTLEMENTS. 


3} 


Cebuans.  He  believed  firmly  that  the  king  of  Spain 
was  by  divine  right  the  lawful  ruler  of  these  islands; 
but  for  himself,  he  meant  to  govern  kindly  and  wisely 
in  the  name  of  the  king.  He  could  not  do  this  until 
he  had  shown  the  people  that  he  and  his  soldiers  were 
their  friends.  To  this  task,  therefore,  he  bent  all  his 
wisdom. 

So  earnestly  did  the  Spanish  commander  work  to 
win  over  the  people,  that  in  a very  few  months  the 
whole  island  was  in  a state  of  peace.  A little  later. 
Padre  Urdaneta  went  back  to  Spain  to  report  all  that 
had  been  done.  King  Philip  1 1,  was  much  pleased 
with  the  friar’s  report,  and  made  Legaspi  “ governor- 
general  of  all  the  territory  in  the  archipelago  that  he 
might  conquer  for  Spain.” 

Matters  now  went  very  quietly  with  the  natives  for 
several  years;  but  trouble  came  to  the  Spaniards  from 
the  outside.  At  this  time  there  was  great  rivalry  be- 
tween Spain  and  Portugal  in  the  discovery  and  settle- 
ment of  new  lands.  In  each  of  these  countries  there 
were  many  daring  sailors  and  brave  soldiers  who  liked 
nothing  better  than  to  go  on  wild  adventures  for  their 
kings,  to  find  and  to  claim  new  lands. 

So  great  was  the  rivalry  between  these  two  countries 
that  Pope  Alexander  VI.,  soon  after  the  discovery  of 
America,  made  a decree  dividing  between  them  all  the 
lands  that  might  be  discovered.  The  dividing  line  was 
the  meridian  of  Cape  Verde  Island.  By  his  decree 
the  Pope  gave  all  heathen  lands  discovered  west  of 
that  line  to  Spain.  All  the  lands  that  should  be  dis- 
covered east  of  the  meridian  he  gave  to  Portugal. 
Under  this  ruling,  as  we  may  see  by  looking  at 
3 


34 


THE  STORT  OF  THE  PHILIPPINES. 


a map,  the  Philippine  Islands  would  have  fallen  to 
Portugal. 

Spain,  however,  claimed  these  islands  by  right  of 
discovery,  and  was  ready  to  uphold  her  claim  by  force 
of  arms.  This  Legaspi  had  to  do  before  he  had  been 
long  in  Cebu.  An  expedition  of  Portuguese  came  out 
against  the  Spanish,  and,  but  for  Legaspi’s  brave 
defense  of  the  island,  would  have  taken  it  from  them. 
The  Portuguese  were  forced  to  retire,  however,  and 
though  for  years  there  was  much  trouble  over  the 
matter,  Portugal  never  made  good  her  claim  to  the 
Philippines. 

By  1570  Legaspi  had  made  the  town  of  Cebu  a city 
and  the  seat  of  government.  In  the  spring  of  this 
year  a grandson  of  his,  a 5mung  Spanish  captain  named 
Juan  Salcedo  (sal  sa'do),  came  from  Mexico  to  help 
him  in  the  islands.  He  was  a very  young  man,  but 
a good  soldier,  and  wise  beyond  his  years.  His  grand- 
father was  glad,  indeed,  to  have  such  a helper,  and 
sent  him  out  at  the  head  of  a strong  force  to  visit  all 
the  islands. 

The  Spanish  had  learned  by  this  time  about  the 
island  of  Luzon  that  lay  to  the  north,  so  Salcedo  was 
ordered  to  go  up  there  and  see  what  it  was  like.  He 
sailed  from  Cebu  early  in  the  summer,  and  made  his 
way  northward  to  the  great  bay  of  Manila.  Here  he 
found  a town  called  Maynila  by  the  people  who  lived 
there,  and  here  he  landed  with  his  company  of  soldiers, 
all  in  full  armor. 

The  people  of  Luzon  had  never  before  seen  Euro- 
pean soldiers.  They  thought  that  these  were  gods, 
and  not  men,  and  made  haste  to  be  friends  with  them. 


EARLY  SETTLEMENTS. 


35 


THE  MONUMENT  TO  LEGASPI  AT  CEBU  CITY. 

They  could  not  understand  the  firearms  which  the 
soldiers  carried,  and  were  much  afraid  of  them.  They 
gave  up  their  city  at  once,  and  brought  food  and  fruits 
as  offerings  to  the  strange  visitors.  Salcedo  spoke 
kindly  to  them,  and  when  he  had  made  them  under- 
stand what  he  wanted,  they  all  swore  loyalty  to  Spain. 


36  THE  STORT  OF  THE  PHILIPPINES. 


But  Soliman  (so  le'man),  chief  of  Maynila,  soon 
saw  that  these  hug^ strangers  were  only  men,  after  all. 
Then  he  was  filled  with  sorrow  to  think  that  he  had 
given  up  his  city  to  them,  and  made  up  his  mind  to 
win  it  back.  He  gathered  all  his  warriors  and  led 
them  against  the  Spanish,  but  it  was  of  no  use.  Sal- 
cedo’s forces  were  too  strong  for  his  army,  and  Soli- 
man was  defeated.  He  was  driven  out  from  his  city 
again  ; but  this  time,  rather  than  let  the  Spanish  have 
it,  he  set  fire  to  it  and  burned  it  down. 

Juan  Salcedo  now  showed  himself  to  be  kind  as  well 
as  brave.  When  he  had  taken  Soliman  prisoner,  he 
did  not  punish  him  for  breaking  his  oath  of  fealty  to 
Spain.  He  forgave  him  freely,  and  let  him  take  the 
oath  again.  Then  he  let  him  go  on  ruling  his  people 
in  the  name  of  the  king  of  Spain. 

After  this  Salcedo  passed  on  through  Luzon,  claim- 
ing the  country  for  Philip  1 1.  He  visited  those  parts 
now  known  as  Laguna  (la  go'na),  Pangasinan  (pan  gas- 
e nan'),  and  the  Camarines  (cam  a re'nes).  He  took  the 
city  of  Cainta  (ka  en'ta),  where  a Moro  chief  ruled,  and 
then  went  to  what  is  now  Ilocos  Sur  (el  o'cos  sor). 
One  of  his  captains,  named  Martin  de  Goiti  (mar'tin 
da  go  e'te),  he  left  at  Maynila  with  a small  force  to 
guard  the  camp.  Goiti  also  conquered  the  people  of 
Pampanga  (pam  pan'ga).  Later  Salcedo  sent  a mes- 
senger to  his  grandfather,  Governor-General  Legaspi, 
asking  him  to  come  at  once  to  Maynila. 

During  all  the  time  that  Salcedo  was  taking  Maynila 
and  bringing  the  country  under  the  rule  of  Spain, 
Legaspi  was  busy  in  the  Visayas  (vis  a'yas).  He  had 
been  in  the  country  five  years  or  more,  and  had  done 


EARLT  SETTLEMENTS. 


37 


much  to  make  peace  with  the  people.  The  chief  of 
Cebu  had  accepted  baptism,  with  many  of  the  Cebuans, 
and  one  of  his  daughters  was  married  to  a Spaniard. 
There  was  great  good  feeling  between  the  two  races, 
and  the  Cebuans  looked  upon  the  Spanish  as  friends. 
Well  pleased,  therefore,  with  the  way  things  were 
going  in  Cebu,  Legaspi  went  on  a tour  through  all 
the  Visayan  group. 

Legaspi  was  at  Iloilo  on  the  island  of  Panay  (pan  I') 
when  this  messenger  found  him  and  told  him  all  that 
Salcedo  had  done  in  Luzon.  Legaspi  was  much 
pleased  at  the  news.  He  saw  at  once  that  Maynila 
was  the  place  of  all  others  on  the  islands  in  which 
to  set  up  the  government,  and  he  made  ready  to 
go  to  Luzon.  He  could  do  this  all  the  more  easily 
because  of  the  way  he  had  managed  things  in  the  Vis- 
ayas.  All  the  native  chiefs  were  still  in  power,  and 
Legaspi  left  them  to  rule  as  they  had  always  done, 
save  that  they  now  ruled  in  the  name  of  the  king  of 
Spain.  The  governor-general  was  able,  therefore,  to 
leave  behind  him  a quiet,  orderly  government,  and 
to  give  his  mind  freely  to  the  new  work  before  him. 

The  journey  northward  was  made  in  safety,  and 
early  in  March  of  the  year  1571,  Legaspi  and  his  party 
reached  Cavite  (ka  ve'ta).  Here  they  were  met  by 
the  Tagal  (ta'gal)  chief,  Lacondola  (la  con  db'la),  rajah 
or  king  of  Tondo  (ton'do),  who  is  sometimes  also 
spoken  of  as  Rajah  Matanda  (ma  tan'da)  or  the  “ old 
Rajah.  ” 

Lacondola  welcomed  Legaspi  as  the  lawful  ruler,  and 
told  him  that  he  and  his  people  were  loyal  to  the  king  of 
Spain.  The  party  then  went  on  to  Maynila,  and  here 


Legaspi  now  declared  King  Philip  the  overlord  of 
that  whole  country,  and  made  Maynila  the  capital. 
He  changed  the  spelling  of  the  name  to  Manila.  This 
word  is  made  up  of  two  Tagal  words — may,  which 
means  “ to  have,”  and  nila,  a kind  of  tree  that  once 
grew  thickly  around  the  city — and  Maynila  means  that 
there  were  many  nila  trees  there. 


LEGASPI  SAILING  TO  MANILA. 


38  THE  STORY  OF  THE  PHILIPPINES. 


also  Legaspi  was  greeted  as  the  king’s  representative. 
Soliman,  the  former  king  of  Maynila,  was  never  a really 
willing  subject  o'f  Spain.  But  he  was  a nephew  of  La- 
condola,  and  the  old  Rajah’s  counsel  had  great  weight 
with  him  ; so  he  never  rebelled  against  the  new  ruler. 


EARLY  SETTLEMENTS. 


39 


Lacondola  and  Soliman  joined  forces  with  Martin  de 
Goiti,  to  help  strengthen  the  new  rule  in  the  islands. 
The  country  now  known  as  Batangas  (batan'gas)  Prov- 
ince was  then  ruled  by  several  chiefs  who  were  usually 
at  war  with  the  Tagals  and  other  tribes.  They  and 
their  people  had  come  from  Borneo  and  had  inter- 
married with  the  Negritos  (na  gre'tos).  They  were 
great  hunters  and  good  fighters,  but  would  not  yield 
to  the  Spaniards;  so,  with  the  aid  of  other  tribes,  the 
Spaniards  drove  them  from  the  country.  There  were 
other  chiefs  ruling  in  the  districts  about  Manila  Bay; 
but  these  showed  themselves  friendly  to  Spain,  and 
were  left  in  office,  to  govern  in  the  name  of  the  king. 

The  work  of  putting  the  country  in  order  now  went 
on  rapidly.  In  June,  1571,  Legaspi  formed  the  City 
Council  of  Manila,  and  began  to  lay  the  foundation  for 
a wise  and  just  rule  in  these  islands.  He  made  a plan 
for  Manila,  and  had  the  city  laid  out  in  squares  and 
streets  just  as  we  see  it  to-day  inside  the  walls.  He 
also  set  the  people  to  work  building  these  walls  for  a 
defense  against  the  wild  tribes.  The  walls  were  nine- 
teen years  in  building,  and  to-day,  after  more  than 
three  hundred  years,  they  are  still  strong  and  beauti- 
ful, to  show  how  well  the  Tagal  people  builded.  The 
fort  at  the  mouth  of  the  Pasig  River  was  also  begun 
at  this  time. 

Governor-General  Legaspi  was  a strong,  wise  ruler 
for  this  country.  He  was  a man  far  ahead  of  his  times 
and  of  his  people,  “ a good  man  among  men,  and  a 
great  man  among  statesmen.”  If  his  plans  for  the 
Philippines  had  been  carried  out,  the  history  of  the 
islands  would  be  very  different  from  what  it  is  to-day. 


40 


THE  STORY  OF  THE  PHILIPPINES. 


If  those  who  came  after  him  had  been  as  wise  and  as 
kind  as  he,  the  Filipinos  would  have  been  a happy, 
contented  people. 

But  dark  days  came  all  too  soon  to  the  colony.  On 
the  20th  day  of  August,  1572,  Legaspi  died,  worn  out 
by  the  hard  labors  of  his  active,  useful  life.  He  was 
buried  in  the  Augustine  Chapel  of  San  Fausto,  in 
Manila,  and  another  sort  of  rule  soon  began  in  the 
islands. 

Summary. — The  Victoria,  commanded  by  Juan  Sebastian 
del  Cano,  reached  Spain  in  September,  1522.  She  was  the 
first  ship  to  sail  around  the  world.  Twenty  years  later  Ruy 
Lopez  de  Villalobos  commanded  an  expedition  which  went  to 
Samar.  He  named  this  island  “ Isla  Filipina, ” and  later 
Legaspi  gave  the  name  “ Islas  Filipinas  ” to  the  entire  archi- 
pelago. Miguel  de  Legaspi  commanded  an  expedition  sent 
out  by  King  Philip  11.  to  settle  in  the  islands.  With  him 
came  the  Augustine  friar  P.  LTdaneta.  This  fleet  left  Navidad, 
Mexico,  November  21,  1564.  The  Spanish  went  to  Cebu, 
conquered  the  people,  and  then  began  to  make  friends  with 
them  and  to  build  up  the  government.  Later  the  Spanish 
had  trouble  with  the  Portuguese,  who  came  to  claim  the 
country,  but  were  driven  away.  In  1570,  Juan  Salcedo  came 
out.  He  went  to  Luzon,  took  Maynila,  and  then  sent  a 
messenger  to  Legaspi  to  tell  him  to  come  there.  Legaspi  was 
in  the  Visayas,  pacifying  the  country,  but  he  at  once  went 
to  Maynila.  He  was  well  received  by  Lacondola  and  Soliman, 
and  set  up  his  capital  in  Maynila.  He  formed  the  City 
Council,  made  a plan  for  the  city,  and  had  work  begun  on 
the  walls.  He  began  a wise  and  humane  rule  in  the  islands, 
but  died,  in  August,  1572,  before  he  was  able  to  carry  out 
many  of  his  plans. 


EARLT  SETTLEMENTS. 


41 


Questions. — When  did  the  Jicforia  return  to  Spain  ? What 
had  she  done  ? How  did  the  Islas  Filipinas  get  their  name  ? 
AVho  was  Miguel  de  Legaspi  ? Who  was  Urdaneta  ? When 
did  Legaspi’s  expedition  start  ? Where  did  it  sail  from  ? 
How  was  he  received  in  Cebu  ? \Vho  was  Juan  Salcedo  ? 
Tell  of  his  work  in  Luzon.  When  did  Legaspi  come  to 
Manila  ? Who  received  him  ? AVhen  was  the  City  Council 
founded?  What  sort  of  man  was  Legaspi  ? When  did  he  die? 


Chapter  III. 

THE  COUNTRY  AND  ITS  PEOPLE. 

EFORE  we  go  farther  with  this  story  of  the 
Philippines,  let  us  look,  for  a little  while, 
at  the  country  itself,  and  the  people  who 
live  in  it. 

Men  who  are  wise  in  science  tell  us  that  there  must 
have  been  in  the  Pacific  Ocean,  some  thousands  of  years 
ago,  a great  body  of  land  that  has  now  sunk  out  of 
sight.  We  do  not  know  when  it  sank  ; but  after  it  did 
so  there  must  have  been,  one  after  another,  a great 
many  volcanic  eruptions  that  broke  up  the  sunken 
continent  into  smaller  tracts  of  land.  Many  of  these 
eruptions  took  place  under  water,  and  with  the  overflow 
of  lava  the  separate  tracts  grew  larger. 

Later  still  this  sunken  land  began  slowly  to  rise  from 
the  sea.  In  some  places  this  change  is  still  going  on. 
New  islands  have  come  up  out  of  the  sea  within  the 
memory  of  people  who  are  still  alive,  and  there  have 
been,  within  modern  times,  great  changes  on  some  of  the 
Philippine  Islands.  The  whole  group  is  of  volcanic 


■THE  COUNTRT  AND  ITS  PEOPLE. 


43 


origin,  but  there  are  now  very  few  active  volcanoes  left 
in  the  country.  Of  these  Mayon  (ml  on'),  in  the  south- 
ern part  of  Luzon,  is  the  largest.  This  is  said  to  be 
the  most  beautiful  volcano  in  the  world.  Its  form  is  a 
perfect  cone.  Taal(ta'al)  volcano,  which  is  on  an  island 
in  Lake  Bombon  (bom'bon),  is  also  a famous  volcano. 

There  are  over  1,200  islands  in  the  archipelago,  but 
we  do  not  know  exactly  how  many  there  are.  They 
have  never  been  counted.  Some  of  them  are  hardly 
more  than  bits  of  rock  showing  above  the  sea,  while 
Luzon,  the  largest,  is  480  miles  long. 

On  all  of  the  islands  there  are  large  mountains. 
Great  peaks  rise,  in  some  cases  to  a height  of  7,000  or 
8,000  feet,  covered  to  the  very  top  with  forests  of 
mighty  trees.  The  finest  building  timber  in  the  world 
will  some  day  come  from  these  islands.  Teak,  ebony, 
mahogany,  and  cedar  trees  grow  here,  besides  rubber 
and  camphor  trees,  and  many  others  for  which  there 
is  great  demand  in  all  the  markets  of  the  world.  Fine 
fruit  trees  of  many  sorts  are  also  found.  When  there 
are  good  roads  in  the  islands  over  which  to  haul  logs, 
and  modern  mills  and  machinery  to  make  them  into 
lumber,  the  timber  trade  of  the  Philippines  will  be 
a great  industry. 

There  are  now  about  eight  millions  of  people  in 
the  Philippines.  How  many  were  here  when  the 
Spanish  came  we  do  not  know.  The  larger  part  of  the 
people  in  the  islands  are  of  the  Malay  (ma'la)  race. 
These  were  not  the  first  dwellers  in  the  country,  but 
came  from  the  Malay  Peninsula,  and  it  is  likely  that 
they  had  not  been-  here  more  than  two  or  three  hun- 
dred years  when  the  Spanish  came.  They  are  the 


44  the  STORT  of  the  PHILIPPINES. 

people  whose  lives  and  acts  make  up  most  of  what  we 
call  the  “history”  of  the  islands,  and  they  are  the 
people  usually  meant  by  the  term  “ Filipinos.” 

Up  in  the  mountains,  living  in  nearly  as  wild  a state 


ABORIGINES  OF  MINDANAO. 

as  when  the  Spanish  came,  we  still  find  the  aborigines. 
This  is  a word  which  means  the  first  dwellers  in  a coun- 
try. It  is  thought  that  the  first  people  who  lived  in 
the  northern  islands  were  the  Aetas,  or  Negritos.  A 


THE  COUNTRr  AND  ITS  PEOPLE. 


45 

race  called  the  Indonesians  (in  do  na'se  ans)  are  the 
aborigines  of  the  great  island  of  Mindanao. 

The  Negritos  are  dying  out.  They  are  a small,  timid 
people,  with  thick  lips  and  flat  noses.  Their  hair  is 
like  curly  wool.  They  hunt  and  fight  with  bows  and 
arrows,  and  are  very  quick  and  active.  Their  chief  food 
is  fish,  and  the  brown  mountain  rice  which  they  plant 
and  harvest.  Even  if  taken  when  children  and  brought 
up  in  a city,  they  do  not  grow  to  like  civilized  life,  but 
run  away  and  go  back  to  the  mountains  as  soon  as  they 
have  the  chance. 

An  important  tribe  of  wild  people  in  these  islands 
are  the  Igorrotes  (ig  o ro'tes),  of  whom  there  are  many 
on  Luzon.  The  Igorrotes  are  the  finest  and  strongest 
of  all  the  wild  tribes  in  the  country.  They  are  very 
brave,  and  are  good  fighters,  using  in  warfare  a short, 
broad  knife,  which  they  wield  with  deadly  skill.  They 
never  submitted  to  the  Spaniards,  and  were  badly  used 
by  that  people.  The  Spaniards  always  made  war  upon 
them,  and  at  one  time  tried  to  put  an  end  to  all  of  the 
tribe  in  Luzon.  They  burned  their  villages  and  killed 
all  who  fell  in  their  power.  They  could  not  conquer 
them,  however,  and  the  Igorrotes  have  always  hated 
the  Spanish  fiercely. 

The  civilizecf  Filipino  people  spring  from  none  of 
these  wild  tribes.  As  we  have  said,  they  are  Malays, 
and  came  here  from  the  great  Malay  Peninsula.  The 
Malays,  from  earliest  times,  were  a sea-going  folk,  dar- 
ing sailors,  and  skillful  in  managing  their  boats.  They 
went  boldly  to  sea  in  tiny  crafts,  with  only  the  stars 
to  guide  them,  taking  risks  such  as  no  Europeans  dared 
to  take.  They  overran  the  islands  of  the  South  Pacific, 


46 


THE  STORT  OF  THE  PHILIPPINES. 


going  even  as  far  as  the  island  of  Madagascar.  They 
settled  in  the  Philippines,  drove  the  natives  back  into 
the  mountains,  and  made  their  homes  along  the  coasts 
and  on  the  rich  plains.  They  had  a written  alphabet 
of  their  own  when  the  Spanish  came,  and  were  far 
ahead,  even  then,  of  the  native  races. 

The  Malays  who  settled  in  the  island  of  Mindanao 
were  converted  to  the  Moslem  faith  by  some  Arabian 
missionaries  who  came  to  that  island  as  early  as  the 
twelfth  or  thirteenth  century.  From  Mindanao  this 
religion  was  carried  to  the  island  of  Sulu  (so  I'o),  and  it 
is  now  the  faith  of  the  people  of  the  entire  Sulu  archi- 
pelago. The  people  who  held  to  this  religion  were 
called  Moros  by  the  Spanish,  and  by  this  name  they 
are  still  known. 

There  are  many  tribes  in  the  islands,  both  of  the 
aborigines  and  of  the  Malay  people.  In  early  days 
these  tribes  were  more  separate  than  at  present,  and 
had  little  to  do  with  one  another,  save  when  there  was 
war  among  them.  Each  had  its  own  language,  and 
even  now  a great  many  dialects  are  spoken  in  the 
islands.  This  fact,  among  others,  has  helped  to  keep 
the  tribes  apart  and  to  prevent  them  from  becoming 
a strong,  united  people. 

We  see,  from  what  has  been  said,  that  the  dwellers 
in  the  Philippine  Islands  are  not  strictly  a people 
in  the  sense  that  the  Spanish  or  the  English  are  a 
people.  Even  the  Malay  folk  in  the  islands  have 
been,  from  the  very  first,  split  up  into  many  tribes, 
having  little  in  common.  Under  some  methods  of 
government  these  tribes  might  have  been  united; 
but  Spanish  rule  was  not  of  a sort  to  bind  them 


THE  COUNTRY  AND  ITS  PEOPLE. 


47 


together.  Rather,  it  set  tribes  against  one  another, 
and  used  some  to  help  conquer  others.  It  did  not 
draw  them  together  in  a strong  national  life  such  as 


A MORO  OF  JOLO,  IN  THE  SULU  ARCHIPELAGO. 


has  made  the  United  States  of  America  a great  and 
powerful  nation. 

The  United  States  has  been  settled  by  people  from 
many  countries.  These  people  have  gone  to  America 


48 


THE  STORT  OF  THE  PHILIPPINES. 


from  nearly  every  nation  on  earth  ; but  the  different  races 
have  become  one  strong  American  people  by  reason  of 
a common  interest  in  the  good  government  of  their 
country,  and  a common  desire  for  its  welfare.  Each 
State  has  its  own  life  and  government,  but  all  are 
united  to  form  the  great  country  of  which  each  is  a 
part,  and  to  support  the  Federal  Government  which 
binds  the  States  together. 

When  the  Filipino  people  have  learned  thus  to  stand 
together,  a new  day  will  dawn  for  these  islands.  When 
the  people  all  speak  one  language,  and  when  young  and 
old  can  read  and  write  that  language,  the  country  will 
be  more  united,  and  will  begin  to  know  something  of 
that  national  life  which  other  countries  enjoy.  The 
people  will  then  be  united;  they  will  know  how  to 
govern  their  land  wisely  and  justly.  They  will  under- 
stand, as  they  have  not  done  before,  the  relation  one 
nation  bears  to  others  in  the  world,  and  will  be  able 
to  develop  the  great  wealth  of  their  country. 

The  two  great  tribes  of  Malay  Filipinos  are  the  Tagals 
andthe  Visa3^ans.  TheTagals  live  in  southern  Luzon,  the 
Visayans  in  the  group  of  islands  called  the  Visayas,  which 
lie  south  of  Luzon  and  north  of  Mindanao.  There  are, 
besides,  many  lesser  peoples  in  the  islands,  so  that,  as 
we  have  seen,  there  could  be  no  common  national  life. 

The  tribes  were  governed  by  great  chiefs  or  kings, 
who  ruled  through  small  chiefs  and  dattos.  Each  of 
these  was  at  the  head  of  about  a hundred  families 
whom  he  stood  for  in  the  tribal  council,  and  for  whom 
he  was  spokesman  before  the  great  chief.  The  small 
chief  was  called  the  head  of  a hundred.  It  was  a 
simple,  but  effective,  form  of  government,  and  suited 


jc 


03  CO  H i» 
O c O " 


= -o-D<rooHH 
O »)  £B  0,'  ^ O 


O TO 


3 


3 OP  S 

p-  ^ g'R 


OP  TO 


CL  TO 


5W-C3  >=!)o0e’o00ODo4| 

Q,  I 

3 j Ik  M 5<' ^-“If  I r*$|IJ'!l'c<(fic; 

I >aki)ay^/i,rLS' 

|s  -I 

I <2 

j u C i1§>  J 

I rt5>--nX‘ 


w 

a 

w 

Q 

S 

?? 

tr^ 

S 


_o 

to 


2^0  ^ I 

ye 

^ ^ 0 ^ ^ <d 


' c. 


4 


ANCIENT  ALPHABETS  IN  USE  IN  THE  ARCHIPELAGO  WHEN  THE  SPANISH  CAME. 


NEGRITOS  IN  A PRAHU. 


THE  COUNTRT  AND  ITS  PEOPLE. 


51 


the  people.  Legaspi  and  Salcedo  made  no  changes  in 
it,  except  to  declare  the  king  of  Spain  the  ruler  of  all 
the  tribes.  They  had  the  great  chiefs  swear  loyalty  to 
Spain,  and  then  left  them  to  govern  for  the  king. 

Later,  however,  when  Legaspi  and  Salcedo  were 
gone,  many  evils  crept  in.  The  great  chiefs  were  put 
out  of  power,  and  little  by  little  self-government  was 
taken  from  the  people.  They  came  at  last  to  have  no 
voice  in  the  ordering  of  their  own  lives,  and  no  one  to 
speak  for  them  to  their  unknown  ruler  in  Spain. 

Summary. — The  Philippine  Islands  are  believed  to  be  part 
of  a great  continent  that  once  lay  in  the  South  Pacific  Ocean. 
This  continent  sank.  Afterwards  a slow  upheaval  brought  the 
islands  up  from  the  sea.  The  Aetas,  or  Negritos,  were  the 
earliest  inhabitants  of  the  country.  The  Indonesians  of  Min- 
danao are  also  aborigines.  The  Igorrotes  are  a wild  tribe  of 
Luzon  and  the  Visayas,  who  have  from  the  first  been  enemies 
of  Spain.  The  Spanish  treated  them  cruelly  and  won  their 
hatred.  The  civilized  Filipinos  are  of  Malay  origin,  and 
came  here  from  the  Malay  Peninsula.  Those  who  settled  in 
Mindanao  were  converted  to  the  Mohammedan  faith  in  the 
twelfth  or  thirteenth  century  by  Arabian  missionaries;  and 
they  are  called  Moros.  The  people  of  the  islands  are  broken 
up  into  many  tribes,  and  this  has  hindered  their  becoming  a 
united  people.  The  tribal  form  of  government  was  simple, 
and  so  well  suited  to  the  country  that  Legaspi  made  little 
change  in  it.  The  Spanish  who  came  after  him,  however, 
took  all  self-government  from  the  people. 

Questions. — What  are  we  taught  of  the  origin  of  the  Philip- 
pine Islands  ? WTo  are  the  aborigines  ? What  is  the  origin 
of  the  civilized  Filipinos  ? How  did  the  Moslem  faith  come 
into  the  country  ? Describe  the  early  form  of  government. 


Chapter  IV. 

EARLY  TROUBLES. 

NTIL  the  beginning  of  the  nineteenth  cen- 
tury, when  Mexico  became  independent  of 
Spain,  the  Philippine  Islands  were  governed 
for  Spain  by  that  country.  This  worked 
great  hardship  in  the  islands.  Mexico  herself  was  a 
dependency  of  Spain,  and  so  the  Philippines  really 
became  a dependency  of  a dependency.  All  laws  for 
the  country  were  made  in  Mexico,  and  in  this  way 
the  islanders  were  removed  one  step  farther  from  the 
foreign  ruler  who  was  their  king. 

The  High  Court  of  Mexico  appointed  the  governor- 
general,  and  at  the  same  time  that  it  did  so  named  the 
man  who  should  succeed  him.  This  it  did  in  order 
that  there  might  be  no  time  lost  in  filling  the  office 
when  it  became  vacant.  When  Legaspi  died,  there- 
fore, his  successor  was  already  appointed,  and  at  once 
took  up  the  duties  of  his  office. 

The  new  governor-general  was  named  Guido  de 
Lavazares  (we'do  da  la  va  thar  as),  and  he  was  a very 


EARLY  TROUBLES. 


53 


different  sort  of  man  from  Legaspi.  He  was  more 
warlike  and  less  wise,  and  he  liked  to  meddle  in  mat- 
ters which  did  not  concern  him.  During  his  term  of 
office,  he  went  to  the  aid  of  a king  of  Borneo  who  had 
been  dethroned  by  his  rebellious  subjects,  and  helped 
the  king  to  regain  his  throne. 

He  was  so  elated  with  his  success  in  doing  this  that 
he  became  ambitious.  He  so  far  forgot  common  sense 
that  he  wanted  King  Philip  to  let  him  and  his  Philip- 
pine forces  make  war  on  China  and  conquer  that  coun- 
try for  Spain.  He  could  not  have  done  this,  and  the 
king  of  Spain  was  too  sensible  to  let  him  try.  Later, 
however,  the  governor-general  had  all  he  wished  of 
fighting  the  Chinese. 

After  Legaspi’s  death  his  grandson,  Juan  Salcedo, 
went  on  with  the  work  of  setting  up  Spanish  rule  in 
the  islands.  He  passed  through  the  northern  part  of 
Luzon,  and  wherever  he  went  told  the  people  that 
Philip  H.  was  their  king.  He  made  it  a point  always 
to  make  friends  with  the  great  chief  of  any  tribe  to 
which  he  went.  This  chief  he  would  win  over  to  swear 
fealty  to  Spain.  Then  Salcedo  would  leave  him  to 
rule  as  before,  only  in  the  name  of  the  king. 

He  promised  to  help  the  chiefs  against  their  enemies, 
and  was  ready,  with  his  soldiers,  to  fight  their  battles 
whenever  they  needed  him.  In  turn  he  trusted  them 
to  be  loyal  to  the  king,  and  to  keep  their  people  from 
rebelling.  He  did  not  try  to  improve  the  country  in 
any  way,  or  to  teach  the  people  anything  that  would 
help  them  to  make  it  better.  His  one  idea  v'^as  to  win 
territory  for  his  king.  This,  indeed,  was  all  that  the 
king  wanted  him  to  do. 


54 


THE  STORT  OF  THE  PHILIPPINES. 


Spain  wanted  much  territory,  a wide  dominion, 
more  than  she  wanted  loyal  subjects.  It  was  this 
greed  for  power  and  for  wealth  that  caused  her  down- 
fall, and  in  the  end  lost  for  her  the  rich  country  which 
she  had  gained  at  great  cost. 

Salcedo,  after  all,  was  a far  better  man  and  kinder 
to  the  people  than  were  most  of  those  who  came  after 
him.  He  had  much  of  that  wise  kindliness  which 
made  Legaspi  a good  ruler.  He  took  the  country  by 
force,  but  he  was  not  a tyrant.  He  did  not  oppress 
the  people,  nor  did  he  make  unwise  laws  to  govern 
them. 

He  made  his  headquarters  in  Ilocos  Sur,  meaning  to 
rule  the  northern  provinces  from  there.  He  had,  how- 
ever, hardly  settled  down  when  news  reached  him  of 
a great  danger  that  threatened  Manila.  Gathering  all 
his  forces  he  marched  southward  as  fast  as  his  army 
could  travel,  to  help  Martin  de  Goiti,  who  was  still  in 
charge  of  Manila,  to  defend  the  city.  It  was  this  same 
danger,  which  so  alarmed  Salcedo,  that  gave  Guido  de 
Lavazares  his  wish  to  fight  the  Chinese.  It  was  a most 
unexpected  danger,  and  came  without  warning  upon 
the  colony. 

At  about  the  time  when  Legaspi  was  founding  his 
capital  at  Manila,  a Chinese  pirate  named  Li-ma-hong 
(le  ma  hong')  was  sailing  the  waters  of  the  China  Sea. 
He  led  a large  force  of  men  as  lawless  as  himself,  and, 
as  time  went  on,  he  became  the  terror  of  sea-going 
folk  all  about  there.  He  grew  so  bold,  and  his  pirate 
fleet  so  strong,  that  he  dared  to  attack  even  the  great 
war  junks  of  China.  At  last  the  Chinese  Government 
declared  him  an  outlaw,  and  put  a price  on  his  head. 


PLAZA  DE  GOITI,  MANILA 


56  THE  STORT  OF  THE  PHILIPPINES. 


After  this  the  China  Sea  was  not  a safe  place  for  him, 
so  he  made  up  his  mind  to  go  somewhere  else. 

He  had  captured  the  crew  of  a trading  junk,  and 
from  these  men  he  learned  about  the  Philippine  Islands. 
What  they  told  him  pleased  him  so  much  that  he  de- 
cided to  go  to  Manila,  take  the  city,  and  set  up  a king- 
dom of  his  own  on  Luzon.  He  felt  certain  of  success 
in  this  undertaking;  for  he  had  a fleet  of  sixty-two 
armed  junks  and  a force  of  4,000  fighting  men.  In 
his  company  were  many  tradesmen  as  well  as  soldiers, 
and  many  women  went  with  the  fleet.  He  also  had 
plenty  of  supplies,  and  Li-ma-hong  was  sure  that,  once 
he  had  taken  the  country,  he  could  set  up  a colony. 

He  took  with  him,  on  his  own  junk,  the  crew  of  the 
captured  junk,  to  pilot  the  way,  and  with  his  fleet 
sailed  for  Luzon.  In  November,  1574,  they  reached 
the  north  coast  of  that  island.  Here  some  of  the 
pirates,  who  went  ashore  for  supplies,  sacked  and 
burned  a village  and  killed  many  of  tlie  Filipinos. 
Those  who  escaped  made  their  way  to  where  Salcedo 
was,  and  told  him  what  had  happened.  Thus  it 
came  about  that  the  Spanish  captain  learned  of  Li- 
ma-hong’s  scheme  before  the  pirate  reached  Manila. 

Leaving  the  northern  part  of  Luzon,  the  Chinese 
kept  on  along  the  coast  toward  Manila.  Before  they 
came  to  the  bay,  however,  the  fleet  was  caught  in  a 
typhoon.  Several  of  the  junks  and  some  200  men 
were  lost  in  the  storm.  Still,  Li-ma-hong  thought 
he  had  a force  strong  enough  to  take  Manila,  so  they 
went  on.  The  pirate  commander  landed  an  army  of 
1,500  men  before  Manila,  and  sent  them  up  to  take 
the  city. 


EARLY  TROUBLES. 


57 


They  were  led  by  a Japanese  named  Sioco  (se  o'ko), 
whom  Li-ma-hong  had  made  his  lieutenant,  and  in  a few 
hours  a savage  fight  was  waging  between  the  Spanish 
and  the  Chinese.  The  Spanish  force  was  small,  but 
well  armed,  and  every  man  knew  that  he  was  fighting 
for  life  against  a cruel  foe.  No  mercy  was  to  be  looked 
for  from  those  wild  pirates,  and  no  quarter  was  asked 


or  given.  Even  the  aged  governor-general  bore  arms 
in  the  fight,  for  every  man  was  needed.  The  first 
Spaniard  killed  was  brave  Martin  de  Goiti,  but  he  was 
not  the  last.  The  little  garrison  was  nearly  destroyed 
before  their  fortune  turned  and  the  pirates  were  driven 
back.  The  Japanese  leader  Sioco  was  killed,  and 


CHINESE  AVAR  JUNKS 
ATTACKING  MANILA. 


58  THE  STORT  OF  THE  PHILIPPINES. 


after  that  the  Chinese  fell  back  and  reentered  their 
junks. 

A few  days  later  Li-ma-hong  himself  led  a second 
attack.  But  meanwhile  native  troops  had  been  gath- 
ered, and  again  the  pirates  were  beaten.  This  time 
the  fleet  retired  to  the  mouth  of  the  Agno  River,  and 
Li-ma-hong  set  up  his  kingdom  in  what  is  now  the 
province  of  Pangasinan.  Here  the  Chinese  built  tem- 
ples and  began  to  plant  crops  and  engage  in  trade. 
They  felt  very  secure,  and  if  they  had  been  let  alone 
the  pirates  would  no  doubt  have  been  prosperous;  but 
punishment  was  at  hand  for  them. 

Juan  Salcedo,  with  his  soldiers,  had  reached  Manila, 
and  soon  afterwards  a war  junk  from  China  came  into 
harbor,  looking  for  Li-ma-hong.  This  war  junk  was 
sent  by  the  emperor,  who  had  learned  of  the  mischief 
the  pirate  was  doing  in  the  Philippines.  The  captain 
had  orders  to  find  Li-ma-hong  and  bring  him  to  justice, 
and  he  meant  to  do  this  if  he  could. 

The  junk  joined  the  Spanish  in  an  expedition  by 
water,  while  another  force  of  Spanish  and  Filipino  sol- 
diers went  forward  to  engage  the  pirates  on  land. 
When  these  attacking  forces  arrived,  Li-ma-hong  saw 
that  he  must  retreat  for  his  life,  so  he  played  a trick 
upon  the  enemy  and  upon  some  of  his  own  soldiers. 

He  told  off  some  of  his  men  to  go  forward  against 
the  enemy,  and  make  the  latter  believe  that  they  were 
the  main  body  of  the  Chinese.  The  trick  was  success- 
ful. When  the  Spanish  and  native  troops  made  the 
attack,  the  pirates,  after  a show  of  fighting,  began  to 
fall  back  toward  the  mountains.  The  enemy  gave 
chase  and  furnished  Li-ma-hong  the  chance  for  which 


EARLY  TROUBLES. 


59 


he  was  watching.  With  all  his  fleet  he  slipped  down 
the  river,  keeping  under  cover  of  the  reeds  and  tall 
grass,  gained  the  sea  and  fled,  leaving  his  soldiers  at 
the  mercy  of  the  foe. 

The  Chinese  thus  meanly  deserted  by  their  leader 
did  not  wait  to  be  killed,  but  retreated  in  earnest  to 
the  mountains.  Here  they  took  refuge  with  the  Igor- 
rotes,  and  here  they  spent  the  rest  of  their  lives.  They 
married  women  from  among  the  Igorrotes,  and  from 
them  are  descended  those  people  who  are  to-day  known 
as  the  Igorrote-Chinese. 

It  was  some  time  before  peace  and  a sense  of  safety 
were  restored  in  Manila.  Work  was  pushed  more  rap- 
idly on  the  city  walls,  which  were  still  building,  and 
upon  Fort  Santiago.  Other  troops  of  Spanish  were 
sent  from  Mexico  to  make  the  defense  of  the  city 
stronger,  but  long  before  they  came  Salcedo  went  back 
to  his  work  in  the  north.  He  died  of  fever  in  Ilocos 
Sur  a year  or  two  later. 

Captain  Salcedo  was  still  a young  man,  but  twenty- 
seven  years  old,  at  the  time  of  his  death  (March  ii, 
1576).  Had  he  lived  longer,  he  would  doubtless  have 
become  a great  statesman,  for  he  showed  much  tact 
and  wisdom  in  his  dealings  with  the  people.  He 
was  honestly  mourned  by  both  the  Spanish  and  the 
native  soldiers  of  his  army.  A few  years  after  his 
death,  his  bones  were  brought  to  Manila  and  laid  to 
rest  beside  those  of  his  grandfather,  Miguel  de  Legaspi. 

Summaij. — Up  to  the  beginning  of  the  nineteenth  century 
the  Philippine  Islands  were  governed  as  a dependency  of 
Mexico.  The  High  Court  of  Mexico  named  the  governor- 


6o 


THE  STORT  OF  THE  PHILIPPINES. 


general  and  made  laws  for  the  country.  Legaspi  was  suc- 
ceeded by  Guido  de  Lavazares.  After  Legaspi ’s  death  Sal- 
cedo went  to  Ilocos  Sur  to  carry  on  his  work  of  subjecting  the 
country  to  Spain.  In  1574  the  Chinese  pirate  Li-ma-hong 
made  an  attack  on  Manila,  meaning  to  take  the  city  and  set 
up  a kingdom  there.  Driven  back  from  the  city,  he  retreated 
to  the  mouth  of  the  Agno  River  and  settled  there  with  his 
pirate  band.  A Chinese  war  junk  came  to  the  help  of  the 
Spanish,  and  Li-ma-hong  was  forced  to  flee.  He  escaped, 
deserting  some  of  his  own  soldiers  whom  he  had  sent  inland. 
In  1576  Juan  Salcedo  died  in  Ilocos  Sur. 

Questions. — Describe  the  government  of  the  archipelago 
previous  to  the  nineteenth  century.  Who  succeeded  Le- 
gaspi? What  sort  of  man  was  he?  What  did  Salcedo  do 
after  Legaspi’s  death?  What  was  his  method  in  dealing  with 
the  people?  Give  an  account  of  Li-ma-hong’s  invasion. 
When  did  Juan  Salcedo  die? 


Chapter  V. 

BEGINNINGS  OF  STRIFE. 

R the  first  two  hundred  years,  as  we  have 
said,  the  Spanish  colony  in  the  Philippines 
was  governed  from  Mexico.  A Supreme 
Court,  or  Audencia,  like  that  of  Mexico,  was 
set  up  in  Manila.  This  court  tried  cases  and  settled 
law  questions  for  the  whole  archipelago.  The  Mex- 
ican code  of  law  was  in  force  here,  and  the  officials  in 
the  islands  tried  to  make  the  government  as  much  as 
possible  like  that  of  Mexico. 

This,  however,  was  a very  different  country  from 
Mexico.  'The  Filipinos  were  a very  different  people 
from  the  native  Mexicans.  What  worked  well,  there- 
fore, for  one  country  and  one  people,  did  not  suit 
at  all  for  the  other.  Often,  in  these  islands,  right  and 
justice  were  hindered  by  the  very  laws  made  to  help 
them.  The  men  who  framed  these  laws  did  not  know 
the  islands  or  the  Filipinos,  so  they  could  not  under- 
stand why  the  code  that  was  good  for  Mexico  should 
fail  here. 


62 


THE  STORr  OF  THE  PHILIPPINES. 


Soon  still  other  troubles  arose.  The  rulers  who 
came  after  Legaspi  did  away,  one  by  one,  with  the 
native  forms  of  government.  There  were  no  longer 
any  tribal  councils  in  which  the  heads  of  groups  could 
speak  for  their  people.  The  native  kings  and  chiefs 
were  set  aside,  and  the  people  then  had  no  representa- 
tives. There  was  nothing  to  check  the  power  of  the 
governor-general.  He  had  full  control  over  the  lives 
and  liberties  of  the  people,  and  no  one  could  call  him 
to  account  but  the  king  of  Spain. 

In  name  the  ancient  office  of  head  of  a hundred 
still  lived  in  the  office  of  “ cabeza  de  barangay  ” (ca- 
ba'tha  da  bar  an'gl),  which  the  Spanish  kept  up.  The 
office  itself,  however,  was  no  longer  high  or  honorable. 
The  chief  duty  of  the  cabeza  de  barangay  came  to  be 
the  raising  of  money  among  the  people  for  the  govern- 
ment. If  the  people  were  poor,  if  times  were  bad,  if 
the  crops  had  failed,  still  this  money  must  be  raised. 
The  government  looked  to  the  barangay  chief  to  get 
it,  in  one  way  or  another.  Often,  when  the  people 
were  unable  to  pay,  his  property  was  taken,  and  many 
a headman  of  a village  was  stripped  of  all  he  had  by 
the  officers  of  government.  In  time,  therefore,  the 
office  fell  into  such  disgrace  that  no  self-respecting 
Filipino  would  take  it.  At  last  a law  had  to  be  passed 
compelling  service  as  cabeza  de  barangay. 

Very  early  in  the  history  of  the  colony  there  began 
to  be  strife  among  the  Spanish  authorities.  The  bitter 
misunderstanding  between  Church  and  State  arose 
almost  at  once,  and  it  continued  through  all  the  years 
of  Spanish  rule  in  the  islands.  Soon  after  its  forma- 
tion, the  Supreme  Court,  too,  became  a party  in  the 


BEGINNINGS  OF  STRIFE. 


63 


quarrels  of  the  powers.  Each  of  these  three  parties 
was  determined  to  control  matters,  and  the  result  was 
very  bad  for  the  colony.  At  times,  indeed,  the  quar- 
rel was  so  sharp  that  affairs  in  the  country  were  at 
a standstill,  and  ruin  threatened  the  colony. 

So  matters  went  on  until  the  year  1587,  when  they 
became  so  bad  that 
the  Bishop  of  Manila 
sent  a secret  messen- 
ger to  Spain  to  lay 
complaint  before  the 
king.  This  messenger 
was  a friar  named 
Alonzo  Sanchez  (a  lon'- 
tho  san'cheth).  He 
went  first  to  Mexico 
and  laid  his  case  be- 
fore the  viceroy,  who 
sent  him  on  to  Spain. 

There  he  gained  a 
hearing  from  King 
Philip  II.,  who  prom- 
ised to  look  into  the 
matter. 

The  king  then  put  the  case  in  charge  of  one  of  his 
ministers,  who  studied  it  with  great  care,  and  at  last 
made  a report  which  was  the  basis  of  a royal  decree. 
In  this  decree  the  king  gave  attention  to  a good  many 
things  that  were  wrong  in  the  islands,  and  made  some 
definite  laws  in  regard  to  them. 

The  decree  did  away  altogether  with  the  Supreme 
Court,  and  appointed  justices  of  the  peace  in  its  place. 


KING  PHILIP  II. 


64 


THE  ST0R7'  OF  THE  PHILIPPINES. 


IL  set  forth  plainly  just  what  should  be  the  field  of 
action  of  the  State  and  what  of  the  Church.  It  gave 
the  governor-general  full  power  to  do  as  he  liked  in 
matters  regarding  all  distant  and  unexplored  parts  of 
the  country.  In  what  he  did  in  such  places  he  need 
not  consult  even  the  king’s  will.  If,  however,  he  wished 
to  undertake  a war,  or  any  expedition  that  must  be 
paid  for  out  of  the  royal  treasury,  he  must  first  submit 
his  plans  to  a council  made  up  of  the  Bishop  of  Manila 
and  the  chief  military  captains  in  the  islands. 

The  decree  also  forbade  the  making  of  any  more 
slaves  in  the  islands.  All  slaves  held  by  Spaniards 
were  to  be  set  free  at  once.  All  between  the  ages  of 
ten  and  twenty  years,  held  by  Filipinos,  Avere  to  be 
freed  at  the  latter  age,  and  all  over  twenty  years  old 
were  to  be  set  free  in  five  years. 

Arrangement  was  made  for  a tribute  to  be  raised 
from  among  the  people.  The  money  so  gathered  was 
to  be  divided  in  a fixed  ratio  between  the  Church,  the 
State,  and  the  army.  All  begging  friars — and  of  these 
many  had  come  to  the  country — were  ordered  to  leave 
the  Philippines,  and  forty  Augustine  friars  were  sent 
out  to  Manila. 

A new  governor-general  was  sent  to  the  islands, 
with  instructions  to  carry  out  the  decree.  This  official 
was  Don  Gomez  Perez  Desmarinas  (go  meth'  pa  reth' 
des  mar  e'nas).  He  was  a man  of  great  energy  and 
force  of  character,  and  no  doubt  meant  to  be  just  and 
fair.  He  did  not,  however,  get  along  well  with  the 
Bishop  of  Manila,  and  before  long  the  trouble  between 
Church  and  State  broke  out  again.  This  time  the 
bishop  decided  to  go,  himself,  to  Spain,  and  see 


BEGINNINGS  OF  STRIFE.  65 

whether  some  understanding  could  not  be  had  by 
which  peace  could  be  kept. 

Bishop  Salazar  (sal  a thar')  was  then  seventy-eight 
years  old.  He  was  an  Augustine  friar,  and  had  been 
parish  priest  of  Manila.  In  1581,  when  Pope  Gregorio 
XIII.  founded  the  See  of  Manila,  Salazar  was  made 
bishop;  but  he  now  felt  that  the  Church  must  have 
still  greater  authority  in  the  islands.  One  object  of 
his  visit  to  Spain  was  to  get  the  consent  of  the  king 
and  of  the  Pope  that  Manila  should  be  made  an  arch- 
bishopric. In  this  he  succeeded.  The  Pope  issued  a 
bull  dated  August  14,  1595,  creating  the  Archbishopric 
of  Manila,  and  Salazar  was  made  the  first  archbishop. 
He  died,  however,  before  ofificial  notice  reached  him 
of  his  new  dignity. 

News  traveled  slowly  in  those  days,  but  in  the 
course  of  time  the  emperor  of  Japan  heard  that  a col- 
ony of  Europeans  had  settled  in  the  Philippine  Islands. 
He  seems  to  have  thought  that  Japan  had  some  inter- 
est in  these  islands;  for  in  1593  he  sent  an  ambassador 
to  Manila.  The  name  of  this  ambassador  was  Far- 
randa  Kieman  (fa  ran'da  kl  a'man). 

His  coming  was  the  cause  of  some  anxiety  to  the 
Spanish.  As  soon  as  he  landed  in  Manila  he  waited 
upon  Governor-General  Desmarinas  with  his  message. 
This  was  a demand  upon  the  Spanish  in  the  Philip- 
pines to  surrender,  and  to  declare  themselves  to  be 
vassals  of  Japan.  If  they  did  not  do  this,  Kieman 
told  Desmarinas,  the  emperor  would  send  war  junks 
to  take  the  country  by  force. 

To  all  this  the  governor-general  replied  with  great 
politeness,  but  very  firmly.  He  told  the  ambassador 
5 


66 


THE  STORY  OF  THE  PHILIPPINES. 


that  he  and  the  other  Spanish  colonists  were  already 
subjects  of  a great  king,  in  whose  name  he  ruled,  and 
that  he  could  not  yield  the  country  to  Japan.  At  the 
same  time  his  king  wished  to  be  on  good  terms  with 
the  emperor,  whose  power  and  greatness  were  so  well 
known,  and  the  governor-general  hoped  a treaty  could 


THE  CITY  WALL  AND  MOAT,  MANILA. 

be  made  between  the  two  rulers.  Such  a treaty,  he 
pointed  out,  would  be  a great  help  to  both  countries. 

Farranda  Kieman  thought  that  all  this  was  reason- 
able, and  soon  afterwards  envoys  were  sent  from  Manila 
to  the  court  of  Japan.  They  were  well  received,  and 
a treaty  was  made  for  trade  and  mutual  defense  be- 
tween Japan  and  the  Philippines.  However,  the  ship  on 
which  the  envoys  were  returning  home  was  wrecked, 
and  they  and  the  treaty  were  lost. 


BEGINNINGS  OF  STRIFE. 


67 


In  May,  1593,  another  envoy,  Fray  Pedro  Bautista 
(pa'dro  ba  6 tes'ta),  was  sent  to  Japan,  and  a new 
treaty  was  made.  A copy  of  this  was  sent  back  to 
Manila,  but  the  friar  envoy  asked  permission  to  stay 
in  Japan.  His  request  was  granted  ; he  stayed  in 
Japan,  and  began  preaching  to  the  people.  Some 
years  later  the  fruit  of  this  act,  which  at  the  time 
seemed  so  slight,  came  back  to  Manila  in  a way  most 
unexpected. 

In  the  meantime  Governor-General  Desmarinas  was 
busy  in  Manila.  He  was  anxious  to  see  the  city  walls 
finished,  and  kept  the  people  at  work  on  this  great 
task.  The  fort  at  the  mouth  of  the  river  was  completed, 
and  the  walls  of  the  city  already  made  a noble  show- 
ing. The  Cathedral  of  Manila  and  the  Santa  Polen- 
ciana  (san'ta  po  len'se  a'na)  College  of  Orphans  were 
built,  and  many  other  good  buildings  were  completed. 
Desmarinas  had  also  brought  the  provinces  of  Zam- 
bales  (tham  ba'les)  and  the  Camarines  under  Spanish 
rule. 

In  the  autumn  of  1593,  a native  king  of  Fernate 
(fer  na'te),  one  of  the  Molucca  Islands,  came  to  Manila 
to  ask  for  help  against  the  Dutch  sailors  who  made 
trouble  on  his  island.  Desmarinas  gathered  a large 
fleet,  and  on  October  6th  started  with  the  native  king 
for  Fernate.  While  on  the  way,  the  Chinese  oarsmen 
on  the  governor-general’s  galley  rose  in  revolt  one 
night,  took  the  galley,  and  killed  the  governor-general. 
Some  of  the  Spanish  troops  on  board  escaped  by  jum- 
ping overboard.  After  the  death  of  Desmarinas,  the 
Chinese  put  the  rest  of  the  Spanish  ashore  and  went 
off  with  the  galley. 


68 


THE  STORT  OF  THE  PHILIPPINES. 


This  sad  event  broke  up  the  expedition.  The  fleet 
returned  to  Manila  and  Don  Luis  (lo'is)  Perez  Des- 
marinas,  a son  of  the  dead  official,  took  up  the  gov- 
ernment. He  ruled  quietly  until  1596,  when  his  suc- 
cessor, Don  Francisco  Tello  de  Guzman  (fran  ses'ko 
tel'lo  da  gath'man),  came  to  Manila. 

In  the  year  1598,  King  Philip  II.  of  Spain  being 
dead,  his  son.  King  Philip  III.,  again  set  up  the 
Supreme  Court  in  Manila.  This  was  done  with  great 
pomp  and  show.  There  was  a long  procession  in  the 
streets  of  Manila,  and  high  civic  and  religious  cere- 
monies. The  court  was  given  the  same  powers  as  the 
court  of  Mexico  and  of  Lima,  in  Peru,  and  during 
Spanish  rule  was  never  again  done  away  with. 

Summary. — The  code  of  laws  by  which  Mexico  was  ruled 
was  made  the  code  of  the  Philippines  as  well.  This  arrange- 
ment was  not  a good  one.  The  ruler  who  came  after  Legaspi 
did  away  with  the  native  chiefs  and  kings.  Only  the  office 
of  head  of  a hundred  was  left,  and  that  had  so  little  honor 
that  no  self-respecting  Filipino  cared  to  take  it.  Early  in 
the  history  of  the  colony  began  the  strife  between  authorities 
which,  during  the  rule  of  Spain,  caused  most  of  the  trouble  in 
the  colony.  At  last  Bishop  Salazar  of  Manila  sent  a mes- 
senger to  Spain.  The  result  was  a royal  decree  defining  the 
official  field  of  the  State  and  of  the  Church.  Gomez  Perez 
Desmarinas  was  made  governor-general,  and  came  to  Manila. 
He  did  not  get  along  well  with  the  Bishop  of  Manila,  and 
later  the  bishop  went,  himself,  to  Spain.  He  succeeded  in 
getting  Manila  made  an  archbishopric,  and  was  himself  ap- 
pointed archbishop,  but  died  before  the  official  notice  reached 
him.  In  1593  the  emperor  of  Japan  sent  an  ambassador  to 
Manila  to  demand  tribute  from  the  Spanish  colony.  This 


BEGINNINGS  OF  STRIFE. 


69 


the  governor-general  declined  to  give,  but  a treaty  was  made 
with  Japan.  In  that  same  year  the  king  of  Fernate  came  to 
Manila  seeking  help  against  the  Dutch.  Governor-General 
Desmarinas  raised  a fleet  to  go  to  Fernate,  but  while  on  the 
way  was  killed  by  the  Chinese  oarsmen  on  board  his  galley. 
His  son  Luis  Perez  Desmarinas  succeeded  him  in  office 
until  1596,  when  a new  governor-general  came  out.  In  1598 
the  Supreme  Court  was  again  set  up  by  order  of  King  Philip 
III.  of  Spain. 

Questions. — -What  code  of  laws  was  put  in  use  in  the  Philip- 
pines ? What  changes  in  government  did  Legaspi’s  successors 
make  ? Why  did  Bishop  Salazar  send  a messenger  to  Spain  ? 
What  was  the  result  of  the  messenger’s  visit  ? When  was 
Manila  made  an  archbishopric  ? Who  came  to  Manila  to 
get  help  from  the  Spanish  ? What  did  the  governor-general 
do  ? How  did  he  die  ? Who  reinstated  the  Supreme  Court  ? 
When  was  it  done  ? 


Chapter  VI. 


COLONIAL  WARS  AND  DIFFICULTIES. 


ROM  now  on  trouble  came  thick  and  fast 
upon  the  Spanish  colony  in  the  Philippines. 
Some  of  it  was  due  to  the  wild  and  troubled 
times  through  which  all  the  civilized  world 
was  passing,  but  most  of  it  was  caused  by  the  short- 
sighted folly  of  the  home  government. 

In  1599,  when  Antonio  Morga  (an  to'ne  6 mor'ga) 
was  governor-general,  the  first  real  attempt  was  made 
to  occupy  Mindanao  and  the  Sulu  archipelago.  For 
this  purpose  an  expedition  started  from  Manila  under 
the  leadership  of  Estevan  Roderigues  (es'ta  van  ro  da- 
reg'es),  a Portuguese  nobleman,  who  had  received  per- 
mission from  Spain  to  set  up  a colony  in  Mindanao. 
He  was  to  be  governor  of  that  island,  and,  from  his 
headquarters  there,  was  to  try  to  conquer  the  Moros 
of  Sulu,  who  had  never  submitted  to  Spain’s  rule. 

This  expedition  was  a sad  mistake,  and  failed  from 
the  beginning.  The  Mindanao  Mohammedans  resisted 
all  efforts  of  the  Spanish  to  land,  and  Roderigues  lost 


COLONIAL  WARS  AND  DIFFICULTIES.  71 


his  life  in  the  very  first  battle.  His  body  was  taken  to 
Manila  for  burial.  Several  other  expeditions  were  sent 
out,  from  time  to  time,  to  punish  the  Moros  and  force  a 
settlement  upon  the  island  ; but  none  of  them  succeeded. 

The  efforts  of  the  Spanish  only  aroused  the  anger 
and  hatred  of  these  people.  For  two  hundred  and  fifty 
years  after  that  Moro  pirates  harried  the  shores  of  all 
the  islands  where  the  Spanish  dwelt.  They  killed  and 
robbed  both  Europeans  and  Filipinos;  they  burned 
towns  and  villages,  and  carried  off  the  people  to  be 
their  slaves.  For  fear  of  them  the  coasts  were  de- 
serted. No  one  dared  live  near  the  sea;  fishermen 
dared  not  follow  their  calling,  nor  farmers  till  their 
fields.  Traders  dared  not  come  to  the  island  ports  to 
buy  or  to  sell,  and  the  coastwise  trade  of  the  country 
was  all  but  ruined. 

While  the  Spanish  were  busy  trying  to  gain  a foot- 
hold in  the  south,  there  came  to  Manila  two  visitors 
who  were  the  innocent  cause  of  still  more  trouble  in 
the  country.  These  were  two  high  mandarins  of  China, 
who  reached  the  city  in  the  year  1603.  Their  story 
was  that  the  emperor  of  China  had  heard  that  there 
existed,  near  the  city  of  Cavite,  a great  mountain  of 
pure  gold.  The  emperor,  they  said,  could  hardly 
believe  this  to  be  true ; so  he  had  sent  them  to  see 
this  mountain,  that  they  might  come  back  and  tell 
him  about  it. 

At  that  time  Bravo  de  Acuna  (braVo  da  a kon  ya) 
was  governor-general.  He  received  the  mandarins 
politely,  and  sent  them  with  an  escort  to  Cavite,  to 
see  for  themselves  that  no  such  mountain  was  there. 
The  visitors  were  royally  entertained  during  their  stay 


72 


THE  STORT  OF  THE  PHILIPPINES. 


in  Manila,  and  at  last  went  home  with  their  report  to 
their  emperor. 

This  visit  caused  a great  fright  in  Manila,  for  the 

Spanish  at  once 
suspected  that 
there  was  a plot 
behind  it  for  the 
Chinese  to  seize 
the  city.  They 
believed,  or  pre- 
tended to  be- 
lieve, that  the 
mandarins  had 
come  merely  to 
spy  out  the  land 
and  prepare  the 
way.  At  once 
the  city  was 
made  ready 
against  inva- 
sion. The  gar- 
risons were  in- 
creased, new 
ones  were 
formed,  and 
every  Spaniard 
armed  himself. 

A MEMBER  OF  THE  GUIANGA  TRIBE  OF  MINDANAO.  The  FiHpinOS 

were  much  ex- 
cited over  the  stories  told  of  coming  trouble;  while 
the  Chinese,  suspected  and  insulted  by  all,  could  not 
but  understand  that  some  danger  threatened  them. 


COLONIAL  WARS  AND  DIFFICULTIES.  73 


At  last  the  Chinese,  wild  with  fear,  took  matters 
into  their  own  hands.  They  began  to  fortify  places 
outside  the  city,  and  one  evening  opened  the  battle  by 
firing  upon  some  Filipinos  inside  the  city  walls.  They 
followed  up  this  act  by  crossing  the  river  and  making 


WARRIORS  OF  MINDANAO. 

a savage  attack  on  Binondo  (be  ndn'do),  then  only  a 
small  village  on  the  river  bank.  After  that  they  gath- 
ered their  forces  at  Tondo,  and  kept  up  the  siege  of 
Binondo  all  that  night. 

Next  morning  a strong  force  of  Spanish  marched 
out  against  them.  This  force  was  led  by  Luis  Perez 
Desmarinas,  and  in  it  were  the  pick  of  all  the  young 
Castilian  gentlemen  in  the  country.  The  best  of  the 
Spanish  soldiery  were  there  also,  as  well  as  a body  of 
native  troops.  These  troops  were  Pampangans,  who 
were  then  the  best  trained  of  the  Filipino  soldiers. 

On  the  other  hand  were  thousands  of  frightened 


74 


THE  STORY  OF  THE  PHILIPPINES. 


Chinese,  ready  to  fight  to  the  death,  and  there  was 
awful  work  in  the  streets  of  Binondo  that  day.  Nei- 
ther side  gave  or  got  any  quarter,  and  by  night,  of 
all  those  brave  young  Spanish  gentlemen  scarce  one 
was  left  alive. 

But  at  last  the  Chinese  gave  way.  They  had  neither 
weapons  to  carry  on  war,  nor  food  to  help  them  with- 
stand a siege.  They  began,  therefore,  to  fall  back 
toward  the  interior;  but  they  were  hotly  chased,  and 
as  they  fled  nearly  25,000  of  them  were  killed.  It  was 
sad  business,  and  all  the  more  sad  because  it  is  likely  that 
neither  side  really  knew  what  the  fighting  was  about. 

Besides  trouble  with  the  Moros  in  the  south  and 
with  the  Chinese  in  the  north,  the  colony  had  much  to 
bear  from  Spain’s  old-time  foe,  the  Dutch.  At  this 
time  there  were  really  very  few  Spanish  in  the  islands. 
There  had  been  less  than  a thousand  when  the  battle 
with  the  Chinese  was  fought.  Many  were  killed  on 
that  fatal  day,  so  that  in  the  new  trouble  the  Span- 
iards would  have  fared  ill,  had  it  not  been  that  the 
army  of  the  colony  now  numbered  many  Filipino  sol- 
diers in  its  ranks. 

From  the  end  of  the  sixteenth  century  down  to  the 
year  1763,  there  was  war  between  Spain  and  the  Dutch, 
and  this  war  caused  much  hardship  in  the  islands.  It 
was  Spain’s  short-sighted  method  in  dealing  with  her 
colonies  to  restrict  their  trade  whenever  it  was  likely 
to  interfere  with  that  of  her  home  merchants.  So 
harsh  were  the  measures  by  which  she  held  in  check 
the  trade  of  her  colonies  that  she  kept  all  her  depend- 
encies poor,  so  that  in  the  end  the  mother  country  lost 
more  than  she  gained. 


COLONIAL  WARS  AND  DIFFICULTIES. 


75 


At  this  time  the  Philippine  merchants  were  allowed 
to  trade  only  with  Mexico.  Once  a year,  usually  in 
July,  a state  galleon  left  Manila  carrying  goods  to  that 
country.  The  goods  were  sold  in  Mexico,  and  the 
money  and  other  goods  were  sent  back  by  galleon 
to  Manila. 

The  galleons  also  carried  the  mail,  and  great  sums 


DUTCH  SHIPS  ATTACKING 
A CHINESE  TRADING  JUNK. 


of  money  which  Mexico  sent  over  to  meet  the  expenses 
of  the  island  government.  They  were  always  rich 
prizes,  and  Spain’s  enemies  knew  this  all  too  well. 
They  would  lie  in  wait  for  them,  to  capture  and  de- 
spoil them.  The  Dutch  ships,  in  particular,  often  did 


76  THE  STORT  OF  THE  PHILIPPINES. 


this.  From  first  to  last  they  captured  a good  many 
of  the  royal  galleons. 

Every  capture  meant  calamity  to  the  islands.  It 
meant  for  Manila  merchants  the  loss  of  a whole  year’s 
business.  To  the  State  and  to  the  Church  it  meant 
loss  of  income,  of  salaries,  and  of  money  to  carry  on 
all  public  work.  To  the  natives  it  meant  harder  and 
longer  tasks,  deeper  poverty,  heavier  burdens  which 
they  must  endure  in  raising  the  extra  tribute,  and 
heavier  taxes  by  which  the  loss  was  made  good. 

For  a hundred  and  fifty  years  there  was  fighting 
over  the  royal  galleons.  At  one  time,  when  Spain 
and  England  were  at  war,  there  were  six  years  during 
which  no  galleon  reached  Manila.  The  country  was 
in  such  sore  straits  that  even  the  Chinese  revolted, 
and  the  Spanish  were  nearly  starved. 

Spain,  however,  seemed  to  learn  no  lesson  from  these 
experiences.  She  went  on  as  of  old,  sending  one  gal- 
leonayear,  richly  laden,  atthemercyoftheenemy,“  put- 
ting all  her  eggs  into  one  basket,”  as  the  saying  is,  and 
when  the  ‘‘  one  basket  ” came  to  mishap  all  was  lost. 

Besides  keeping  a lookout  for  the  galleons,  the  Dutch 
ships  were  wont  to  lie  in  wait  outside  Manila  har- 
bor, to  catch  Chinese  and  Japanese  trading  junks 
coming  into  port.  In  this  way  they  often  captured 
rich  prizes,  and  made  still  greater  drain  upon  the 
islands.  It  was  necessary  for  the  colony  to  raise  large 
sums  of  money  and  many  bodies  of  fighting  men  to  go 
against  these  ships  in  order  to  protect  the  harbor  from 
them.  Many  battles  were  fought  with  the  Dutch  in 
Philippine  waters,  and  many  times  the  efforts  of  the 
natives  brought  victory  to  the  Spanish  side. 


COLONIAL  WARS  AND  DIFFICULTIES.  77 


But  it  was  a hard  and  bitter  experience.  The  col- 
ony lived  in  a state  of  constant  danger  and  of  real 
want  from  this  source.  Not  until  the  middle  of  the 
eighteenth  century,  when  peace  was  made  with  Hol- 
land, had  the  people  of  these  islands  any  security  of 
life  or  commerce. 

Stuntnary. — In  1599  the  first  real  attempts  were  made  to 
settle  in  Mindanao.  An  expedition  was  sent  south,  but  failed, 
and  its  leader  was  killed.  The  Spanish  only  stirred  up  the 
Moros  against  themselves,  so  that  the  pirates  came  north  and 
laid  waste  the  coast  towns.  In  1603  two  Chinese  mandarins 
came  to  Manila,  looking  for  a mountain  of  gold  which  they 
had  heard  was  near  Cavite.  This  visit  awakened  a fear  that 
the  Chinese  meant  to  seize  Manila,  and  the  city  was  made 
ready  against  invasion.  The  Chinese  of  Manila  were  driven 
by  abuse  to  make  an  attack  on  some  natives,  and  the  Spanish 
then  fell  upon  them,  killing  over  25,000.  The  Spanish  them- 
selves lost  the  pick  of  their  soldiers  and  cavaliers  that  day. 
Owing  to  Spain’s  war  with  the  Dutch,  the  islands  at  this  time, 
and  for  many  years  after,  suffered  great  losses  and  hardships. 
The  Dutch  used  to  lie  in  wait  to  capture  the  galleons  that 
carried  merchandise  and  money  back  and  forth  between  Ma- 
nila and  Mexico.  Whenever  a galleon  was  lost,  the  whole 
country  suffered ; but  the  weight  fell  heaviest  upon  the  natives, 
who,  by  extra  tribute  and  taxes,  had  to  make  the  loss  good. 

Questions.- — Tell  about  the  first  expedition  to  settle  Min- 
danao. What  did  the  Moros  do  to  avenge  what  they  deemed 
Spanish  invasion  ? Give  an  account  of  the  battle  against  the 
Chinese.  What  led  up  to  this  battle  ? How  was  trade  carried 
on  between  the  islands  and  Mexico  ? What  was  the  result  of 
the  capture  of  a gal  leon  by  Spain’s  enemies  ? Why  was  Spain’s 
’•estriction  of  her  colonies’  trade  a bad  thing  for  her  ? 


Chapter  VII. 

THE  SPANISH  AND  THE  FILIPINOS. 


T the  time  when  Spain  took  tlie  Philippine 
Islands  and  began  to  rule  them,  every 
country  in  Europe  was  busy  setting  up  col- 
onies in  the  newly  discovered  parts  of  the 
world.  If  the  king  owed  something  to  a troublesome 
subject,  or  wished  to  reward  or  please  a favorite,  an 
easy  way  to  pay  the  debtor  or  help  the  favorite  was 
to  make  him  a governor  or  other  official  in  some  far-off 
new  colony.  In  turn  the  governor  thought  it  only  fair 
to  make  his  colony  as  profitable  to  the  Crown  as  he 
could.  That  he  had  no  right  to  oppress  other  peo- 
ples in  order  to  do  this  was  a matter  about  which  he 
never  thought. 

It  is  hard  for  us,  who  live  in  an  age  when  the  rights 
of  man  are  upheld,  to  remember  that  there  was  once  a 
time  when  no  one  in  power  thought  very  much  about 
these  rights.  Statesmen  had  not  then  learned  that  a 
mother  country  owes  a duty  to  her  colonies.  They 
thought  only  of  the  help  that  a colony  should  give 


THE  SPANISH  AND  THE  FILIPINOS. 


79 


toward  supporting  the  home  government.  England 
for  many  years  held  this  idea  about  America.  She 
put  great  hardships  upon  her  colonies  there.  She 
taxed  them  very  unjustly,  and  put  unfair  limits  to  their 
trade.  The  Americans,  however,  knew  that  no  govern- 
ment had  a right  to  oppress  even  its  own  colonies. 
When  the  king  of  England  went  too  far  in  his  unjust 
rule,  the  people  rebelled.  They  threw  off  the  yoke 
of  England  just  as,  some  years  later,  Mexico  threw  off 
the  yoke  of  Spain,  and  became  independent. 

The  Philippine  Islands  suffered  beyond  what  was 
the  usual  fate  of  colonies,  even  at  that  time.  They 
were  far  out  of  the  regular  routes  of  ocean  travel. 
The  people  there  knew  nothing  at  all  of  the  ideas  of 
human  liberty  that  were  even  then  setting  the  world 
thinking.  Then,  too,  they  were  ruled  by  a people 
who  were  behind  the  rest  of  the  world  in  accepting 
these  ideas.  Spain,  blinded  by  her  own  pride  and 
folly,  has  been  slowest  of  all  European  nations  to  listen 
to  the  gospel  of  human  rights.  She  ruled  her  colonies 
cruelly  long  after  other  nations  came  to  see  that  they 
owed  a duty  to  their  dependencies,  and  as  a result 
Spain  lost  her  colonies  at  just  the  time  when  she  most 
needed  their  help. 

The  Philippines,  moreover,  were  not  ruled  from 
Spain  direct.  They  were,  as  has  been  said,  a depend- 
ency of  Mexico,  and  Mexico  was  in  turn  a dependency 
of  Spain.  It  happened,  therefore,  that  even  when  the 
islands  had  officials  who  might  have  been  glad  to  help 
the  people,  these  officials  were  themselves  in  a hard 
place.  They  had  two  masters  over  them.  Spain 
looked  to  Mexico  for  the  royal  dues  from  the  islands. 


8o 


THE  STORT  OF  THE  PHILIPPINES. 


and  Mexico,  in  turn,  looked  to  the  governor-general, 
who  must  see  to  it  that  his  colony  was  profitable  to 
the  Crown. 

So,  we  see,  there  was  a great  burden  laid  upon  the 
archipelago,  and  this  burden  the  people  had  to  carry. 
For  three  hundred  and  eighty  years  the  Filipinos  were 
subjects  of  Spain.  They  submitted  to. her  rule  be- 
cause there  was  never  a time  when,  without  outside 
help,  they  could  throw  off  that  rule.  But  they  never 
were,  in  their  hearts,  willing  subjects.  During  all  the 
time  the  Spanish  were  in  the  islands  there  was  never 
a very  long  period  when  the  people  were  not  some- 
where in  revolt. 

On  Luzon,  on  Bohol  (bo  hoi'),  on  Samar,  Leyte 
(la'e  ta),  Mindanao,  and  in  the  Sulu  Islands,  there  was 
one  uprising  after  another  during  the  seventeenth 
century.  In  Cebu  it  was  needful,  always,  for  Spain  to 
keep  a strong  armed  force,  and  it  was  often  necessary 
to  send  the  troops  from  Cebu  to  put  down  trouble  in 
the  other  islands.  The  love  of  liberty  dies  hard  from 
the  human  heart;  and  while  there  was  at  no  time  a 
general  revolt  of  the  people,  the  frequent  revolts  of 
different  tribes  kept  the  Spanish  busy. 

Yet  at  no  time  did  the  Filipinos  go  to  war  to  gain 
national  independence.  They  were  not  united  enough 
for  that.  It  is  a part  of  the  pity  of  it  all  that  this 
should  have  been  so.  It  is  sad  to  think  of  all  the  suf- 
fering and  want  the  people  bore,  and  of  all  the  lives 
that  were  lost  in  their  small  battles.  It  is  sadder  still 
to  remember  that  the  aim  of  these  battles  was  not  to 
win  independence  from  Spain,  but  to  secure  only  such 
decent  treatment  as  is  the  right  of  every  human  being. 


KUERZA  DEL  RIEAR,  MINDANAO. 


6 


82 


THE  STORY  OF  THE  PHILIPPINES. 


It  will  be  remembered  that  the  friar  whom  Governor- 
General  Desmarinas  sent  to  make  a treaty  with  Japan 
stayed  in  that  country.  He  set  up  missions  there,  and 
both  he  and  other  friars  who  came  over  from  Manila 
preached  to  the  people.  In  time  the  emperor  learned 
of  this.  He  asked  about  the  new  teachers,  and  was  told 
that  this  was  Spain’s  way  of  getting  a hold  on  another 
country.  Spanish  friars  would  go  into  a country  to 
teach  the  people  religion,  and  later  Spain  would  send 
her  soldiers  to  protect  the  friars  and  their  converts. 
After  that,  his  advisers  told  the  emperor,  it  was  only  a 
matter  of  time  when  Spain  would  come  to  rule  the 
country. 

The  emperor  was  alarmed  to  hear  all  this.  He  or- 
dered the  friars  back  to  Manila,  and  forbade  any  one  to 
teach  Christianity  in  his  country.  The  missionary  friars 
defied  him,  however,  and  later  some  were  put  to  death 
with  their  Japanese  converts.  But  other  friars  came 
from  Manila,  and  in  1633  the  emperor  became  angry, 
and  did  a dreadful  thing. 

He  gathered  in  his  own  country  a band  of  150  people 
who  were  lepers.  He  loaded  them  into  a ship  and 
sent  them  to  Manila.  The  commander  of  the  ship 
bore  to  the  governor-general  a message  which  made 
a sensation  in  Manila.  The  message  set  forth  the  fact 
that  the  emperor  did  not  allow  Christians  to  come  to 
Japan.  Since,  however,  the  priests  of  Manila  seemed 
very  fond  of  such  people  as  these  lepers,  he  sent  this 
shipload  as  a present  to  them. 

We  may  imagine  the  rage  of  the  Manila  officials 
over  this  ‘ ‘ present.  ’ ’ Some  of  them  were  for  taking  the 
ship  outside  the  harbor  and  sinking  her  with  her  load. 


This  hospital  was  named  St.  Lazarus  Hospital.  It 
still  exists  in  Manila,  though  the  present  building  is 
not  the  one  put  up  for  those  first  lepers. 

In  putting  down  the  revolts  of  the  people  against 
tyranny,  the  Spanish  had,  from  time  to  time,  lost 
many  troops.  Many  were  also  killed  in  the  great  bat- 
tle with  the  Chinese,  of  which  we  have  read,  and  in 
the  wars  with  the  Moros  still  other  Spanish  lives  were 
lost.  The  Moro  pirates  from  the  south  were  a source 


THE  SPANISH  AND  THE  FILIPINOS.  83 

Others  advised  sending  her  back  to  Japan.  The  friars, 
however,  to  whom  the  lepers  had  been  sent,  claimed 
them.  They  begged  the  governor-general  to  have 
mercy  on  the  poor  creatures,  and  at  last  he  relented. 

The  lepers  were  brought  ashore  with  much  cere- 
mony, and  kept  in  Manila.  As  soon  as  possible  a hos- 
pital was  built  for  them,  and  they  were  taken  to  it. 


ST.  LAZARUS  HOSPITAL,  MANILA. 


84  the  STORT  of  THE  PHILIPPINES. 


of  great  danger,  as  we  have  already  seen.  In  1635  the 
Spanish  were  forced  to  build  a fort  at  Zamboanga  (sam- 
bo an'ga)  to  keep  these  pirates  in  check.  Garrisons 
were  also  stationed  at  several  places  in  Sulu  for  the 
same  purpose.  The  Spanish,  however,  never  really 
controlled  the  Sulu  archipelago.  The  soldiers  were 
never  safe  more  than  a day’s  march  from  their  forts, 
and  they  lived  in  constant  danger  of  attack  from  the 
Moros. 

In  one  way  and  another  the  army  of  the  colony  was 
much  weakened,  and  an  uprising  of  the  Chinese,  in 
1634,  made  great  trouble.  This  uprising  took  place 
in  Laguna  Province.  Enraged  by  official  oppression 
30,000  Chinese  rose  in  rebellion.  So  strong  were  they, 
that  they  held  their  own  against  the  Spanish  for  nearly 
a year.  Indeed,  they  might  not  have  been  conquered 
at  all  but  for  the  help  of  the  native  troops,  who  fought, 
with  the  Spanish.  Over  6,000  Chinese  were  killed  in 
this  revolt. 

In  November  1645,  happened  one  of  the  worst 
earthquakes  Manila  has  ever  known.  Every  public 
building  in  the  city,  save  one  monastery  and  two 
churches,  was  destroyed.  The  governor-general  nearly 
lost  his  life  in  the  wreck  of  his  palace,  and  over  600 
people  were  killed  in  Manila. 

It  became  necessary  to  rebuild  the  city,  and  then 
the  Spanish  found  that  there,  was  a great  lack,  not 
only  of  soldiers,  but  of  laborers.  The  need  became  so 
great  that,  in  1649,  Governor-General  Diego  Fajardo 
(de  a'go  fa  har'db)  made  a bad  mistake.  He  began 
tp  force  the  people  into  military  service,  and  also  com- 
pelled them  to  work  upon  the  arsenal  at  Cavite. 


THE  SPANISH  AND  THE  FILIPINOS. 


85 


The  people  had  borne  much.  Patient  as  they  were, 
this  injustice  was  more  than  they  would  endure,  and 
they  became  deeply  angry.  Rebellion  spread  like 
wildfire  through  a number  of  the  islands,  and  there 
was  almost,  though  not  quite,  a general  revolt.  It 
began  on  Samar,  and  was  led  by  a Filipino  named 
Sumoroy  (so  mo  roy').  At  the  head  of  a large  force  he 
attacked  the  Spanish  and  the  friars.  He  led  his  army 
down  the  coast  of  Samar,  burning  towns  and  churches. 
Many  of  the  priests  and  Spanish  on  the  island  were 
killed,  and  the  rebellion  grew. 

Troops  were  at  once  sent  out  against  the  rebels,  and 
the  governor  of  Samar  sent  messengers  to  demand 
Sumoroy’s  head.  The  messengers  did  not  return,  but 
the  rebels  sent  back  the  head  of  a pig  to  the  governor. 
The  revolt  spread  to  other  islands.  Soon  the  people 
of  Masbate  (mas  ba'te)  and  Leyte,  of  Cebu,  Caraga 
(ca  ra'ga)  and  Zamboanga,  were  in  arms.  The  trouble 
even  reached  Manila,  and  the  officials  there  became 
alarmed. 

Governor-General  Fajardo  had  not  dreamed  that  his 
act  of  injustice  would  work  so  much  mischief.  Now, 
greatly  concerned,  he  sent  General  Lopez  Azaldegin 
a thal'da  gin)  to  Samar.  This  officer  had  all  the  forces 
that  could  be  raised,  and  full  authority  to  put  down 
the  rebels  as  he  saw  fit. 

A great  many  battles  were  fought  up  and  down 
Samar,  and  at  last  Sumoroy  was  driven  back  into  the 
mountains.  The  Spanish  carried  on  the  war  with  sav- 
age cruelty.  They  severely  punished  all  rebels  whom 
they  caught,  and  showed  mercy  to  none.  When  they 
found  that  Sumoroy  had  escaped  to  the  mountains. 


86 


THE  STORT  OF  THE  PHILIPPINES. 


they  raided  his  home  and  tortured  his  mother  to 
death. 

By  such  outrages  they  hoped  to  frighten  the  people 
into  submission.  By  threats  and  torture  they  tried  to 
make  his  people  betray  Sumoroy,  and  at  last  they 
succeeded.  He  was  captured  and  turned  over  to  the 
enemy.  General  Azaldegin  had  the  rebel  leader’s  head 
struck  off  and  stuck  upon  a pole.  It  was  then  sent 
about  among  the  islands  to  teach  the  people  what 
treatment  rebels  might  expect  from  Spain. 

Thus  the  rebellion  was  quelled  for  a time.  The 
people  had  gained  nothing  by  it,  but  it  had  kindled 
a fire  in  their  hearts.  This  fire  was  not  quenched;  it 
only  waited,  hidden,  ready  to  blaze  up  again  when  the 
right  moment  should  come. 

Summary. — The  early  idea  of  a colony  was  that  it  should 
be  only  a source  of  income  to  the  mother  country.  This  idea 
was  held  by  other  countries  than  Spain;  but  Spain  clung  to 
the  idea  long  after  other  nations  gave  it  up.  She  did  not 
listen  to  the  gospel  of  the  rights  of  man,  and  in  time  she  lost 
most  of  her  colonies.  Her  policy  in  the  Philippines  kept 
the  natives  rebellious.  For  three  hundred  and  eighty  years 
the  Filipinos  were  ruled  by  her,  but  in  their  hearts  they  never 
consented  to  that  rule.  There  was  one  revolt  after  another, 
the  people  trying  by  this  means  to  gain  decent  treatment. 
In  1633,  angered  by  the  efforts  of  friars  to  convert  his  people, 
the  emperor  of  Japan  sent  a “present”  to  the  priests  at 
Manila.  This  “present”  was  a shipload  of  150  lepers. 
After  some  debate  the  priests  persuaded  the  governor-general 
to  let  the  lepers  land,  and  St.  Lazarus  Hospital  was  built  for 
them.  The  colony  was  now  much  weakened  by  wars,  and  in 
1634  a revolt  of  the  Chinese  in  Laguna  was  nearly  successful. 


THE  SPANISH  AND  THE  FILIPINOS.  87 


It  was  only  put  down  by  native  help.  The  great  earthquake 
of  1645  nearly  destroyed  Manila,  and  600  people  were  killed 
in  the  city.  Laborers  and  soldiers  were  now  so  scarce  that 
Governor-General  Fajardo  tried  to  compel  the  people  to  serve 
in  the  army  and  work  on  the  arsenal  at  Cavite.  This  led  to 
a revolt  which  took  all  the  forces  the  Spanish  could  muster 
to  put  it  down. 

Questions. — What  was  the  early  idea  of  what  a colony 
should  be  ? How  were  the  American  colonies  driven  to 
revolt  ? How  did  Spain  treat  her  colonies  ? Why  did  not 
the  islands  throw  off  her  yoke  ? Why  did  the  Japanese  em- 
peror send  lepers  to  Manila  ? What  caused  the  rebellion  on 
Samar  ? Who  led  it  ? How  was  it  put  down  ? 


Chapter  VIII. 


A NEW  BEGINNING. 

HE  story  of  the  colony  at  this  time  is  a sad 
one.  Bad  management,  dishonesty,  and 
cruelty  at  last  brought  the  country  to  such 
a pass  that  both  Mexico  and  Spain  were 
weary.  The  king  even  thought  of  giving  up  the  col- 
ony, hopeless  of  ever  receiving  any  benefit  from  it.  The 
islands  were  a drain  upon  the  treasury  rather  than  a 
help  to  it,  and  it  looked  as  if  things  would  never  be 
any  better. 

In  the  year  1653,  however,  a new  beginning  was 
planned.  The  country  was  to  be  given  another  chance. 
To  this  end  a new  governor-general  and  a new  arch- 
bishop were  sent  out  from  Mexico.  These  two  men, 
it  was  thought,  could  work  peacefully  together.  It  was 
hoped  that  they  would  bring  better  days  to  the  islands. 
The  governor-general,  Sabinino  Manrique  de  Lara  (sa- 
be  ne'no  man'rek  da  la'ra),  was  an  honest,  pious  man. 
The  new  archbishop  was  wise  and  just,  and  seems  to 
have  had  a sincere  desire  to  help  the  country. 


J NEW  BEGINNING. 


89 


The  archbishop  was  charged  by  the  Pope  with  the 
task  of  cleansing  the  land  from  the  evil  acts  that  had 
made  so  much  sorrow.  When  the  ship  reached  Manila, 
before  any  one  else  was  allowed  to  land,  the  archbishop 
went  ashore.  He  landed  alone,  knelt  at  once,  and 
blessed  the  soil.  The  governor-general  then  landed, 
and  prayers  were  offered  for  the  good  of  the  country. 

Some  days  afterwards,  in  the  open  air,  outside  the 
city  walls,  a solemn  service  was  held.  Archbishop 
Problete  (pro  bla'  ta)  then  went  through  the  ceremony 
of  purifying  the  land.  He  blessed  the  colony  and  de- 
clared it  clean  of  all  the  evil  done  there.  From  that 
day  peace  and  good-will  were  to  be  upon  all  the  people. 

After  this,  things  went  better  for  several  years. 
There  was  peace  and  good  understanding  between 
Church  and  State,  so  that  both  worked  for  the  good 
of  the  country.  Governor-General  Lara  allowed  the 
archbishop  a voice  in  matters  of  State,  and  yielded 
to  him  in  many  ways.  He  even  permitted  him  to  veto, 
or  forbid,  orders  which  the  governor-general  himself 
approved.  These  privileges  the  Churchman  seems  not 
to  have  abused. 

But  more  than  mere  words  and  public  services  were 
needed  to  cleanse  the  land.  Evil  and  oppression  had 
worked  wrong  that  was  not  to  be  undone  in  any  easy 
way.  The  rebellion  of  1649  was  not  yet  forgotten, 
nor  were  there  lacking  people  ready  to  make  trouble 
to  gain  their  own  ends.  Here  and  there,  every  little 
while,  conflict  broke  out  anew,  but  always  in  a small 
way.  It  was  never  grave  enough  to  cause  fear  in 
Manila.  It  was  enough,  however,  to  keep  the  people 
restless,  and  the  Spanish  soldiers  on  the  alert. 


A CHURCH  AT  iMALATE. 

The  oldest  church  building  in  Manila. 


A NEW  BEGINNING. 


9> 


The  commander  of  the  Spanish  forces  in  the  Visayas 
was  Captain  Gregorio  de  Castillo.  Weary  of  putting 
down  the  frequent  small  revolts,  he  at  last  hit  upon  a 
plan  to  end  the  trouble.  He  issued  a notice  promising 
that  all  rebels  who  would  come  into  camp  and  laydown 
their  arms  would  be  forgiven. 

In  spite  of  past  lessons,  many  of  the  Filipinos  trusted 
to  this  promise.  A large  number  of  them  came  and 
gave  up  their  weapons.  When  too  late  they  saw  what 
a mistake  they  had  made.  They  were  taken  to  Manila 
as  prisoners,  and  were  not  pardoned.  Instead,  most 
of  them  were  punished.  Some  were  put  to  death; 
others  were  sent  to  the  galleys ; only  a few  were  set 
free. 

We  may  be  sure  that  the  memory  of  this  false  deal- 
ing rankled  in  the  hearts  of  the  people.  In  1660  re- 
bellion broke  out  with  fresh  force.  This  time  the 
Pampangans  were  in  the  uprising.  This  people  had 
from  the  first  been  loyal  to  Spain.  They  were  among 
the  best  of  her  native  soldiers,  and  had  always  helped 
to  keep  her  enemies  out  of  the  country.  For  reward 
the  government  set  them,  with  many  others,  to  cutting 
timber  for  the  arsenal.  This  work  all  were  compelled 
to  do  without  pay. 

From  Pampanga  the  revolt  swept  through  other 
provinces  of  Luzon.  It  took  more  definite  shape  than 
any  other  uprising  had  done,  and  gained  strength.  A 
Filipino  named  Malong  was  at  the  head  of  the  move- 
ment. He  was  a real  leader,  and  he  at  once  began 
to  raise  an  army.  The  Ilocans  and  Cacaygans  joined 
him,  and  in  a little  while  40,000  men  had  been  enrolled. 
They  were  not  well  armed,  nor  were  they  well  supplied 


92 


THE  STORY  OF  THE  PHILIPPINES. 


with  food ; but  they  inarched  through  the  country, 
making  war  on  the  Spanish. 

Again,  however,  effort  failed  because  it  was  not 
united.  The  tribes  could  not  grasp  the  idea  of  real 
union.  The  people  had  no  clear  thought  of  a national 
life  together.  So  they  fought  among  themselves  as 
well  as  against  .the  common  enemy,  and  their  warfare 
came  to  naught.  They  could  not  long  resist  the 
trained  Spanish  troops,  and  in  time  the  rebellion  was 
put  down.  The  army  was  scattered,  and  its  leaders 
became  outlaws  in  the  mountains. 

While  Governor-General  Lara  was  in  office  another 
Chinese  invasion  threatened.  A Mongol  chief  named 
Koxinga  (kox  in'ga),  who  had  been  driven  from  his 
own  country  by  the  Tartars,  was  the  leader  of  it. 
When  the  Tartars  overran  China,  about  the  middle  of 
the  seventeenth  century,  Koxinga  and  many  of  his 
followers  refused  to  submit.  They  went  to  Formosa, 
drove  out  the  Dutch  people,  and  settled  there.  Later 
Koxinga  laid  a plan  to  take  the  Philippine  Islands  and 
set  up  his  kingdom  there. 

Koxinga’s  chief  adviser  was  an  Italian  friar  named 
Riccio  (le'  che  6).  This  friar  he  had  made  a high  man- 
darin, or  nobleman.  He  now  sent  him  to  Manila, 
dressed  in  the  garb  of  his  office,  to  demand  tribute 
from  the  Philippine  Government. 

Naturally  this  demand  caused  amaze  and  alarm  in 
Manila.  The  Spaniards  were  aghast  at  the  idea  of 
a Catholic  priest  demanding  tribute  from  a Catholic 
country,  in  the  name  of  a heathen  ruler.  Later  the 
authorities  at  Rome  called  the  friar  to  account  for  his 
conduct.  At  this  time,  however,  the  Spanish  were  at 


A NEW  BEGINNING. 


93 


■ a loss  how  to  act.  They  did  not  dare  send  the  priest- 
mandarin  away,  nor  could  they  give  him  any  answer. 
They  therefore  kept  him  waiting  in  Manila  while  they 

■ made  up  their  minds  what  to  do. 

'As  was  usual,  when  trouble  arose,  the  government 
I thought  that  the  Chinese  in  Manila  were  plotting  to 
I take  the  city.  They  felt  sure  that  these  men  would  be 


THE  MANILA  CATHEDRAL. 

ready  to  help  Koxinga  when  he  came,  so  everything 
was  made  ready  for  another  attack  upon  the  Chinese 
in  Luzon. 

All  government  troops,  both  Spanish  and  native, 
were  collected  at  Manila.  The  forts  at  Yligan  (e'le- 
gan),  at  Calamianes  (cal  a me  anes),  and  at  Zam- 
boanga, were  torn  down  and  the  soldiers  brought  to 

o 


94 


THE  STORr  OF  THE  PHILIPPINES. 


Luzon.  Only  the  fort  at  Caraga,  Mindanao,  was  left 
standing.  This  one  they  did  not  dare  to  give  up;  the 
soldiers  there  were  all  that  kept  the  Moros  from  de- 
stroying the  settlements  on  that  coast. 

When  the  Chinese  saw  the  Spaniards  making  ready 
for  war,  they  knew  from  past  experience  that  it  meant 
trouble  for  them.  As  usual,  therefore,  they  began  the 
trouble  themselves.  They  attacked  the  Spanish,  and 
the  latter  at  once  began  fighting  the  Chinese  wherever 
they  found  them. 

This  time  the  Spanish  meant  to  kill  every  Chinaman 
in  the  country.  They  hunted  out  all  who  hid,  and  cut 
them  down.  Not  one  whom  they  caught  was  spared. 
Not  one  of  all  in  the  islands  would  have  been  spared 
if  the  country  could  have  gotten  along  without  them. 
Some  one  remembered,  however,  before  it  was  too 
late,  that  if  all  the  Chinese  were  killed  there  would 
be  no  one  left  to  carry  on  the  small  trades  of  the  coun- 
try. Because  bootmakers  and  tailors  and  small  shop- 
keepers were  needed,  therefore  about  5,000  Chinamen 
were  spared,  and  these  were  permitted  to  remain  in 
Manila. 

After  peace  was  made,  Riccio  was  allowed  to  go  back 
to  Formosa,  to  tell  Koxinga  what  had  been  done.  He 
found  the  chieftain  getting  ready  to  come  to  Manila 
with  an  army  to  take  the  country,  and  Riccio  told  him 
what  had  happened. 

Koxinga’s  rage  was  great  when  he  heard  his  man- 
darin’s story.  He  planned  to  go  at  once  to  the  islands 
to  punish  this  wicked  cruelty  to  his  countrymen.  He 
fell  ■ ill,  however,  and  died  of  fever  before  he  could 
start.  Thus  Manila  escaped  the  fate  that  must  almost 


AN  OLD  SPANISH  FORT  A'P  SIASSI. 


96  THE  STORY  OF  THE  PHILIPPINES. 


surely  have  fallen  upon  the  city  if  the  Chinese  chief 
and  his  great  army  had  reached  the  bay. 

The  foolish  attack  upon  the  Chinese  took  so  many 
Spanish  soldiers  from  the  southern  islands  that  the 
Moros  now  had  free  swing  along  the  coasts  of  Min- 
danao and  the  Visayas.  Other  troubles  came  up  in 
Manila,  and  soon  evil  and  sorrow  were  as  active  and 
as  real  as  though  the  islands  had  never  been  cleansed 
by  book  and  ceremony.  Not  even  these  can  stay  the 
results  of  cruelty  and  evil  in  men’s  lives. 

Poor  Governor-General  Lara,  in  spite  of  his  wish  to 
be  a good  leader  in  the  Philippines,  made  many  ene- 
mies. These  men  began  to  accuse  him  of  dishonesty  in 
office.  They  charged  him  with  disloyalty  to  the  king, 
and  he  was  put  into  prison.  He  was  also  made  to  pay 
a fine  equal  to  $60,000,  Mexican  money.  Afterwards 
he  was  set  free,  but  he  never  got  over  the  effects  of 
his  disgrace.  Filled  with  sorrow  and  shame,  he  went 
back  to  Spain  and  became  a friar. 

In  1663  Diego  Salcedo  became  governor-general.  He 
was  no  sooner  in  office  than  the  good  understanding 
between  the  Church  and  the  State  came  to  an  end. 
Salcedo  treated  Archbishop  Problete  very  harshly,  and 
took  from  him  many  of  the  privileges  granted  him  by 
Lara.  Great  strife  grew  out  of  this,  and  the  govern- 
ment was  soon  in  as  bad  order  as  it  had  ever  been. 

At  last  the  a.rchbishop  became  ill  and  died.  Salcedo 
then  behaved  in  a very  unseemly  manner.  He  made 
a great  feast,  and  would  not  allow  the  usual  mourning 
services  to  be  held  for  the  archbishop.  This  conduct 
came  to  the  ears  of  the  authorities  at  home,  and  the 
governor-general  was  punished  as  he  deserved.  He 


A NEW  BEGINNING. 


97 


was  put  into  prison  to  await  the  sailing  of  the  galleon 
that  should  take  him  to  Mexico  for  further  punish- 
ment. He  was  sent  to  Mexico  later,  but  died  at  sea 
on  his  way  there. 

All  this  was  a sad  end  to  the  new  rule  that  was  to 
have  done  so  much  good  in  the  country.  No  good, 
however,  can  grow  out  of  injustice  and  cruelty.  These 
people  may  have  meant  well,  but  they  did  not  do  right. 
They  had  not  set  up  rules  of  fairness  and  truthful 
dealing  in  the  islands,  so  all  their  cleansing  with  words 
came  to  naught. 

Summary. — In  1653  a new  governor-general  and  a new 
archbishop  were  sent  out  to  Manila.  The  land  was  blessed 
and  pronounced  clean  of  all  the  evil  that  had  been  done 
there.  There  was  now  to  be  a new  state  of  things.  For  some 
years  matters  went  better  at  Manila.  There  was  peace  be- 
tween the  Church  and  the  State.  Later,  however,  revolt 
broke  out  here  and  there  in  the  Visayas.  To  quiet  the 
natives  they  were  promised  forgiveness  if  they  would  come  in 
and  lay  down  their  weapons.  The  Spanish  general  who  made 
this  promise  broke  his  word.  Those  who  came  and  surren- 
dered were  severely  punished,  and  only  a few  were  pardoned. 
After  this  the  government  tried  to  make  the  natives  work 
without  pay,  cutting  timber  for  the  arsenal.  This  made 
trouble,  and  there  was  a rebellion  which  came  near  to  being 
general,  but  which  was  finally  put  down.  A threatened  in- 
vasion by  Koxinga,  a Chinese  chief  from  Formosa,  led  to 
a general  slaughter  by  the  Spanish  of  the  Chinese  in  Manila. 
Only  5,000  Chinese  were  left  alive  in  the  islands.  Governor- 
General  Lara  made  enemies  who  accused  him  of  dishonesty. 
He  was  put  in  prison  and  fined.  He  was  set  free  later,  but  felt 
the  disgrace  so  keenly  that  he  went  back  to  Spain  and  took 


98  THE  STORT  OF  THE  PHILIPPINES. 


holy  orders.  He  was  succeeded  by  Diego  Salcedo,  who  soon 
quarreled  with  the  archbishop.  When  the  latter  died,  Sal- 
cedo behaved  in  a way  so  unseemly  that  he  was  sent  out  of  the 
country  in  disgrace.  He  died  at  sea,  on  his  way  to  Mexico. 

Questions. — What  great  change  was  made  in  1653  ? What 
did  the  new  officials  do  ? How  did  the  new  government  suc- 
ceed ? What  promise  did  Captain  Gregorio  de  Castillo  make 
to  the  rebels  in  the  Visayas  ? How  did  he  keep  it  ? Vv’hat 
led  to  the  revolt  of  1660  ? Give  an  account  of  this  uprising. 
Who  was  Koxinga  ? What  envoy  did  he  send  to  Manila  ? 
How  was  this  envoy  received  ? What  action  did  the  Spanish 
take  in  regard  to  his  demands  ? 


Chapter  IX. 


TRADE  IN  THE  PHILIPPINES. 

E Spanish  galleons  which  used  to  sail  the 
Pacific  Ocean  between  Manila  and  Mexico 
have  been  the  subject  of  many  a romance. 

■“■■  ■ The  world  never  tires  of  reading  the  stories 

written  about  them.  They  seem  to  belong  to  the  age 
of  romance  and  poetry.  The  galleons  come,  however, 
pretty  close  to  modern  times.  The  last  one  left  Manila 
for  Mexico  in  i8ii,  and  the  last  one  for  Manila  sailed 
from  Acapulco  in  1815. 

These  ships  were  in  shape  something  like  a half- 
moon. They  were  very  high  at  bow  and  stern,  short 
from  fore  to  aft,  and  very  wide.  They  were  of  about 
1,500  tons  burden,  with  light  draught.  They  usually 
had  four  decks,  and  always  carried  big  guns. 

The  galleons  were  the  Spanish  mail  ships,  and  the 
only  carriers  for  trade  between  the  islands  and  Mex- 
ico. This  trade  with  Mexico  was  the  colony’s  only 
source  of  income.  The  local  government  had  no 
money  of  its  own.  It  could  not  act  independently; 


100 


THE  STORT  OF  THE  PHILIPPINES. 


all  that  it  brought  in  tribute  and  taxes  to  the  royal 
treasury  belonged  to  the  Crown,  to  be  disposed  of  at 
the  king’s  will. 

Not  only  were  the  islands  governed  through  Mexico, 
but  all  their  trade  was  with  that  country.  So  severe 
were  the  laws  that  restricted  their  trade,  that  the  peo- 
ple were  not  allowed  to  go  even  to  China  and  Japan 
to  buy  goods.  They  might  buy  only  such  goods  as 
Chinese  and  Japanese  traders  brought  to  Manila. 

Once  a year,  usually  in  July,  a galleon  left  Manila 
laden  with  goods  from  the  islands.  These  were  sold 
in  Mexico,  and  the  money  which  they  brought,  or 
an  equal  value  in  Mexican  goods,  was  sent  back  on 
the  return  galleon.  We  have  seen  how  great  were  the 
risks  which  these  ships  ran  in  making  their  voyages. 
The  enemies  of  Spain  often  captured  them,  while  some 
were  lost  at  sea  and  never  again  heard  from.  It  was 
not  all  romance,  the  life  of  those  who  sailed  and 
manned  the  galleons.  Often  there  was  greed  and 
cruelty  to  contend  with,  rather  than  poetry  and  story 
to  be  lived.  Always  there  was  danger,  and  it  was  not 
the  spirit  of  adventure,  but  the  desire  for  gain  that 
sent  these  men  to  sea. 

The  many  risks  which  the  galleons  ran  made  ship- 
ping ventures  uncertain.  Nor  was  this  the  greatest  ill 
which  the  Manila  merchants  had  to  bear.  The  mer- 
chants of  Spain  were  always  jealous  of  them,  for  they 
were  afraid  that  the  island  trade  with  China  and  with 
Mexico  would  hurt  their  own  business.  So  they  were 
always  clamoring  for  laws  that  should  keep  Manila 
merchants  from  dealing  with  those  countries. 

By  the  beginning  of  the  eighteenth  century  very 


TRADE  IN  THE  PHILIPPINES. 


101 


harsh  laws  had  been  made  governing  all  shipments. 
Goods  might  be  shipped  only  in  bales  of  a certain  size 
and  weight,  and  only  a limited  number  of  bales  might 
be  sent  by  each  galleon.  Nor  did  the  restrictions  end 
here.  There  were  some  goods  in  which  Manila  mer- 
chants might  not  deal  at  all.  They  could  ship  no 


woven  stuffs  save  the  finest 
linen.  If  the  goods  sent  to 
Mexico  by  the  Philippine  Government  brought  more 
than  a certain  amount  in  Mexico,  the  full  sum  could 
not  be  sent  back  in  money.  The  islands  must  take 
the  surplus  in  Mexican  goods. 

So  business  suffered,  and  each  year  the  country  grew 
poorer.  At  the  same  time  the  men  who  ruled  the 
country  grew  very  rich.  One  acting  governor-general, 


THE  ARRIVAL  OF  A SPANISH 
GALLEON. 


102 


THE  STORY  OF  THE  PHILIPPINES. 


in  less  than  two  years  of  service,  got  together  a for- 
tune of  $250,000.  There  were  other  officials,  as  well, 
who  managed  to  take  home  with  them  to  Spain  sums 
nearly  as  large. 

All  this,  of  course,  worked  hardship  in  the  islands. 
Money  was  very  scarce.  Merchants  became  bankrupt 
and  had  to  go  out  of  business.  Often  the  government 
itself  had  no  money  with  which  to  pay  for  public 
work.  The  army,  too,  suffered.  The  soldiers  had  no 
barracks,  but  lived  as  they  could,  and  wherever  they 
found  shelter.  Often  there  were  long  periods  when  no 
rations  were  issued  to  them,  and  they  begged  their  food 
from  house  to  house.  When  their  demands  were  not 
granted,  they  would  take  by  force  what  they  wished, 
and  this  led  to  great  evil. 

A large  army  was  needed  to  control  the  people  and 
to  enforce  payment  of  tribute.  This  tribute  was  col- 
lected from  the  natives  for  the  support  of  the  govern- 
ment. Those  who  had  not  yet  been  baptized  were 
taxed  only  a small  sum ; those  who  belonged  to  the 
Church  paid  more. 

Few,  however,  paid  in  money.  Nearly  all  paid  in 
kind — in  goods  which  they  made,  or  produce  which 
they  raised  from  the  land.  All  tribute  in  goods  was 
kept  in  the  royal  storehouses  until  the  galleon  was 
about  to  sail.  Then  the  goods  were  sent  to  Mexico, 
to  be  sold.  Sometimes,  however,  some  of  these  goods 
were  traded  for  merchandise  brought  to  the  islands  by 
Chinese  dealers. 

A certain  per  cent,  of  the  price  which  the  shipments 
brought  in  Mexico  was  sent  back  to  Manila  to  pay 
government  expenses.  Usually,  however,  this  fixed 


TRADE  IN  THE  PHILIPPINES. 


103 


percentage  was  not  sufficient  to  meet  these  expenses. 
It  was  needful,  then,  to  increase  it  by  a further  sum 
from  the  royal  treasury.  This  additional  sum  was 
called  the  “ Real  Situado  ” (ra'al  se  tb'a  do). 

One  galleon  a year  was  not  enough  to  meet  the 
needs  of  merchants  who  wished  to  ship  goods  to 
Mexico.  In  1724,  therefore,  a royal  decree  was  made 
public  that  thereafter  two  galleons  of  500  tons  each 
would  be  sent.  This  decree,  however,  limited  the 
number  of  merchants  who  might  ship  goods,  and 
the  amount  which  each  might  send.  It  also  fixed  the 
amount  in  cash  that  might  be  taken  in  payment.  All 
values  over  this  amount  must  be  taken  in  Mexican 
goods. 

A few  years  later  this  decree  was  revoked.  Only 
one  galleon  a year  was  to  be  sent,  and  new  and  more 
severe  restrictions  were  put  upon  all  shipments.  It 
became  more  and  more  difficult,  as  time  went  on,  for 
the  merchants  of  Manila  to  carry  on  trade. 

During  the  eighteenth  century  no  foreign  merchants 
were  allowed  to  do  business  in  Manila.  Spain,  in  fact, 
did  all  that  she  could  to  kill  trade  and  industry  in  the 
islands.  At  the  same  time  she  compelled  those  who 
ruled  the  country  to  enforce  payment  of  the  last 
penny’s  value  of  tribute  that  could  be  drained  from 
the  country. 

The  governor-general  at  this  time  (1754-1759)  was 
Pedro  de  Arandia  (da  a ran'de  a).  He  was  one  of  the 
most  able  and  enterprising  officials  the  islands  had 
thus  far  had.  He  tried  to  make  a good  many  reforms 
in  the  country,  and  to  build  up  its  commerce.  He  is 
said  to  have  died  of  worry  and  regret  that  he  could 


THE  SANTA  LUCIA  GATE,  MANILA. 


TRADE  IN  THE  PHILIPPINES. 


105 


not  rule  the  land  as  he  thought  right,  and  at  the  same 
time  be  at  peace  with  those  about  him  who  were  also 
in  authority, 

Arandia  showed  himself  to  be  something  of  a states- 
man. He  made  reforms  in  the  army,  and  tried  to  bring 
the  wild  tribes  to  acknowledge  Spain’s  rights  in  the 
islands.  At  the  same  time  he  did  many  dishonest 
things.  He  made  a great  fortune  for  himself  while 
in  office.  Perhaps  he  was  sorry  for  his  dishonesty 
afterwards,  for  when  he  died  he  left  his  fortune  to 
religious  institutions.  In  those  days  men  saw  no  wrong 
or  absurdity  in  devoting  ill-gotten  wealth  to  carrying 
on  good  works. 

It  was  Arandia  who  formed  the  first  real  military 
body  in  the  country.  This  was  a regiment  made  up 
of  five  companies  of  Filipino  soldiers  and  four  com- 
panies of  Europeans.  The  latter  Arandia  had  brought 
with  him  from  Mexico.  He  called  the  whole  corps 
the  “ King’s  Regiment,”  and  took  great  pride  in  it. 
As  troops  came  in  from  the  provinces  they  were'  added 
to  the  regiment,  until  at  last  it  numbered  about  2,000 
soldiers  in  two  battalions  of  ten  companies  each.  In 
October  of  1754  the  soldiers,  for  the  first  time  in  the 
history  of  the  islands,  were  quartered  in  barracks. 
They  were  also,  both  officers  and  men,  paid  regularly 
every  two  weeks. 

In  1755  the  Chinese  question  came  up  again.  This 
time  it  was  decided  to  send  home  all  those  Chinese 
who  would  not  be  baptized.  They  were  given  a few 
months  to  wind  up  their  business,  and  a day  was  set 
when  they  should  leave  the  islands.  All  who  accepted 
baptism  were  allowed  to  remain,  and  a good  many  did 


106  THE  STORT  OF  THE  PHILIPPINES. 


this.  Over  2,000,  however,  were  sent  out  of  the  coun- 
try on  June  30,  1755. 

Need  now  arose  for  shops  and  for  small  traders  to 
carry  on  business  in  place  of  these  Chinese.  To  sup- 
ply this  need  a trading  company  of  Spanish  and  half- 
Spanish  was  formed  in  Manila.  This  trading  com- 
pany was  in  existence  for  some  years,  but  was  never 
very  successful.  It  could  not  buy  on  as  good  terms 
as  the  Chinese  had  been  able  to  make,  nor  could  it 
sell  to  such  good  advantage.  It  received  a great  deal 
of  aid  from  the  government,  but  finally  made  a bad 
failure  and  went  out  of  business. 

The  ruling  which  sent  the  Chinese  out  of  the  islands 
worked  other  harm  to  the  business  of  the  country.  Not 
only  were  there  none  to  do  the  work  which  the  Chinese 
had  done,  but  their  going  was  a direct  money  loss 
to  the  government.  The  Chinese  had  been  heavily 
taxed,  and  when  they  were  sent  away  a shortage  of 
$30,000  in  the  tax  receipts  followed  as  a direct  result. 
This  made  money  so  scarce  in  Manila  that  a petition 
was  sent  to  Spain  asking  for  a reduction  of  the  royal 
dues.  These  royal  dues  were  the  amount  which  the 
colony  had  each  year  to  raise  for  the  king,  and  the 
government  was  now  scarcely  able  to  collect  it  from 
the  people. 

But  Spain  was  in  great  need  of  money.  Wars  with 
other  nations  had  almost  emptied  her  treasury,  and 
the  petition  for  reduction  was  refused.  A decree  was 
passed,  however,  which  made  things  a little  easier  for 
the  merchants.  The  islands  must  pay  the  full  amount 
of  the  royal  dues,  but  merchants  might  send  by  the 
galleon  more  goods  and  goods  of  a finer  quality  than 


TRADE  IN  THE  PHILIPPINES. 


107 


before.  They  might  also  bring  back  more  Mexican 
goods.  In  this  way  they  could  make  more  money, 
and  thus  the  country  was  better  able  to  raise  the  sums 
demanded. 

Summary. — The  only  trading  ships  that  carried  shipments 
of  goods  from  Manila  were  the  Spanish  galleons.  The  entire 
trade  of  the  islands  was  with  Mexico,  and  was  restricted  by 
very  severe  laws.  A galleon  sailed  but  once  a year,  and  the 
amount  of  goods  which  could  be  sent  by  her  was  limited  by 
law.  The  great  risks  which  the  galleons  ran  made  shipments 
uncertain  of  return,  and  business  was  at  a disadvantage.  In 
1724  a decree  was  made  public  allowing  two  galleons  a year, 
of  500  tons  each,  to  be  sent.  The  number  of  merchants  who 
could  ship  goods  was  now  limited,  and  the  amount  that  each 
could  send.  Later  this  decree  was  revoked.  Only  one  gal- 
leon could  be  sent,  and  more  severe  restrictions  were  put  upon 
shipments.  No  foreign  merchants  were  allowed  to  do  busi- 
ness in  Manila.  In  1754  Pedro  de  Arandia  became  governor- 
general.  He  made  many  improvements  in  the  army,  and 
tried  to  build  up  trade.  He  formed  the  first  real  military  body 
in  the  islands,  and  called  it  the  “ King’s  Regiment.”  In  1755 
a law  was  made  that  all  Chinese  who  refused  baptism  should 
be  sent  out  of  the  country  on  June  30.  Over  2,000  were 
sent  away  on  that  day.  This  made  a dearth  of  traders,  and 
a trading  company  of  Spanish  and  half-Spanish  was  formed. 
It  was  never  a success,  however.  The  departure  of  these 
Chinese  cost  the  country  a loss  of  ^30,000  in  taxes  that  year. 
This  made  times  so  hard  that  the  colony  prayed  the  king  for 
a reduction  in  the  royal  dues.  Their  petition  was  refused, 
but  some  of  the  restrictions  in  regard  to  shipments  by  the 
galleon  were  made  lighter.  Merchants  could  ship  more  and 
better  goods.  This  made  matters  easier,  and  the  country 
could  better  meet  the  demands  of  the  Crown. 


io8 


THE  STORY  OF  THE  PHILIPPINES. 


Qitestiotis. — ^Vhat  were  the  Spanisli  galleons  ? How  often 
did  they  sail  ? When  did  the  last  one  leave  Manila  for 
Mexico  ? Why  were  such  severe  restrictions  put  upon  the 
trade  of  the  islands  ? What  were  some  of  these  restrictions  ? 
What  improvements  did  Governor-General  Arandia  make  in 
the  army  ? Give  an  account  of  the  decree  expelling  the 
Chinese  from  the  islands.  What  effect  followed  the  depar- 
ture of  the  Chinese  ? 


Chapter  X 


THE  ISLANDS  UNDER  ARANDIA’S  RULE. 


T was  while  Pedro  de  Arandia  was  governor- 
general  that  the  famous  overflow  of  Taal 
volcano  took  place.  At  that  time  the 
crater  of  Taal  was  torn  open  so  that  it 
measured  more  than  a mile  and  a half  across,  and  from 
this  awful  opening  poured  down  a broad  stream  of 
melted  lava,  killing  and  destroying  everything  that  it 
touched.  It  rushed  down  the  side  of  the  mountain 
and  fell  hot  and  hissing  into  the  lake.  Great  clouds  of 
steam  arose  from  the  heated  waters,  and  such  a shower 
of  ashes  and  stones  fell  as  made  the  people  think  the 
world  was  coming  to  an  end. 

For  six  months  terrible  storms  raged  in  that  part 
of  Luzon.  The  volcano  broke  out  on  the  15th  day 
of  May,  1754,  and  it  was  then  that  the  boiling  lava 
began  to  flow.  Huge  stones  shot  up  from  the  crater 
and  fell  into  the  lake,  or  were  hurled  down  upon 
the  land.  Darkness  reigned,  and  the  people  were 
filled  with  terror. 


I lO 


THE  STORr  OF  THE  PHILIPPINES. 


This  state  of  things  lasted  until  about  the  second 
day  of  June.  Then,  suddenly,  a mighty  column  of 
smoke  arose  from  the  mountain,  thick,  black,  and 
awful.  Higher  and  higher  it  mounted,  until  it  spread 
over  the  sky,  and  the  sun  shone  through  it  with  a 
sickly  yellow  light. 

This  smoke  poured  out  for  nearly  all  the  time  until 
July  10.  On  that  day  heavy  showers  of  mud,  black 
as  ink,  began  to  fall.  Terrible  sounds  were  heard,  as 


TAAL  VOLCANO. 


of  cannon  being  fired  off  inside  the  mountain.  The 
land  trembled,  and  great  waves  from  the  lake  dashed 
against  the  shore.  Dead  fish,  alligators,  and  snakes 
were  cast  up  on  shore,  and  the  town  of  Balili  (ba  le'le) 
was  soon  a swamp  of  black,  liquid  mud. 

Then  fire  began  to  pour  out  of  the  crater.  It  lasted 
until  September  25,  when  there  was  another  great 
shower  of  stones.  The  people  of  Taal  were  driven 
from  their  homes  and  fled  for  their  lives.  Then,  writes 


THE  ISLJNDS  UNDER  ARANDIA'S  RULE,  in 


Fray  Francisco  Venenchillo  (ven  en  chel'yo),  who, 
through  these  dreadful  weeks  of  disasters,  kept  a daily 
journal  of  all  that  he  observed,  “ a fearful  storm  of 
thunder  and  lightning  began,  and  never  stopped  until 
December  4.” 

In  the  meanwhile  the  volcano  was  still  in  eruption, 
and  awful  things  kept  happening.  Lake  Bombon  rose 
and  swept  over  the  town  of  Taal.  On  November  14 
inky  darkness  settled  over  the  country.  This  lasted 
for  two  days,  during  which,  even  as  far  away  as  Manila, 
candles  were  needed  at  noonday.  During  these  two 
days,  fire  and  lava  poured  out  steadily  from  the  moun- 
tain. At  last,  on  December  2,  began  a two  days’ 
hurricane.  It  wiped  out  the  town  of  Taal,  and  then 
all  was  quiet. 

In  all,  the  trouble  lasted  for  six  months  and  seven- 
teen days.  The  towns  of  Taal,  Sananan  (san  a'nan), 
Sala  (sa'la),  and  Lipa  (le'pa)  were  wholly  ruined,  and 
great  harm  was  done  in  towns  fifteen  miles  distant 
from  the  volcano.  It  was  a marvelous  event,  and 
traces  of  it  are  still  to  be  seen  in  all  the  country  around 
Lake  Bombon. 

Never  since  then  has  there  been  such  an  overflow 
from  Taal  volcano.  The  ruins  of  the  old  town  of 
Taal  may  still  be  seen  just  where  the  Pansipit  (pan  se'- 
pit)  River  enters  the  lake,  but  they  are  being  overgrown 
by  grasses  and  flowers.  In  a few  years  they  will  be 
quite  hidden.  The  present  town  of  Taal  is  farther  up 
the  river.  It  is  noted  for  the  fine  sugar  produced 
there.  This  sugar  is  well  known,  and  commands  a 
good  price  in  foreign  markets.  Excellent  cotton  stuffs 
are  also  made  there. 


I 12 


THE  STORY  OF  THE  PHILIPPINES. 


When  Governor-General  Arandia  had  formed  his 
new  King’s  Regiment,  he  at  once  found  work  for  it  to 
do.  Besides  the  regiment  he  collected  a body  of  good 
native  troops  and  began  a campaign  against  the  Igor- 
rotes.  The  Spanish  had  never  been  able  to  subdue 
these  people.  In  Arandia’s  day  they  were  still  as  wild 
and  savage  as  when  the  Europeans  first  came  to  the 
islands.  Arandia  set  out  to  conquer  them  or  to  kill 
every  one  of  them  that  could  be  found. 

The  war  was  carefully  planned.  About  i,ioo  sol- 
diers were  sent  against  them,  and  these  soldiers  waged 
a warfare  as  savage,  as  cruel,  as  the  wild  tribes  them- 
selves could  have  carried  on.  The  Igorrotes  were  sur- 
prised in  their  villages  and  given  no  quarter.  Their 
towns  were  burned  down,  and  women  and  children 
were  killed  without  mercy.  Growing  crops  were  de- 
stroyed, and  the  land  was  laid  waste  wherever  an  Igor- 
rote  home  was  found. 

But  in  spite  of  this  cruelty  the  Spanish  could  not 
conquer  the  people.  Instead,  the  King’s  Regiment  was 
driven  back  again  and  again,  and  whenever  the  Igor- 
rotes took  a Spaniard  prisoner,  they  avenged  upon 
him  the  wrongs  of  their  tribe.  The  attempt  was  at 
last  given  up.  The  Igorrotes  could  not  be  subdued, 
nor  could  they  be  coaxed  into  swearing  loyalty  to 
Spain. 

Arandia  then  sought  to  bargain  with  them.  In  1758 
a decree  was  passed  that  was  meant  not  only  for  them, 
but  for  the  other  heathen  tribes.  The  decree  read 
that  those  who  would  accept  baptism  need  pay  no 
tribute  or  tax  for  the  rest  of  their  lives.  The  Igorrotes 
were  not  caught  by  this  offer.  As  a matter  of  fact. 


THE  ISLJNDS  UNDER  ARANDIA'S  RULE.  113 

they  gave  themselves  no  trouble  to  pay  tribute  or  tax, 
anyway,  so  the  offer  had  no  attraction  for  them. 

At  this  same  time  Arandia  had  still  another  trouble 
on  his  hands,  but  one  for  which  he  was  not  to  blame. 
A few  years  before,  in  1749,  the  sultan  of  Sulu  was 


IGORROTES. 

deposed  from  his  throne  during  a rebellion.  Being  in 
name,  at  least,  a vassal  of  Spain,  he  came  to  Manila 
to  ask  Spanish  aid  in  regaining  his  rights. 

The  acting  governor-general  at  that  time  was  the 
Bishop  of  Nuevo  Segovia  (no  a'vo  sa  go've  a).  This 
worthy  gave  the  sultan  a warm  welcome  and  showed 
8 


A STREET  IN  JOLO. 


THE  ISLANDS  UNDER  ARANDIA'S  RULE.  115 


him  high  honor.  The  Moro  ruler  was  urged  to  accept 
baptism,  and  at  last  did  so,  with  several  of  his  suite. 
After  that  he  and  a large  number  of  followers  were 
kept  in  great  style  in  Manila.  The  sultan  was  known 
as  Ferdinand  I.,  and  great  attention  was  paid  him  as 
rightful  ruler  of  the  Sulu  archipelago.  But  for  some 
reason  nothing  was  done  to  help  him  recover  his  lost 
throne. 

Finally,  however,  he  was  told  that  he  was  to  be 
taken  to  Sulu.  In  fact,  with  a large  Spanish  escort, 
the  party  did  go  as  far  as  Zamboanga.  There  the  sul- 
tan and  his  people,  with  a prince  of  Sulu  who  had 
come  to  Mindanao  to  greet  him,  were  thrown  into 
prison.  To  explain  this,  it  was  charged  that  the  sultan 
had  written  disloyal  letters  to  friends  in  Sulu.  In  one 
of  these  letters,  it  was  claimed,  he  had  said  that  he  had 
not  acted  of  his  own  free  will  in  accepting  baptism. 
These  letters  had  been  intercepted  at  Zamboanga,  and 
were  declared  to  be  treasonable. 

The  sultan  was  taken  back  to  Manila  as  a prisoner, 
and  this  act  at  once  drove  the  Moros  to  fresh  fury. 
Again  there  was  war  all  along  the  southern  coast.  It 
was  pressed  with  great  cruelty  on  both  sides,  and  many 
lives  were  lost.  The  trouble  lasted  for  some  years, 
but  the  Spanish  gained  neither  power  nor  territory 
by  all  this  waste  of  lives  and  money. 

When  Arandia  came  into  office  he  wished  to  send 
the  sultan  back  to  Sulu  and  restore  to  him  his  rights. 
In  this,  however,  he  was  opposed  by  the  clergy.  Had 
he  persisted  in  trying  to  do  this  it  would  have  made 
great  strife;  so  he  yielded.  Ferdinand  I.  stayed  on  in 
Luzon,  but  was  not  kept  in  confinement.  His  son,  his 


Ii6  THE  STORT  OF  THE  PHILIPPINES. 


daughter,  and  several  chiefs  of  his  people  were  with 
him  in  the  city ; but  he  was  none  the  less  a prisoner, 
and  remained  such  until  the  British  took  Manila  in 
1762.  In  1763  the  English  commander  sent  him  to 
Sulu  and  reseated  him  on  his  throne.  As  for  the 
Moros  of  the  Sulu  archipelago,  they  never  again  trusted 
the  Spanish. 

Summary. — In  the  year  1754  there  was  a terrible  eruption 
of  Taal  volcano.  It  began  on  May  15  and  lasted  for  over 
six  months.  During  this  time  the  mountain  poured  out  fire 
and  lava.  Awful  showers  of  mud  and  stones  fell,  and  there 
were  terrible  hurricanes.  The  towns  of  Taal,  Sananan,  Sala, 
and  Lipa  were  wholly  ruined,  and  great  harm  was  done  in 
places  fifteen  miles  away.  During  Arandia’s  term  of  office, 
war  was  waged  against  the  Igorrotes,  to  conquer  or  to  kill 
them  all.  This  war  was  carried  on  with  great  cruelty,  but 
the  Igorrotes  were  not  to  be  subdued,  and  it  was  given  up. 
Later  they  were  offered  freedom  from  taxation  if  they  would 
accept  baptism,  but  they  refused  it.  _ In  1749  the  sultan  of 
Sulu  came  to  Manila  seeking  aid  to  put  down  a rebellion 
of  his  people.  He  was  well  received,  and  was  persuaded  to 
let  himself  be  baptized.  Afterwards  it  was  claimed  that  he 
had  written  treasonable  letters  home,  and  he  was  kept  a 
prisoner  in  Manila.  Arandia  tried  to  have  him  restored  to 
his  rights,  but  could  not.  The  sultan  was  sent  back  in  r763 
by  the  British,  who  then  held  Manila.  This  treatment  of  the 
sultan  greatly  enraged  the  Moros  against  the  Spanish. 

Questions. — When  was  the  great  overflow  of  Taal  volcano  ? 
Give  an  account  of  it.  Who  decided  to  conquer  the  Igorrotes? 
Describe  this  war  and  its  results.  Why  did  the  sultan  of  Sulu 
come  to  Manila  ? How  was  he  treated  by  the  Spanish  ? 
Who  finally  reseated  him  on  his  throne  ? 


Chapter  XI. 


BRITISH  OCCUPATION. 

N the  latter  part  of  the  year  1761  war  was  be- 
gun between  Spain  and  France  on  the  one 
hand,  and  England  on  the  other.  Spain  and 
France  were  first  to  declare  this  war,  but 
England  carried  on  her  part  in  it  with  great  vigor. 
The  English  took  Havana,  and  an  English  fleet  under 
Admiral  Cornish  (kor'nish)  was  sent  to  the  Pacific 
with  orders  to  take  the  Philippine  Islands. 

With  a fleet  of  thirteen  vessels  Admiral  Cornish 
entered  Manila  Bay  on  the  evening  of  September  22, 
1762.  The  ships  anchored  off  Cavite,  and  next  day 
Cornish  sent  to  demand  the  surrender  of  the  city.  This 
was,  of  course,  refused  by  Archbishop  Rojo  (ro'ho), 
who  was  then  acting  governor-general  of  the  city. 

The  archbishop’s  forces  at  that  time  consisted  of 
a small  part  of  the  King’s  Regiment,  not  more  than 
about  600  men  and  officers,  and  80  pieces  of  artillery. 
The  English  troops,  who  were  landed  under  command 
of  General  Draper  (dra'per),  numbered  one  regiment  of 


Il8  THE  STORY  OF  THE  PHILIPPINES. 

British  infantry,  two  companies  of  artillery,  2,200 
Sepoys  from  India,  and  3,000  seamen — in  all,  6,380 
men. 

Nevertheless,  in  spite  of  the  inequality  of  the  two 
armies,  the  Spanish  Churchman  defied  the  second  de- 
mand to  surrender.  A part  of  the  Spanish  force  went 
bravely  out  to  fight  the  landing  English,  but  with  what 
success  it  is  easy  to  guess.  They  were  driven  back 
into  the  city,  and  the  enemy  landed  in  full  force.  The 
British  encamped  around  Manila,  at  Malate  (ma  la'ta), 
Santiago,  and  San  Juan.  On  the  24th  of  September 
they  began  to  bombard  the  city. 

At  this  time  one  of  the  royal  galleons  was  expected 
at  Manila.  This  was  the  Philipina,  carrying  a very 
rich  cargo  and  a large  sum  of  money  for  the  govern- 
ment. Some  of  the  English  ships  went  out  to  lie  in 
wait  for  her.  They  missed  her;  for  the  Spanish  friars 
managed  to  reach  her  first,  and  by  their  aid  she  gained 
a place  of  safety.  The  British,  however,  brought  in 
another  galleon,  the  Trinidad,  from  which  they  took 
$2,500,000. 

A nephew  of  the  archbishop  was  on  board  the  Trini- 
dad, and  was  captured  with  the  ship.  When  the  Eng- 
lish learned  who  he  was,  they  sent  him  to  Manila  with 
an  escort,  and  turned  him  over  to  his  uncle.  The 
escort  then  started  back  to  the  ship,  but  was  attacked 
and  killed  by  Filipinos.  The  natives  cut  off  the  head 
of  the  English  officer,  and  refused  to  give  it  up. 

The  British  were  greatly  angered  by  this  outrage, 
and  they  now  stormed  the  city  in  earnest.  The  Span- 
ish had  by  now  got  together  a large  native  force,  which 
was  sent  against  the  enemy.  They  could  not  stand 


BRITISH  OCCUPATION.  1 19 

against  the  British  regulars,  however,  and  were  soon 
beaten  back.  The  enemy’s  artillery  made  great 
breaches  in  the  walls,  and  on  October  5 General 
Draper  and  his  army  forced  a way  into  the  city.  By 
another  day  the  following  terms  of  surrender  were 
agreed  upon: 

The  Spanish  were  to  have  full  religious  freedom  ; 


ROYAL  GATE  AND  SALLY  PORT  IN  THE  CITY  WALL,  MANILA. 

private  property  was  to  be  held  safe;  the  Supreme 
Court  was  to  keep  order,  and  free  trade  was  to  be 
allowed.  The  Spanish  were  to  pay  the  British  an 
indemnity  of  $4,000,000.  These  terms  were  signed, 
and  the  British  flag  floated  over  Manila. 


120 


THE  STORr  OF  THE  PHILIPPINES. 


The  English  and  Sepoy  troops,  turned  loose  in 
the  city,  did  great  mischief  and  destroyed  much  pub- 
lic property.  The  archbishop  then  went  to  General 
Draper  and  begged  him  to  put  a stop  to  this.  The 
general  issued  orders  forbidding  violence  and  pillage 
by  his  soldiers.  He  himself  shot  and  killed  one  Sepoy 
whom  he  saw  attack  a Filipino. 

But  while  the  British  were  in  possession  of  Manila, 
they  were  not  without  opposition.  It  was  the  law  in 
the  archipelago  that  if  at  any  time  the  country  should 
be  without  a governor-general,  the  Supreme  Court 
should  govern.  This  law  one  of  the  justices  of  the 
court  now  tried  to  put  in  force.  Simon  de  Anda  y 
Salazar  (se'mon  da  an'da  e sal  a thar'),  the  justice  in 
question,  pretended  to  think  -that  the  Spanish  could 
have  held  Manila  but  for  the  weakness  of  the  arch- 
bishop. Refusing  to  listen  to  reason,  he  gathered  a 
band  of  Filipinos  whom  he  promised  to  lead  against 
the  English.  With  a few  of  them  he  fled  in  a prahu 
to  Bulacan  the  night  before  the  city  surrendered.  He 
took  with  him  some  of  the  stamped  paper  of  the  gov- 
ernment. This  would,  he  knew,  be  a help  to  him  in  a 
plan  which  he  meant  to  carry  out. 

Now,  ignoring  the  fact  that  Archbishop  Rojo  was 
the  acting  governor-general,  Simon  de  Anda  began  an 
absurd  fight  against  the  English.  He  claimed  the 
right,  as  a justice  of  the  Supreme  Court,  to  act  as 
governor-general.  On  the  stamped  paper  he  wrote  a 
proclamation  ordering  the  British  to  leave  Manila. 
He  sent  this  proclamation  to  General  Draper,  who 
ignored  it  and  declared  Anda  a nuisance. 

After  this  Anda  raised  a small  army,  and  fought  sev- 


BRITISH  OCCUPATION. 


\2\ 


power  to  carry  on  effective  warfare.  Seeing  this,  the 
Chinese  of  Pampanga  made  a plot  to  kill  him. 

Simon  de  Anda  was  told  of  this  plot,  and  his  rage 
was  great.  He  collected  all  his  Filipinos  and  marched 
against  the  Chinese.  He  had  real  war  at  last,  and  the 
Spanish  accounts  say  that  8,000  Chinese  were  slain. 

In  the  meantime  the  war  in  Europe  was  over.  By 
the  Peace  of  Paris,  made  February  lo,  1763,  it  was 


eral  battles  with  the  British.  They  only  served  to  keep 
the  country  stirred  up,  so  that  neither  the  Spanish 
nor  the  British  could  go  about  their  affairs  in  peace. 
General  Draper,  meanwhile,  was  busy  restoring  the- 
sultan  of  Sulu  to  his  throne.  Anda  had  become  a 
hindrance  to  peace,  while  at  the  same  time  he  had  no 


THE  BRITISH  ASSAULT  ON  THE  WALLS  OF  MANILA. 


1 22 


THE  STORT  OF  THE  PHILIPPINES. 


settled  that  Manila  should  be  restored  to  Spain.  The 
British  commander  made  ready  to  turn  over  the  city 
to  the  Spanish  and  go  home,  but  at  once  a new  diffi- 
culty arose. 

Simon  de  Anda  was  in  command  of  whatever  Span- 
ish army  there  was  in  the  islands  at  this  time.  There- 
fore, when  a notice  was  sent  to  the  archbishop  for 
the  “ Commander-in-Chief  of  the  Spanish  forces,”  the 
archbishop  sent  it  on  to  Anda.  This  notice  was  to 
the  effect  that  Anda  should  take  over  the  city  from 
the  English,  but  he  refused  to  receive  the  notice.  He 
declared  that  he  should  have  been  addressed  as  ‘‘  Cap- 
tain-General,” and  would  recognize  no  other  style  of 
address.  On  this  foolish  plea  he  kept  up  war  with  the 
English  until  January,  1764,  in  spite  of  the  peace  be- 
tween his  country  and  England.  All  that  the  British 
wished  was  that  Anda  should  let  them  hand  the  city  over 
to  him  and  depart.  This,  however,  he  would  not  do. 

On  January  30,  1764,  Archbishop  Rojo  died.  There 
was  still,  however,  no  one  to  whom  to  give  up  Manila, 
for  several  men  at  once  claimed  the  right  to  act  as 
governor-general. 

At  last  the  Spanish  Government  sent  out  from  Mex- 
ico a new  governor-general.  As  soon  as  he  reached 
Manila  he  sent  word  to  the  British  commander  that  he 
was  ready  to  take  over  the  city,  and  he  arranged  that 
Simon  de  Anda  should  be  the  one  actually  to  receive 
the  city  back.  It  was  turned  over  to  Anda  for  the 
governor-general,  and  the  English  left  the  country. 
Only  $1,000,000  was  paid  of  the  $4,000,000  war  in- 
demnity agreed  upon,  but  the  English  received  a bill 
upon  the  Madrid  treasury  for  the  remainder  of  that  sum. 


BRITISH  OCCUPATION. 


123 


Summary. — In  the  latter  part  of  lyht  war  began  between 
France  and  Spain  on  the  one  hand,  and  England  on  the  other. 
In  September,  1762,  a British  fleet  came  to  Manila  and  took  that 
city.  Archbishop  Rojo,  who  was  acting  governor-general,  sur- 
rendered the  city.  Simon  de  Anda,  a justice  of  the  Supreme 
Court,  opposed  the  surrender  of  Manila.  He  fled  to  Bulacan, 
gathered  a native  army,  and  issued  a proclamation  ordering  the 
British  to  leave  the  islands.  This  proclamation  was  not  heeded. 
Several  ineffective  battles  were  fought,  and  strife  continued  be- 
tween the  English  and  Anda’s  forces.  The  Chinese  made  a plot 
to  kill  Anda,  and  he  fought  them  with  his  army.  When  peace 
was  declared  in  Europe,  it  was  decided  that  Manila  should  be 
given  back  to  Spain.  Simon  de  Anda,  as  commander  of  the 
Spanish  army  in  the  Philippines,  should  have  received  the 
city  from  the  English.  He  claimed  not  to  have  been  prop- 
erly addressed,  and  refused  to  accept  the  notice  telling  him 
of  the  treaty  of  peace.  He  kept  up  the  war  against  the  Brit- 
ish until  January,  1764.  The  archbishop  died  on  January  30, 
1764.  Several  men  now  claimed  the  right  to  act  as  governor- 
general.  At  last  the  home  government  sent  out  a new  gov- 
ernor-general, who  took  over  the  city,  and  the  English  left  the 
islands. 

Questions. — What  countries  were  at  war  against  England 
in  1761  ? What  did  the  English  do  ? When  and  how  was 
Manila  taken  by  the  British  ? Who  was  Simon  de  Anda  ? 
On  what  did  he  base  his  claim  to  a right  to  act  for  the  coun- 
try ? When  was  peace  made  ? Why  did  Anda  refuse  to  take 
over  the  city  ? How  long  did  he  keep  up  the  war  ? How 
was  the  matter  finally  settled  ? 


Chapter  XII. 


TO  THE  END  OF  THE  EIGHTEENTH  CENTURY. 

ILE  the  British  were  in  Manila,  and  for 
several  years  after  they  left  the  country, 
the  islands  were  ver}^  unquiet.  There  were 
many  small  uprisings  among  the  people,  who 
hoped,  in  this  time  of  unrest,  to  gain  some  of  the 
rights  which  they  felt  were  theirs. 

One  of  these  uprisings  was  led  by  a native  named 
Silan  (se'Ian).  This  man  was  not  quite  sane,  and  made 
many  pretensions,  such  as  that  he  was  the  earthly 
representative  of  divine  power.  Many  of  Simon  de 
Anda’s  followers  deserted  him  to  join  Silan ’s  army, 
and  for  a time  Silan  was  very  successful  against  the 
Spanish.  He  turned  the  vicar-general  of  Ilocos  Sur 
out  of  his  house,  and  made  the  Augustine  friars  pay 
tribute  to  support  the  rebel  forces.  His  brain  was 
weak,  however,  and  success  seemed  wholly  to  des- 
troy his  reason.  He  came  to  think  that  he  was 
more  than  human,  and  then,  of  course,  he  began  to 
make  mistakes. 


TO  END  OF  EIGHTEENTH  CENTURT.  125 


At  last  Silan  joined  with  the  British  against  his  own 
country.  This  opened  the  eyes  of  the  Filipinos  to  his 
real  nature.  They  saw  that  he  was  ready  to  betray 
them  instead  of  leading  them  against  their  enemies, 
and  at  once  they  turned  from  him.  In  May,  1763, 
he  was  killed  by  a half-caste  named  Vicos  (ve'kos), 
and  the  rebellion  which  he  had  led  died  out. 

There  were  other  revolts  in  Luzon,  however.  Every- 
where the  people  were  ready,  on  any  pretext,  to  take 
up  arms  against  authority.  They  refused  to  pay  trib- 
ute, and  resented  all  demands  of  Spain  upon  them. 
Small  riots  kept  breaking  out  in  the  provinces,  and  the 
loyal  troops  were  constantly  marching  about  the  island  _ 
in  pursuit  of  rebels.  In  all  this  petty  warfare  the 
Spanish  lost  70  Europeans  and  140  native  soldiers,  and 
fully  10,000  natives  were  slain.  By  the  year  1765,  how- 
ever, the  Spanish  had  the  country  again  under  control, 
and  some  degree  of  peace  settled  over  the  land. 

There  was  still  political  strife  in  Manila,  even  though 
the  people  were  no  longer  in  revolt.  This  strife  at 
last  became  very  serious.  A bitter  quarrel  also  existed 
between  the  Augustine  friars  on  the  one  hand,  and  the 
members  of  the  Society  of  Jesus  on  the  other. 

The  Augustines  were  the  first  order  of  friars  to  send 
priests  to  the  islands.  From  earliest  times  the  Augus- 
tine friars  had  been  concerned  in  the  welfare  of  the 
people.  Like  all  other  leaders  in  the  islands,  they 
made  many  mistakes,  but  they  also  did  many  wise 
and  good  things.  An  Augustine  friar  had  first  (in 
1595)  taught  the  Filipinos  the  art  of  weaving,  and  as 
early  as  1610  the  Archbishop  of  Manila,  an  Augustine 
friar,  had  founded  the  College  of  Santo  Tomas. 


126  THE  STORT  OF  THE  PHILIPPINES. 


The  Jesuits  also  had  a college  in  Manila,  San  Jos6 
College,  founded  by  them  in  i6oi.  This  Society  had 
among  its  members  many  fine  scholars.  It  had  done 
much  for  education  in  the  islands,  and  the  Jesuit 
priests  were  nearly  all  men  learned  in  law  and  matters 
of  government. 

Each  party  to  this  quarrel  between  the  orders  ac- 
cused the  other  of  cruelty  to  the  natives.  Each  de- 
clared that  the  other  was  hindering  the  government  in 
its  rule,  instead  of  helping  to  keep  the  peace.  At  last 
the  trouble  became  so  serious  that,  in  1768,  the  Jesuits 
left  the  archipelago.  It  was  thought  best  for  the  peace 
of  the  country  that  they  should  go,  and  they  remained 
away  for  ninety-one  years.  In  1859  the  Society  again 
came  to  the  islands  and  took  up  its  work  among  the 
people. 

At  the  time  the  Jesuits  left,  Governor-General  Jos6 
Raon  (ho  sa'  ra  on')  was  accused  by  the  other  Orders  of 
favoring  this  Society.  He  was  charged  with  telling  the 
Jesuits  state  secrets,  and  on  this  charge  was  disgraced 
and  sent  home.  Soon  afterwards  Simon  de  Anda, 
who  was  in  Spain  during  this  time,  was  made  governor- 
general,  and  came  back  to  Manila. 

Anda  took'  up  the  reins  of  government,  confident 
that  he  was  just  the  man  to  rule  these  islands.  In 
this,  however,  he  was  mistaken.  He  was  headstrong 
and  imprudent.  He  was  unwilling  to  forgive  his  ene- 
mies or  to  be  advised  by  his  friends.  Indeed,  his 
hasty  temper  and  his  lack  of  good  sense  before  long 
turned  his  friends  from  him.  He  quarreled  with  the 
officers  of  the  State,  of  the  army,  and  of  the  Church, 
and  his  rule  was  a stormy  one.  He  soon  wore  himself 


TO  END  OF  EIGHTEENTH  CENTURT. 


127 

out,  and  in  1776  he  died  in  the  hospital  of  San  Juan 
de  Dios,  at  Cavite. 

At  this  time  new  ideas  of  human  rights  and  liberties 


MONUMENT  TO  SIMON  DE  ANDA  ON  THE  MALACON,  MANILA. 


were  stirring  the  whole  world.  In  Europe  people  were 
growing  bolder  and  freer  in  their  protests  against 
tyranny.  In  America  the  colonies  had  begun  the 


128 


THE  STORT  OF  THE  PHILIPPINES. 


eight  years’  war  that  was  to  free  them  from  England’s 
unjust  rule.  In  Mexico  was  growing  the  discontent 
that  only  ended  when  Mexico  had  thrown  off  the  yoke 
of  Spain.  Everywhere  the  people  were  demanding 
freedom ; but  in  the  Philippine  Islands  a plan  was 
forming  to  take  from  the  natives  still  more  of  the 
little  liberty  they  had. 

In  the  year  1778  Don  Jose  Basco  y Vargas  (ho  sa' 
bas'  CO  e var'  gas)  became  governor-general  of  the  archi- 
pelago. He  found  business  at  a low  ebb,  and  the  coun- 
try very  poor.  The  treasury  was  nearly  empty;  the 
people  had  no  money,  and  the  industries  of  the  country 
were  almost  at  a standstill. 

Vargas  was  in  some  ways  a wise  man.  He  saw  that 
farming,  and  not  trade,  was  the  work  that  alone  could 
bring  prosperity  to  these  islands.  Farming,  however, 
was  neglected.  The  country  could  be  very  rich  if  the 
people  would  but  give  their  attention  to  raising  the 
crops  that  grow  so  readily  here.  Rice,  cocoanuts, 
hemp,  coffee,  tea,  sugar — all  of  which  are  things  that 
the  whole  world  uses — could  be  grown  here,  so  that 
the  islands  under  cultivation  would  rank  with  the  rich 
countries  of  the  earth. 

All  this  Vargas  understood.  He  saw  that  great  sums 
of  money  could  be  made  off  the  land,  and  he  resolved 
that  it  should  be  done.  But,  like  others  who  had  been 
in  office  before  him,  his  thought  was  for  Spain,  instead 
of  for  the  people.  He  cared  nothing  that  the  Filipinos, 
too,  should  share  in  whatever  good  might  come  to  the 
country. 

There  can,  however,  be  no  real  prosperity  in  a coun- 
try unless  it  is  shared  by  all  the  people  in  it.  One 


TO  END  OF  EIGHTEENTH  CENTURT. 


129 


class  cannot  always  go  on  getting  good  things  while 
another  goes  without.  This  fact  Vargas  forgot.  His 
plan  for  improving  things  concerned  itself  only  with 
the  good  that  should  result  to  the  royal  treasury.  He 
gave  no  thought  to  the  effect  the  plan  might  have  on 
the  people. 

Tobacco  had  been  grown  in  the  Visayas  from  the 
beginning  of  Spanish  rule.  The  Spaniards  brought 
the  seed  with  them  from  Mexico,  and  the  plant  was 
taken  into  China  from  these  islands.  Up  to  the  time 
when  Vargas  came,  the  crop  had  never  been  a large  one 
here,  but  under  the  system  which  he  started  it  soon 
became  the  most  important  industry  in  the  countr)^ 

In  1781  the  growing  and  selling  of  tobacco  on  the 
island  of  Luzon  was  made  a government  monopoly. 
This  meant  that  no  man  might  raise  or  sell  a single 
leaf  of  tobacco  without  first  having  permission  from 
the  government. 

Before  this,  any  man  who  wished  to  do  so  might 
raise  as  much  tobacco  as  he  could,  and  might  sell  it 
when  and  as  he  pleased.  All  this  was  now  changed. 
The  farmers  on  Luzon  who  had  good  tobacco  land 
were  compelled  to  raise  this  crop,  or  else  forfeit  the 
use  of  their  land  and  its  products  for  a term  of  years. 
If  a man  refused  to  plant  tobacco,  his  land  was  taken 
from  him  for  three  years,  and  another  man  might 
cultivate  it.  A law  was  also  passed  compelling  the 
tobacco  planters  and  laborers  to  work  on  the  crop 
whenever  labor  was  needed. 

The  way  in  which  the  plan  worked  was  very  simple. 
The  government  made  a contract  with  a planter  for  his 
crop.  The  price  to  be  paid  was  based  upon  an  esti- 
9 


130  THE  STORT  OF  THE  PHILIPPINES. 


mate  of  what  the  land  was  likely  to  yield.  If  at  har- 
vest time  the  crop  was  less  than  this  estimate,  the 
planter  had  to  pay  a heavy  fine.  If,  on  the  other  hand, 
it  was  larger  than  had  been  estimated,  he  could  not 
keep  a single  leaf  for  his  own  use;  it  must  all  be 
turned  over  to  the  officials,  and  what  the  government 
did  not  use  was  destroyed. 

This  was  very  hard,  and  the  power  given  to  tobacco 
inspectors  made  it  harder  still.  These  officers  had 
authority  to  look  wherever  they  saw  fit  for  hidden 
tobacco.  They  might  search  the  house  of  a tobacco 
grower,  or  even  the  persons  of  himself  and  his  family, 
if  they  suspected  him  of  hiding  a few  leaves  for  his 
own  use.  This  worked  much  evil,  and  more  than  one 
inspector,  in  the  early  days  of  the  system,  was  killed 
by  an  angry  planter  whose  home  and  family  he  thus 
molested. 

The  new  system  of  tobacco-growing  worked  well  for 
the  authorities.  Never  before  had  the  treasury  been 
so  well  filled.  The  royal  dues  were  promptly  paid, 
and  for  the  first  time  in  the  history  of  Spain’s  rule 
here,  the  colony  seemed  likely  to  become  profitable 
to  the  Crown.  The  home  government  was  delighted, 
and  Vargas  was  much  praised.  The  tobacco  monop- 
oly, however,  laid  a heavy  hand  upon  the  most  use- 
ful class  of  Spain’s  Filipino  subjects.  It  oppressed 
the  farmers  and  the  land-owners.  These  are  the  peo- 
ple, in  every  country,  who  are  most  deeply  interested 
in  good  government.  They  are  the  mainstay  of  na- 
tional order  and  prosperity.  When  this  class  in  any 
land  suffers,  no  other  can  long  remain  prosperous. 

It  was  late  in  the  day,  moreover,  for  such  a system 


TO  END  OF  EIGHTEENTH  CENTURT. 


131 

to  be  inaugurated.  It  belonged  to  a less  enlightened 
age  in  the  history  of  mankind,  and  in  the  end  it  cost 
Spain  more  than  it  ever  profited  her.  The  Filipino 
people  were  coming  out  of  the  darkness  in  which  they 
had  so  long  been  kept.  They  were  learning  that  mere 
blind  revolt  would  help  them  none,  and  this  knowledge 
was  in  itself  of  great  worth.  It  is  not  in  human  nature 
to  bear  patiently  such  wrongs  as  they  now  suffered, 
and  the  wrath  of  the  people  smoldered,  ready  to 
break  out  at  any  moment.  Whenever  it  did  blaze  up, 
there  was  trouble  for  Spaniards  and  Filipinos  alike. 

Summary. — The  presence  of  the  British  in  the  islands  was 
a signal  for  further  revolts  of  the  people.  There  were  upris- 
ings all  over  the  island  of  Luzon  after  the  British  left,  and 
the  Spanish  forces  were  kept  busy  marching  after  rebels.  It 
is  estimated  that  some  10,000  natives  lost  their  lives  in  these 
uprisings.  A bitter  quarrel  between  the  Augustine  friars  and 
the  Jesuits  resulted  in  the  Jesuits  leaving  the  country  in  1768. 
Governor-General  Raon  fell  into  disgrace  at  about  the  same 
time,  and  was  removed  from  office.  He  was  succeeded  by 
Simon  de  Anda,  whose  rule  was  not  successful.  In  1778  Don 
Jose  Basco  y Vargas  became  governor-general.  He  made  the 
growing  of  tobacco  in  Luzon  a government  monopoly.  This 
system  brought  money  into  the  royal  treasury,  but  worked 
great  hardship  for  the  farmers. 

Questio7is. — Give  an  account  of  Silan’s  revolt.  What  was 
the  cause  of  the  trouble  between  the  Augustine  friars  and  the 
Jesuits  ? When  did  the  Jesuits  leave  the  country  ? Who 
succeeded  Jose  Raon  as  governor-general  ? What  system 
of  tobacco  culture  did  he  introduce  ? How  did  this  system, 
affect  the  country  ? 


Chapter  XIII. 


THE  CONSTITUTION  OF  1812. 

N the  year  1800,  Spain,  while  still  a proud 
nation,  was  no  longer  a powerful  one.  In 
earlier  centuries  she  had  led  the  world  in 
commerce,  in  the  arts,  and  in  science.  She 
had  known  wise  and  far-sighted  rulers,  and  her  scholars 
had  been  among  the  greatest  in  the  world.  Europe, 
when  any  new  enterprise  was  talked  of,  waited  for 
Spain  to  take  the  lead  in  action  regarding  it. 

But,  little  by  little,  Spain  fell  behind  other  countries 
in  the  march  of  progress.  Other  nations  improved 
their  navies  and  their  merchant  ships,  while  Spain  still 
clung  to  the  old  galleons  of  hundreds  of  years  ago. 
She  made  no  progress  in  her  merchant  service,  nor 
much  in  her  naval  strength.  Other  nations  were  seek- 
ing trade  and  new  chances  for  prosperity ; Spain  still 
kept  her  markets  closed  to  the  outside  world.  In  the 
year  1800  she  even  passed  a law  forbidding  foreigners 
to  live  in  the  Philippine  Islands.  Such  a law  could 
not  be  fully  enforced  at  that  stage  of  the  world’s 


pines  and  America.  Foreign  merchants  could  not  ao 
business  in  Manila,  and  every  effort  was  made  to  limit 
the  nature  of  the  trade  in  that  port.  Cuba,  Porto 
Rico,  and  other  Spanish  colonies  suffered,  as  well, 
from  the  harsh  restrictions  which  the  mother  country 
put  upon  their  trade. 

The  government  of  the  Philippine  Islands  had  grown 


THE  CONSTITUTION  OF  1812.  133 

progress,  but  Spain  did  succeed  in  keeping  the  port  of 
Manila  closed  to  outside  commerce. 

Her  colonies  might  not  even  trade  freely  with  one 
another.  Mexico  might  not  send  to  the  Philippines 
for  goods,  lest  the  Mexicans  should  buy  less  from 
Spain.  Merchants  in  the  Peninsula  looked  with  great 
jealousy  upon  the  growing  trade  between  the  Philip- 


A MODERN  WAR  SHIP. 


134  ‘J'HE  srORT  OF  THE  PHILIPPINES. 


to  be  of  the  very  worst  sort.  Many  of  the  high  officials 
were  mere  adventurers  from  Spain.  They  had  no 
higher  idea  of  right  than  their  own  wills;  they  neither 
loved  nor  understood  the  people,  and  they  could  not 
command  the  good  will  or  the  respect  of  the  Fili- 
pinos. Many  of  the  latter  were  superior  in  character 
and  in  education  to  the  men  who  ruled  the  country, 
and  the  people  were  held  in  check  by  fear  rather  than 
by  loyalty. 

The  government  system  of  tobacco-growing  early 
became  a great  source  of  trouble.  Constant  watch- 
ing, heavy  fines,  imprisonment,  even  whipping,  came 
to  be  necessary  in  order  to  hold  the  people  to  work 
on  the  tobacco  crop,  and  much  evil  and  injustice 
were  done  against  the  people  by  the  officials  who  en- 
forced these  measures. 

As  was  to  be  expected,  the  people  often  rebelled. 
Serious  riots  happened  among  the  tobacco  growers  in 
northern  Luzon  in  1807,  and  again  in  1814.  In  these 
there  was  great  loss  of  life  among  both  Spanish  and 
Filipinos.  Moreover,  to  add  to  the  evil  of  forcing  the 
people  to  grow  tobacco,  the  government  was  very  slow 
in  paying  the  planters.  Year  after  year  these  men 
were  compelled  either  to  raise  tobacco  or  to  give  up 
their  land,  while  they  could  get  scarcely  any  return  for 
their  work.  When  at  last  the  government  made  pay- 
ment, it  paid  in  treasury  notes.  These  the  people 
were  forced  by  necessity  to  sell  for  almost  nothing,  to 
speculators  who  went  about  buying  them  up. 

The  islands  suffered  much  from  all  these  bad  con- 
ditions, and  the  people  became  impatient  and  rebel- 
lious over  the  injustice  heape-d  upon  them.  The  Ameri- 


THE  CONSTITUTION  OF  1812. 


135 


can  Revolution  had  had  a marked  effect  upon  all 
Europe.  It  had  awakened  ideas  of  liberty  in  the  com- 
mon people  everywhere,  and  had  set  the  whole  world 
thinking  about  the  rights  of  man.  The  freedom  of 
this  one  country  helped  to  insure  the  liberties  of  all 
other  lands.  Even  in  the  far-off  Philippines  the  echo 
was  heard  of  the  demand  for  that  justice  and  decent 
treatment  which  is  every  man’s  right. 

In  England,  in  France,  and  in  Germany,  men  were 
asking  for  a voice  in  their  own  government,  and  their 
demand  was  winning  a hearing.  Besides  this,  the 
people  of  Mexico  had  now  begun  the  struggle  which 
ended  at  last  in  their  throwing  off  Spain’s  yoke. 

By  the  year  1810  it  was  plain  that  it  rvould  no  longer 
be  possible  to  carry  on  the  colony’s  trade  by  means  of 
the  galleons  to  Mexico.  The  Spanish  Cortes  (cor'tas), 
therefore,  passed  a decree  discontinuing  these  ships, 
and  Manila  merchants  were  given  permission  to  fit  out 
private  ships,  under  the  Spanish  flag,  for  trade  with 
America.  The  last  state  galleon  left  Manila  for  Aca- 
pulco in  j8ii.  That  same  year  saw  the  start  of  the 
first  newspaper  in  the  Philippines,  and  the  beginning 
of  an  effort  by  the  young  men  of  Manila  to  bring 
about  a better  understanding  between  the  colony 
and  the  mother  country. 

About  this  time  the  cause  of  political  liberty  began 
to  win  a hearing  in  Spain.  The  Liberal  Party  was  in 
power  there,  and  a strong  feeling  for  popular  govern- 
ment was  winning  its  way  in  the  country.  In  1809 
the  Supreme  Council  in  Spain  convened  the  famous 
Cortes  de  Cadiz,  in  which  were  assembled  delegates 
from  all  Spain’s  colonies — Cuba,  Venezuela,  the  Philip- 


n6  THE  STORT  OF  THE  PHILIPPINES. 


pines,  etc.  The  Cortes  some  time  later  passed  what 
is  known  in  history  as  the  Act  of  Constitution  of 
1812.  It  gave  to  each  of  the  colonies  the  right  to 
send  one  or  more  representatives  to  the  Cortes. 

The  Filipino  delegate  who  signed  this  Act  of  Con- 
stitution was  Ventura  de  Los  Reyes  (ven  to'ra  da  los 
ri'es).  The  Act  was  sworn  to  by  the  proper  officials  in 
Manila  in  1813,  but  soon  afterwards  was  suspended. 
It  came  into  force  again,  however,  a few  years  later, 
and  in  1820  the  Cortes  again  admitted  representatives 
from  the  Philippines.  There  were  seventeen  of  these 
representatives,  and  they  took  part  in  the  parliamen- 
tary debates  of  1822-1823. 

A short  time  afterwards  the  Constitution  was  again 
suspended  by  act  of  Ferdinand  VII.  A little  later 
King  Ferdinand  died,  and  again  two  Filipino  deputies 
sat  in  the  Cortes.  Filipino  members  also  sat  in  the 
Cortes  during  the  reign  of  Isabella  II.,  but  upon  the 
opening  of  Parliament  in  1837  it  was  voted  to  exclude 
them.  Thus  the  dream  of  the  Filipinos,  of  representa- 
tion in  the  government,  came  to  naught. 

All  this  gave  the  people  a taste  of  political  freedom. 
The  men  who  represented  the  islands  in  the  Spanish 
Cortes  came  back  to  Manila  full  of  the  idea  of  equal 
rights  for  all.  They  preached  this  doctrine  to  the 
people,  and  their  words  found  ready  hearers.  Soon, 
on  Luzon,  a group  of  young  Filipinos  and  Mestizos 
gathered.  Their  aim  was  to  bring  about  real  reforms 
in  the  government,  and  to  secure  greater  peace,  pros- 
perity, and  liberty  to  the  people.  The  discontent  of 
the  Filipinos  began  to  be  of  a more  intelligent  sort, 
and  to  have  a definite  purpose.  The  people  were  com- 


THE  CONSTITUTION  OF  1812. 


137 

ing  to  a clearer  idea  of  what  they  wanted,  and  of  the 
nature  of  the  reforms  needed  in  the  country. 

At  this  time,  too,  foreigners  began  to  do  business  in 
Manila.  England,  by  force  of  arms,  had  gained  the 
right  to  trade  with  this  port,  and  “ the  shut  door” 
was  no  longer  possible.  Mexico  had  obtained  her  free- 


KING  FERDINAND  VII. 


dom  from  Spain,  and  the  islands  were  now  governed 
direct  from  the  Peninsula.  The  independence  of  Mex- 
ico had  a marked  influence  on  the  Filipinos  in  Luzon. 
They  began  to  feel  that  they  too  might  strike  for 
their  rights.  They  had  no  idea  of  winning  independ- 
ence, but  they  felt  that  they  must  have  greater  liberty. 
To  meet  this  growing  discontent  more  troops  were  asked 
for,  and  were  sent  from  Spain.  The  King’s  Regiment 


138  THE  STOR7-  OF  THE  PHILIPPINES. 


was  reorganized  from  these,  and  a force  of  10, 000  men 
was  kept  in  and  about  Manila. 

In  tlie  Visayas  matters  were  different.  The  people 
there  were  farther  from  the  capital.  They  knew  little 
or  nothing  of  the  changes  and  the  differences  brought 
about  by  the  Constitution  of  1812.  They  had  no  idea 
of  the  meaning  of  the  word  “ equality  ” as  between 
themselves  and  their  rulers.  Most  of  them  had  never 
heard  of  the  Constitution  of  1812.  They  did  not 
dream  that  political  equality  had  ever  been  thought  of 
for  them. 

The  colony  was  at  this  time  troubled  outwardly  as 
well  as  within.  Spain  and  England  were  at  war,  and 
the  English  were  a source  of  danger  and  anxiety  to  the 
archipelago.  Several  expeditions  had  to  be  raised  to 
fight  off  the  British  from  various  places  on  the  islands, 
where  they  had  set  up  headquarters.  The  Moros  and 
the  wild  tribes  of  Mindanao  were  also  giving  trouble. 
They  even  came  as  far  north  as  Manila,  and  carried  off 
men  and  women  into  captivity  in  the  south. 

Nevertheless,  during  all  these  troubled  years,  a num- 
ber of  useful  works  were  undertaken  and  carried  out  by 
the  government.  In  1817  a royal  decree  was  issued 
commanding  that  schools  for  Filipino  boys  and  girls 
should  be  opened  in  all  the  convents.  In  1820  the 
duties  were  taken  off,  for  ten  years,  from  the  natural 
and  manufactured  products  of  the  islands  sent  to 
Spain,  and  an  effort  was  made  to  revive  the  dying 
commerce  of  the  country. 

In  this  same  year  there  was  a great  cholera  epidemic 
in  Manila.  Many  natives,  some  30,000,  the  accounts 
say,  died  of  it ; but  only  one  foreigner,  an  Englishman. 


A STPx-EET  IN  MANILA. 


140 


THE  STORT  OF  THE  PHILIPPINES. 


The  people  got  the  idea  that  the  foreigners  had  caused 
this  epidemic  by  poisoning  the  water  of  the  wells. 
They  rose  against  the  foreign  residents,  and  killed  all 
the  English  and  French  before  the  authorities  could 
control  them.  There  was  a feeling  among  the  Spanish 
in  Manila  that  Governor-General  Folgueras  (fol  go  er'- 
as)  had  not  been  as  prompt  as  he  might  have  been 
in  quelling  this  uprising.  It  was  openly  stated  that 
he  had  made  no  effort  to  subdue  the  mob  until  the 
English  and  the  French  residents  were  killed. 

To  defend  himself  against  this  accusation  the  gov- 
ernor-general made  certain  criticisms  of  the  Spanish- 
American  forces  in  the  islands.  He  charged  them  with 
disloyalty,  recommending  that  they  be  withdrawn,  and 
replaced  by  a larger  force  to  be  sent  from  Spain.  He 
represented  to  the  home  government  that  this  was 
necessary,  because  the  Spanish-American  troops  could 
not  be  depended  upon. 

In  1822  a new  governor-general,  Senor  Juan  Antonio 
Martinez  (an  to'ne  6 mar  te'neth),  was  sent  out.  With 
him  came  many  officers  and  soldiers  from  the  Penin- 
sula. Following  the  advice  of  Folgueras,  Martinez 
sent  a number  of  persons  to  Spain,  on  the  pretext  that 
they  had  conspired  against  the  government. 

All  this  provoked  a revolt  of  a part  of  the  King’s 
Regiment,  led  by  Captain  Novales  (no  val'es),  a Span- 
ish-American. A fierce  battle  was  fought  in  the  streets 
of  Manila  on  the  night  of  June  i,  1823,  and  Folgueras 
was  slain.  However,  order  was  finally  restored  in  the 
regiment.  The  leaders  of  the  revolt  were  executed, 
and,  as  usual,  the  authorities  seemed  to  think  that  the 
matter  needed  no  further  attention. 


THE  CONSTITUTION  OF  1812. 


141 

Summary. — At  the  beginning  of  the  nineteenth  century 
Spain  was  no  longer  a great  world  power.  The  government 
of  the  Philippines  was  full  of  evil,  and  the  people  had  but 
little  justice.  The  tobacco  monopoly  had  become  a source 
of  much  trouble,  and  the  people  were  often  in  rebellion 
because  of  it.  Ideas  of  liberty  were  growing  among  other 
nations,  and  the  Filipinos,  too,  were  becoming  restless  under 
oppression.  In  1811  the  last  state  galleon  for  Acapulco  left 
Manila.  The  first  newspaper  in  the  Philippines  was  started 
in  1811.  In  i8r2  the  Spanish  Cortes  passed  the  Constitu- 
tion of  1812,  giving  Spanish  colonies  representation  in  the 
Cortes.  The  Constitution  was  sworn  to  in  Manila  in  1813. 
It  was  afterwards  suspended,  but  came  again  into  force  a few 
years  later,  and  in  1820  the  Cortes  again  admitted  Filipino 
representatives.  In  1837,  however,  these  islands  were  finally 
denied  representation.  The  enemies  of  Spain  gave  the  islands 
much  trouble  during  these  early  years  of  the  century,  and  the 
Moros  and  wild  tribes  of  Mindanao  were  also  in  arms.  In 
1817  schools  for  Filipino  boys  and  girls  were  ordered  to  be 
opened  in  all  the  convents.  In  1820  duties  were  taken  off, 
for  ten  years,  from  natural  and  manufactured  products  of  the 
islands  sent  to  Spain.  In  that  year  a great  cholera  epidemic 
raged  in  Manila.  In  1823  occurred  the  revolt  of  a part  of  the 
King’s  Regiment  in  Manila. 

Questions. — What  were  some  of  the  reasons  why  Spain  fell 
from  her  early  position  as  a great  world  power  ? What  effect 
had  the  government  monopoly  of  tobacco-growing  upon  the 
country  ? How  did  the  freedom  of  America  affect  other  peo- 
ples in  the  world  ? Why  were  the  state  galleons  to  Mexico 
discontinued  ? When  did  the  last  galleon  leave  Manila  ? 
What  was  the  Constitution  of  1812  ? Give  an  account  of  its 
history  in  the  islands.  What  led  up  to  the  revolt  headed  by 
Captain  Novales  in  1823  ? 


Chapter  XIV. 

CHANGES  IN  THE  ISLANDS. 


ON  JUAN  ANTONIO  MARTINEZ  was 
governor-general  of  the  Philippines  from 
1822  to  1825.  During  his  term  of  office  he 
had  much  to  contend  with,  both  from  the 
foes  of  the  people  and  from  the  foes  of  Spain.  It  was 
during  his  rule  that  the  Constitution  of  1812  was  done 
away  with.  The  revolt  headed  by  Captain  Novales 
was  no  sooner  quelled  than  danger  again  threatened 
from  the  pirates  of  Sulu.  These  came  against  Manila, 
and  so  daring  had  they  grown  that  they  even  captured 
and  carried  away  the  Padre-Provincial  of  the  Recoletos 
and  a number  of  other  members  of  that  order  of  friars. 
The  captives  were  taken  to  J0I6,  where  they  were  held 
in  ransom  for  the  sum  of  $10,000.  This  money  was 
raised  in  Manila,  and  the  friars  were  released. 

After  this  outrage,  Martinez  sent  Captain  Alonzo 
Morgado  (a  lon'tho  mor  ga'do),  with  the  sea  forces  of 
the  Philippines,  to  carry  on  warfare  against  the  south- 
ern pirates.  Morgado  succeeded  in  driving  them  back 


CHANGES  IN  THE  ISLANDS.  143 

from  Manila,  and  really  punished  them  very  severely. 
It  was  not,  however,  until  the  year  1862,  when  the 


L 

THE  MAGELLAN  MONUMENT,  MANILA. 

Spanish  brought  steam  gunboats  into  use  against  them, 
that  these  pirates  ceased  to  be  a menace  to  the  people 
of  Luzon  and  the  Visayas. 


144 


THE  STORT  OF  THE  PHILIPPINES. 


Still  the  desire  for  greater  political  freedom  grew 
among  the  young  Filipino  men.  New  teachers  arose 
among  them  from  time  to  time,  and  the  spirit  of  dis- 
content spread  farther  and  farther.  In  the  year  1828 
another  revolt  took  place.  It  was  headed  by  two 
brothers,  Spanish-Americans,  both  officers  in  the  Span- 
ish force  in  the  Philippines. 

This  revolt  was  put  down,  as  all  others  had  been ; 
but  it  now  became  clear  that,  if  peace  was  to  be  kept, 
the  Spanish-American  soldiers  must  go.  Most  of  them 
had  come  from  Mexico,  which  country  was  now  inde- 
pendent of  Spain,  and  they  held  ideas  of  liberty  that 
were  dangerous  to  Spanish  rule  in  the  Philippines. 
A large  body  of  troops  was  now  brought  from  Spain, 
and  Spanish  soldiers  always  after,  while  Spain  ruled, 
made  up  the  foreign  force  in  the  islands. 

In  this  same  year,  1828,  a royal  order  was  issued 
commanding  the  cultivation  and  protection  of  cotton 
in  the  islands.  The  seeds  of  this  plant  had  years  be- 
fore been  brought  over  from  Mexico,  and  the  friars  had 
tried  to  persuade  the  people  to  grow  cotton  ; but  they 
had  not  been  very  successful.  The  people  did  not 
yet  know  how  useful  cotton  could  be  to  them,  or  how 
great  an  industry  cotton-growing  in  the  islands  might 
become.  Now,  however,  the  matter  was  given  careful 
attention.  Machinery  was  brought  over  for  making 
thread  and  cloth  from  the  cotton  fiber,  and  every  effort 
was  made  to  protect  and  encourage  the  new  venture. 

Don  Mariano  Ricafort  (ma  re  a'no  re'ka  fort),  the 
governor-general  at  that  time,  made  a law  forbidding 
foreigners  to  go  into  the  provinces  to  buy  goods  or 
land.  As  early  as  1809  an  English  firm  had  been 


CHANGES  IN  THE  ISLANDS. 


>45 


allowed  to  do  business  in  Manila,  and  a number  of 
foreigners  were  at  this  time  in  the  city.  The  govern- 
ment tried  to  keep  them  as  much  as  possible  within 
the  city,  and  to  prevent  them  from  mingling  with 
the  people  in  the  provinces. 

Ricafort  also  tried  to  make  the  Filipinos  understand 
that  the  Spanish  were  their  friends,  and  that  the  gov- 
ernment made  laws  for  their  help  and  protection.  But 
the  people  had  become  very  distrustful.  Even  the 
Church  seemed  no  longer  able  to  reassure  them,  or  to 
keep  peace  as  it  had  done  in  the  past.  There  were 
small  revolts,  here  and  there  in  the  islands,  which  the 
government  was  forced  to  put  down.  A rebellion  in 
Bohol  was  only  quelled  after  serious  trouble,  and  at 
last  more  troops  were  sent  out  from  Spain. 

It  had  become  necessary  for  Spain  to  yield  to  the 
demands  of  other  countries,  and  open  the  port  of 
Manila  to  foreign  vessels.  These  could  now  enter  the 
harbor,  but  they  were  compelled  to  pay  double  the 
regular  port  duties.  It  was  growing  harder  and  harder, 
in  fact,  for  Spain  to  rule  the  islands  in  the  old  despotic 
fashion. 

Moreover,  in  the  mother  country  itself  a party  had 
risen  that  was  honestly  anxious  to  give  the  archipel- 
ago a good  government.  The  leaders  of  this  party 
listened  gladly  to  the  reports  of  educated  Filipinos, 
and  tried  to  learn  the  true  state  of  affairs.  These 
leaders,  however,  were  almost  powerless  to  bring  about 
reforms,  because  of  dissensions  arising  among  the  Fili- 
pinos themselves. 

Few  of  the  natives  could  read  or  speak  the  Spanish 
language.  This  fact  alone  made  it  hard  to  help  them ; 

IQ 

* 


146  THE  STORT  OF  THE  PHILIPPINES. 


for  still  fewer  Spanish  ever  took  the  trouble  to  learn 
the  native  tongues.  The  people,  therefore,  were  for 
the  most  part  ignorant  even  of  those  laws  which  gave 
them  rights  and  privileges.  There  were  always  those 
in  power  whose  interests  were  best  served  by  this  ig- 
norance, and 
they  took  no 
pains  to  teach 
the  people  what 
the  laws  were. 

The  country 
was  now  sunk  in 
deep  poverty, 
and  the  condition 
of  the  Filipinos 
was  sad  indeed. 
In  1836  the  greed 
and  bad  govern- 
ment of  Queen 
Christina  (kris- 
te'na)  of  Spain 
had  emptied  the 
QUEEN  CHRISTINA.  royal  treasury, 

and  she  greatly 

needed  money.  She  tried  to  have  her  officers  wring 
more  from  the  Philippines  and  her  other  colonies,  but 
this  they  could  not  do.  The  colonies,  richly  as  nature 
had  gifted  them,  were  almost  drained  of  their  wealth. 

The  queen,  therefore,  agreed  vu'th  Louis  Philippe 
(lo'e  fil  ep')  of  France  to  hand  over  Cuba  to  P'rance  for 
the  sum  of  30,000,000  reals.  In  the  agreement  to  this 
effect  there  was  also  a clause  offering  to  sell  Porto 


CHANGES  IN  THE  ISLANDS. 


147 


Rico  and  the  Philippine  Islands  to  France  for  10,000,- 
000  reals  more.  If  this  agreement  had  gone  through, 
it  might  have  made  a great  change  in  the  history  of 
these  islands;  but  it  came  to  naught. 

The  queen  sent  her  minister,  Comparvano  (kom  par- 
va'no),  to  France,  to  confer  with  the  French  king  and 
his  advisers,  and  there  the  Spaniard  learned  for  the 
first  time  of  the  clause  about  the  Philippine  Islands. 
The  French  king  wanted  to  bargain  over  this  clause. 
He  said  that  in  view  of  all  the  trouble  in  the  archi- 
pelago, and  for  various  other  reasons,  the  price  named 
was  too  high.  In  fact,  he  refused  to  pay  more  than 
7,000,000  reals,  and  declared  that  10,000,000  reals  was 
an  outrageous  price.  Rather  than  pay  it  he  would  put 
the  contract  in  the  fire. 

The  Spanish  minister  asked  to  see  the  contract. 
After  looking  at  it,  he  said  quietly,  “ Your  Majesty  is 
right;  it  is  outrageous.”  And  taking  the  king  at  his 
word,  he  laid  the  paper  on  the  fire.  He  meant  that 
the  price  was  outrageously  small — not  large,  as  the 
king  had  declared.  Pie  did  a daring  thing,  but  his 
courage  saved  Spain  from  the  disgrace  of  such  a poor 
bargain  as  the  queen  would  have  made. 

The  following  year  trouble  broke  out  anew  in  the 
Philippines.  For  the  first  time  in  the  history  of  the 
Church  in  the  islands  the  people  demanded  that  the 
Spanish  friars  should  be  replaced  by  native  priests. 
They  were  loyal  to  the  Church;  but  they  were  deter- 
mined to  have  men  of  their  own  blood  to  minister  its 
offices  to  them.  This  trouble  had  been  growing  for 
years,  and  now  that  it  was  given  open  expression  it 
became  serious  indeed. 


148  THE  STORr  OF  THE  PHILIPPINES. 


In  1841  a very  grave  insurrection  broke  out  in  Taya^ 
bas  (te  a'bas).  It  was  headed  by  a native  named  Apoli- 
nario  de  la  Cruz  (a  pol  e nar'e  o da  la  kroth),  who 
styled  himself  ‘‘king  of  the  Tagals.”  He  claimed 
supernatural  powers,  and  by  false  representations  suc- 
ceeded in  raising  a following  of  some  3,000  Filipinos. 
With  these  he  went  to  war  against  the  friars.  He  mur- 


MANILA  BAY  FROM  THE  CITY  WALLS. 

dered  the  alcalde  of  Tayabas  Province,  and  made  the 
people  believe  that  when  they  attacked  the  Spanish, 
the  earth  would  open  and  swallow  up  the  foe. 

The  Spaniards  could  muster  but  about  400  soldiers, 
and  as  many  more  coast  guards  and  irregular  forces. 
They  marched  out  against  Apolinario  and  his  followers, 
however,  and  defeated  them,  although  there  was  great 
loss  of  life  on  both  sides.  In  Manila  at  this  time  was 
a regiment  of  Tagal  soldiers  from  Tayabas.  These 


CHANGES  IN  THE  ISLANDS. 


149 


soldiers  mutinied,  and  would  have  joined  Apolinario, 
but  were  shot  down  by  the  Spanish  troops  before  they 
could  leave  the  garrison. 

Apolinario  himself  was  of  unsound  mind,  and  when 
his  followers  began  to  see  this,  they  fell  away  from  him. 
If  the  revolted  Tagal  regiment  had  succeeded  in  joining 
him,  his  defeat  might  have  been  delayed ; but  in  the 
end  he  must  have  been  overcome.  In  all  such  en- 
counters with  the  Filipinos,  the  Spaniards  had  the 
advantage  of  better  organization.  The  troops  were 
well  drilled  and  trained  to  obey,  and  their  leaders  were 
skilled  in  warfare.  With  no  army  organization  and  no 
outside  aid  the  Filipino  people  were  helpless  to  main- 
tain their  rights.  Nevertheless,  it  is  not  in  the  nature 
of  brave  men  to  submit  tamely  to  injustice  or  oppres- 
sion, and  it  is  no  matter  for  surprise  that  though  each 
new  revolt  was  promptly  put  down,  the  spirit  of  liberty 
constantly  urged  the  people  on  to  new  attempts  to 
gain  some  measure  of  freedom.  From  now  on,  these 
attempts  became  more  frequent  and  more  desperate. 

Su7)i7?iary. — Trouble  continued  to  increase  in  the  islands. 
There  was  great  danger  from  the  southern  pirates,  and  it  had 
become  clear  that  Spanish-American  soldiers  could  no  longer 
be  used  in  the  army.  These  soldiers  sided  with  the  people 
against  the  government.  Large  bodies  of  troops  were  brought 
from  Spain,  and  the  army  was  put  upon  a new  footing.  In 
1828  a royal  order  was  issued,  commanding  the  growing  and 
protection  of  cotton.  Foreigners  were  forbidden  to  go  into 
the  provinces  to  buy  land  or  to  trade  with  the  people.  The 
government  now  tried  to  make  the  people  understand  that 
it  was  their  friend,  but  the  Filipinos  had  grown  very  dis- 
trustful. In  1836  Queen  Christina  offered  to  sell  the  Philip- 


150  THE  STORT  OF  THE  PHILIPPINES. 


pine  Islands  to  France;  but  her  ambassador,  Camparvano, 
whom  she  sent  to  arrange  the  matter,  burned  the  contract 
when  he  learned  its  contents.  In  1837  the  Filipinos  de- 
manded that  native  priests  should  replace  the  Spanish  friars. 
In  1841  an  insurrection  headed  by  Apolinario  de  la  Cruz,  who 
called  himself  “ king  of  theTagals,”  broke  out.  This  was 
put  down  with  great  loss  of  life  on  both  sides. 

Questions. — Why  were  Spanish- American  soldiers  no  longer 
useful  in  the  army  in  the  Philippines  ? Whom  did  the  south- 
ern pirates  capture  and  carry  away  from  Manila  ? In  what  year 
was  the  growing  of  cotton  commanded  ? To  whom  did  Queen 
Christina  offer  to  sell  the  islands  ? Who  was  the  “ king  of 
the  Tagals  ” ? Give  an  account  of  the  revolt  which  he 
headed. 


Chapter  XV. 

EFFORTS  TO  KEEP  PEACE. 


HE  situation  in  the  archipelago  was  now  very 
grave  indeed,  and  the  authorities  in  Manila 
began  to  see  that  something  must  be  done 
to  meet  the  ever-growing  discontent  of  the 
people.  A little  more  liberty  given  at  this  time  might 
have  changed  that  discontent  to  gratitude.  If  the 
people  could  have  believed  that  the  Spaniards  desired 
their  good,  they  might  have  worked  with  the  Euro- 
peans for  the  benefit  of  the  whole  country. 

But  there  was  lack  of  trust  and  understanding  on 
both  sides,  and  because  of  this  still  harsher  laws  were 
made  by  the  Spanish  in  their  efforts  to  put  down  re- 
bellion. One  of  these  laws  provided  for  a rigid  exam- 
ination of  all  books  printed  in  the  native  tongues. 
Such  books  as  did  not  please  the  authorities  were  con- 
demned and  burned.  With  regard  to  all  books  printed 
in  the  Tagal  language,  this  censorship  was  kept  up 
until  the  end  of  Spanish  rule. 

Efforts  were  also  made  to  keep  the  islands  from  closer 


152 


THE  STORT  OF  THE  PHILIPPINES. 


communication  with  the  outside  world.  In  1849  a royal 
order  again  forbade  foreigners  to  go  into  the  provinces. 
In  this  year  the  governor-general,  Narciso  de  Claveria 
(nar  se'so  da  cla  va're  a),  organized  a police  force  for 
Manila  and  the  provinces.  This  force  was  called  “ The 
Order  of  Safety  for  Manila.”  During  Claveria’s  term  of 
office  a very  good  reform  was  made  in  trading  privileges. 
The  alcalde  of  a province  had  before  that  had  the  sole 
right  to  trade  with  the  people  of  his  province.  Under 
the  new  law,  however,  any  Spaniard  or  Filipino  who 
wished  to  do  so  might  trade  freely  in  the  provinces. 

The  people  in  the  islands  still  had  serious  trouble 
with  the  pirates  from  Mindanao  and  the  Sulu  archi- 
pelago. These  pirates  had  regular  fleets,  and  a mili- 
tary force  as  strong  as  that  of  the  Spaniards  themselves, 
and  they  had  become  a source  of  constant  danger  to 
commerce  and  to  the  liberty  of  the  people.  So  gre-at 
damage  did  they  do,  that  for  four  years  the  government 
was  obliged  to  remit  all  tribute  in  the  island  of  Negros, 
one  of  the  richest  of  the  agricultural  islands.  The 
ravages  of  these  pirates  had  made  the  people  so  poor 
that  they  were  scarcely  able  to  procure  the  necessaries 
of  life. 

The  danger  from  this  source  at  last  became  so  great 
that  trade  between  the  islands  was  at  a standstill.  The 
merchants  of  Manila  therefore  took  action  in  self- 
defense,  and  brought  steamboats  over  from  Europe. 
These  were  safe,  as  the  pirates,  in  their  slower-going 
ships,  could  not  overtake  them;  but  the  towns  lying 
along  the  coast  were  still  subject  to  raids.  In  1848 
Governor-General  Claveria  sent  out  an  expedition  to 
the  islands  of  Balanguengui,  a group  in  the  Sulu  archi- 


EFFORTS  TO  KEEP  PEACE. 


>53 


pelago,  where  most  of  the  pirates  had  their  homes. 
This  expedition  destroyed  the  towns  of  the  pirates, 
burned  their  ships,  and  took  many  captives. 

Two  or  three  years  later  Governor-General  Urbiz- 
tondo  (ur  beth  ton'do)  went  with  an  expedition  against 
the  pirates,  and  made  a strong  attack  on  the  city  of 


PIRATE  FLEET  ATTACKING  A COAST  TOWN. 


Jol6.  This  expedition  consisted  of  four  regiments  of 
artillery  and  a native  battalion  drawn  from  among  the 
people  of  Cebu.  This  island  had  suffered  greatly 
from  piratic  raids,  and  it  is  said  that  the  wives  of  these 
Cebuans  declared  that  they  would  not  receive  their 
husbands  back  again  if  they  ran  away  from  the  foe. 
This  threat  may  have  had  some  effect,  for  the  men 
fought  with  great  bravery  and  gave  the  pirates  such  a 


154  THE  STORY  OF  THE  PHILIPPINES. 


severe  punishment  that  there  were  no  further  attacks 
for  several  years. 

Some  years  later,  in  i860,  when  Don  Fernando  de 
Norzagaray  (nor  tha  ga'il)  was  governor-general,  eigh- 
teen steam  gunboats  were  sent  out  from  Spain.  With 
these  the  Spanish  forces  in  the  archipelago  were  able 
completely  to  defeat  the  pirates  and  to  put  an  end  to 
the  outrages  that  had  cost  the  islands  so  much  in 
property  and  in  lives. 

In  1854  there  was  an  uprising  in  Nueva  Ecija  (no  a'va 
a the'ha).  This  uprising  was  headed  by  a Spanish-Mes- 
tizo  named  Cuesta  (ko  es'ta),  a young  man  of  great 
ability  and  promise.  He  had  been  educated  in  Spain, 
and  while  there  had  been  received  at  court,  and  had 
even  been  shown  great  favor  by  Queen  Isabella.  He 
had  been  much  with  members  of  the  Liberal  Party, 
then  gaining  strength  in  Spain,  and  had  caught  the 
new  ideas  of  political  freedom  and  human  rights. 

Cuesta  came  home  with  an  earnest  desire  to  help  his 
people.  He  was  made  commandante  of  carabineros 
in  Nueva  Ecija,  but  before  he  had  been  long  in  com- 
mand he  incited  his  troops  to  rebellion.  They  attacked 
the  Spanish  officials  in  the  province,  and  made  war 
upon  the  friars.  The  revolt  was  put  down,  however, 
and  Cuesta,  with  several  others,  was  executed.  Still 
others,  who  had  been  concerned  in  the  uprising,  were 
banished  from  the  country. 

All  these  things  increased  the  anxiety  of  the  Spanish 
over  the  situation  in  the  Philippines.  Young  Filipino 
men  were  discouraged  from  going  to  Spain ; students 
in  the  seminaries  who  desired  to  leave  these  schools 
and  finish  their  education  in  Spain  were  refused  per- 


EFFORTS  TO  KEEP  PEACE.  155 

mission  to  do  so.  The  country  was  poor  and  was 
overrun  with  bandits.  Natives  guilty  of  minor  offenses 
against  the  law  were  treated  so  severely  that  they  took 
to  the  jungle,  becoming  outlaws.  Everywhere  oppres- 


THE  1‘ARIAN  GATE. 

sion  and  tyranny  ruled,  with  all  the  evils  that  these 
bring  in  their  train. 

The  tobacco  monopoly  was  killing  all  other  agricul- 
tural enterprise,  and  the  Chinese  control  of  the  trades 
and  small  business  industries  was  keeping  the  people 
from  earning  money  at  these.  The  Filipinos  had  for 
some  years  realized  the  evil  of  allowing  the  Chinese 


IS6  THE  STORT  OF  THE  PHILIPPINES. 


thus  to  monopolize  the  trades  and  minor  occupations, 
but  they  were  powerless  at  that  time  to  prevent  such 
monopoly.  They  could  not  conduct  this  business  for 
themselves;  the  Spanish  had  never  been  a trading 
people,  and  the  islanders  had  had  no  chance  to  learn 
business  methods  from  them. 

The  Spanish  government  in  the  islands  had  always 
been  military,  but  in  i860  a civil  government  was 
formed  for  the  province  of  Manila.  Civil  government 
is  government  by  laws  upheld  by  civil,  or  citizen,  offi- 
cials, instead  of  by  military  force.  It  punishes  offend- 
ers through  the  courts,  instead  of  by  armed  power. 

In  this  same  year,  by  command  of  the  governor- 
general,  the  Parian,  the  great  building  where  nearly  all 
the  Chinese  in  Manila  were  quartered,  was  destroyed. 
This  act  of  the  government  was  bitterly  opposed  by 
the  Chinese  and  by  some  others;  but  it  was  carried 
out,  in  spite  of  great  difficulties.  The  only  reminder 
of  the  Parian  now  left  is  the  Parian  Gate,  which  gives 
entrance  to  the  walled  city  near  the  point  where  the 
building  once  stood. 

These  years  were  marked,  as  well,  by  numerous  severe 
earthquakes  and  volcanic  eruptions.  One  or  two  new 
volcanoes  were  formed,  and  there  were  great  disturb- 
ances in  Luzon  and  the  islands  near  by.  In  1863  came 
the  great  earthquake  of  Manila — the  severest  that  the 
country  has  ever  known.  Thousands  of  people  were 
killed  in  the  city  and  the  surrounding  country.  The 
cathedral  was  destroyed,  and  the  city  was  reduced  to 
a mere  mountain  of  ruins.  Only  the  great  wall,  St. 
Augustine  Church,  and  a few  other  structures  with- 
stood the  shock. 


EFFORTS  TO  KEEP  PEACE. 


'57 


After  this,  trouble  deepened  for  the  country.  The 
treasury  was  drained  to  rebuild  the  city;  the  land  was 
pinched  to  the  last  possible  limit  to  raise  tribute  for 
the  Crown  ; and  the  people  were  nearly  desperate.  The 
government  could  not  meet  its  payments,  but  insisted 
upon  the  tobacco  crop  being  cultivated  each  year;  and 
great  quantities  of  tobacco  had  to  be  sold  to  raise 


RUINS  OF  MANILA  CATHEDRAL  AFTER  AN  EARTHQUAKE. 


money  for  the  needs  of  the  moment.  In  1864  light- 
ning set  fire  to  the  general  storehouse  of  tobacco  and 
caused  a loss  of  $2,000,000  to  the  colonial  treasury. 

In  1867  the  “ Guardia  Civil”  was  formed,  for  the 
purpose  of  capturing  the  bandits  who  overran  the  coun- 
try. These  bandits  had  come  to  be  as  great  a source 
of  danger  as  the  pirates  had  been,  and  in  1869  the 
peril  of  the  situation  was  increased  by  a proclamation 


158 


THE  STORT  OF  THE  PHILIPPINES. 


made  by  Governor-General  Torre.  This  proclamation 
offered  free  pardon  to  all  bandits  who  should  present 
themselves  to  the  government  within  three  months. 
This  was  a great  opportunity  for  the  ill-disposed  people 
of  the  provinces.  Hundreds  of  them  became  bandits 


QUEEN  ISABELLA  II.  AS  A CHILD. 


and  entered  upon  a three  months’  term  of  robbery  and 
outrage,  sure  of  pardon  at  any  time  they  might  present 
themselves  before  the  governor.  It  became  necessary 
to  organize  a special  guard,  which  was  called  “ Torre’s 
Guard,”  to  go  against  this  great  mob  of  outlaws. 


EFFORTS  TO  KEEP  PEACE. 


159 


But  in  spite  of  murmurings,  discontent,  and  suffer- 
ing among  the  people,  the  work  of  building  up  the 
city,  and  of  making  improvements  in  and  about  Manila, 
went  steadily  on.  The  palace  was  rebuilt,  work  was 
begun  upon  the  cathedral,  and  many  public  works  were 
undertaken.  In  1865  a municipal  school,  in  charge  of 
the  Sisters  of  Charity,  was  founded,  and  a normal  school 
for  teachers  was  opened  in  Manila  under  the  charge  of 
the  Jesuits,  who  had  returned  to  the  country  in  1859, 
after  an  absence  of  nearly  one  hundred  years.  The 
civil  government,  which  had  recently  been  formed  in 
Manila  Province,  supported  this  school. 

In  1868  Queen  Isabella  II.  of  Spain  was  deposed,  and 
the  government  that  followed  her  was  of  a revolution- 
ary nature,  founded  on  republican  principles.  While 
this  government  prevailed,  an  Assembly  of  Filipinos 
and  Mestizos  was  formed  in  Manila.  Its  members, 
who  were  persons  born  in  the  islands,  hoped  to  bring 
about  certain  reforms  in  the  local  government.  They 
had  the  power  of  voting  reforms  for  the  colony,  sub- 
ject to  the  will  of  the  home  government.  They  out- 
lined many  reforms  which  were  needed  in  the  islands, 
and  tried  to  gain  for  them  the  attention  of  the  home 
government.  But  the  influence  of  the  conservative 
party,  both  at  home  and  in  the  colony,  prevailed.  It 
was  not  long  before  the  monarchy  was  again  in  power, 
and  then  this  Philippine  Assembly  died. 

The  Filipinos  had  had  a taste  of  self-government, 
and  it  was  hard  for  them  to  go  back  into  bondage. 
It  was  not  possible  that  they  should  again  submit 
patiently  to  the  oppression  which  they  had  borne  for 
so  many  years.  The  spark  which  Spain  herself  had 


l6o  THE  STORr  OF  THE  PHILIPPINES. 

kindled  no  power  on  earth  cotdd  extinguish,  and  the 
little  fire  of  liberty  burned  on,  waiting  for  the  moment 
when  it  should  burst  into  a great  flame. 

Summary. — The  situation  in  the  Philippines  was  becoming 
desperate.  There  was  lack  of  trust  between  the  Spanish  and 
the  Filipinos,  and  this  kept  them  from  understanding  or  help- 
ing one  another.  More  and  more  severe  measures  were  taken 
by  the  rulers  to  keep  down  revolt.  By  the  middle  of  the 
century  the  ravages  of  pirates  along  the  coast  had  nearly  killed 
all  trade.  The  merchants  of  Manila  now  brought  steam  trad- 
ing ships  from  Spain,  and  these,  being  swifter  than  the  craft  of 
the  pirates,  escaped  capture  ; but  towns  along  the  coast  were 
still  subject  to  raids.  In  1848  an  expedition  went  against  the 
pirates  and  punished  them  severely.  Other  expeditions  fol- 
lowed up  the  work  of  that  one,  and  at  last,  in  i860,  eighteen 
steam  gunboats  were  sent  from  Spain.  With  the  aid  of  these 
the  Spanish  forces  were  able  to  put  an  end  to  piracy  in  those 
seas. 

In  1854  there  was  a serious  uprising,  headed  by  a young 
Spanish  Mestizo  named  Cuesta.  This  was  put  down,  and  a 
number  of  Filipinos  who  had  taken  part  in  it  were  executed. 
This  uprising  greatly  increased  the  anxiety  of  the  government 
in  the  islands.  In  i860  a civil  government  was  founded  for 
Manila  Province.  In  this  same  year  the  Parian,  the  building 
where  the  Chinese  lived  within  the  walled  city,  was  de- 
stroyed. In  1863  a great  earthquake  in  Manila  killed 
thousands  of  people  and  reduced  the  city  to  ruins.  In 
1867  the  Guardia  Civil  was  formed,  and  efforts  were  made 
to  capture  and  punish  the  bandits  who  overran  the  country. 
Much  work  was  done  during  this  and  succeeding  years 
toward  rebuilding  the  city.  In  1865  a normal  school  for 
teachers  was  opened  in  Manila.  In  1868  Queen  Isabella  II. 
was  deposed,  and  for  a time  the  government  in  Spain  was 


EFFORTS  TO  KEEP  PEACE.  i6l 

revolutionary  in  character.  While  this  government  was  in 
power,  the  more  enlightened  Filipinos  and  Mestizos  in  Manila 
tried  hard  to  bring  about  reforms  at  home ; but  the  new  order 
was  short-lived,  and  the  monarchy  was  soon  restored  to  power 
in  Spain. 

Questions. — -Why  were  the  merchants  of  Manila  forced  to 
bring  steamships  from  Spain  ? Give  an  account  of  the  differ- 
ent expeditions  against  the  pirates.  Who  was  Cuesta  ? What 
was  the  result  of  the  revolt  which  he  headed  ? When  was 
the  Parian  destroyed  ? When  was  the  great  earthquake  of 
Manila  ? For  what  purpose  was  the  Guardia  Civil  formed  ? 
When  was  Queen  Isabella  II.  deposed  ? What  was  the  char- 
acter of  the  government  that  succeeded  her  ? What  effect 
had  this  government  on  the  Filipino  people? 


Chapter  XVI. 

THE  INSURRECTION  AT  CAVITE. 

N 1872  took  place  what  is  now  known  as 
the  Cavite  insurrection.  This  uprising  had 
in  itself  no  real  importance;  it  only  gained 
importance  because  of  the  attention  which 
was  paid  to  it.  The  cause  of  the  revolt  was  the  desire 
of  the  people  for  native  priests.  There  was  a party 
among  the  native  clergy  whose  leaders  were  demand- 
ing that  the  friars  should  be  forbidden  to  act  as  parish 
priests,  and  should  be  made  to  give  up  certain  benefits 
to  which  they  were, not  entitled. 

The  native  party  had  some  right  on  its  side  in  these 
demands.  A treaty  had  been  made  at  Trent,  some 
years  before,  defining  the  positions  and  rights  of  the 
clergy  in  the  islands.  Under  this  treaty  the  friars  were 
not  entitled  to  act  as  parish  priests.  They  asked  this 
privilege  from  the  Pope,  however,  and  it  was  granted 
them.  As  a result  the  Filipino  clergy  could  act  only  in 
inferior  positions,  as  assistants  and  lay  readers.  They  en- 
joyed but  few  of  the  rights  and  dignities  of  their  calling. 


THE  INSURRECTION  AT  CAVITE.  163 

The  leader  of  the  clergy  who  were  demanding  their 
rights  was  a priest  named  Josd  Burgos  (ho  sa'  bur'gos). 
He  was  native  born,  and  a man  of  great  strength  and 
dignity  of  character.  It  is  not  believed  that  he,  or  the 
priests  who  were  among  his  followers,  really  incited 
the  revolt  at  Cavite.  He  had,  however,  many  ene- 
mies, and  these  succeeded  in  making  him  appear  to  be 
guilty. 

But  whatever  the  origin  of  the  uprising,  it  went 
wrong  through  a mistake  about  signals.  A number  of 
the  native  soldiery  were  concerned  in  the  affair,  and 
were  to  have  aided  the  plotters  in  Manila.  It  was 
agreed  that  certain  men  in  Manila  should  get  every- 
thing ready,  and  send  up  a rocket,  by  which  signal 
those  at  Cavite  would  know  that  the  time  had  come 
to  act.  It  happened,  however,  that  one  night  in  the 
latter  part  of  January  a fiesta  was  held  in  one  of  the 
suburbs  of  Manila.  Fireworks  were  set  off,  and  these 
the  soldiers  at  Cavite  mistook  for  the  signal  of  attack. 
They  therefore  seized  the  arsenal  at  Cavite,  and  at- 
tacked the  Europeans  living  in  and  about  the  town. 

When  it  was  too  late  to  undo  their  action,  they  dis- 
covered the  mistake.  Their  friends  at  Manila  had  no 
idea  what  was  taking  place.  They  did  not  come  to 
the  aid  of  the  revolters  at  Cavite,  and  when  they 
learned  the  news,  there  was  no  time  to  gather  their 
forces.  The  loyal  troops  were  called  out,  and  the 
trouble  was  put  down  in  two  days. 

All  might  even  yet  have  gone  well  with  the  country  if 
this  matter  could  have  been  allowed  to  rest  right  there. 
The  government,  however,  saw  fit  to  regard  this  upris- 
ing as  of  grave  importance.  All  who  were  suspected 


164  the  STORr  OF  THE  PHILIPPINES. 


of  a part  in  it  were  severely  punished  ; many  were  shot, 
and  three  of  the  native  priests  were  garrotted.  These 
priests  were  Dr.  Burgos,  Dr.  Mariano  Gomez  (ma  re  a'no 
go'meth),  and  Dr.  Jacinto  Zamora  (ha  sen'to  tha  mo'ra). 
As  to  their  guilt,  there  will  always  be  a doubt,  and  to 
this  day  the  native  clergy  declare  that  these  men  were 
innocent  of  planning  the  revolt. 

These  executions  made  the  people  desperate.  The 
secret  societies  which  had  been  forming  all  over  Luzon 
had  up  to  this  time  been  merely  local  lodges  of  the 
great  society  of  Freemasons.  Now  they  were  turned 
into  political  societies,  with  a definite  aim,  and  that 
aim  was  to  win  greater  liberty  for  the  Filipinos.  These 
societies  afterwards  played  a very  important  part  in 
the  history  of  the  islands. 

Shortly  after  the  uprising  at  Cavite,  another  revolt 
occurred  in  Zamboanga ; but  this  was  put  down  with 
the  help  of  the  Moros.  After  the  Cavite  insurrection, 
the  native  regiment  of  artillery  was  disbanded,  and  a 
regiment  of  artillery  from  the  Peninsula  was  brought 
to  the  islands. 

In  spite  of  all  these  disturbances,  considerable  public 
work  was  done  during  the  next  few  years.  The  ports 
of  Legaspi,  Tacloban,  and  Leyte  were  opened  to  for- 
eign commerce  in  1873-1874,  and  in  1875  the  famous 
Bridge  of  Spain  across  the  Pasig  River,  in  Manila,  was 
built  and  thrown  open  for  public  use.  The  opening  of 
the  Suez  Canal  was  a helpful  thing  to  the  commerce  of 
the  Philippines,  and  under  wise  and  just  government 
there  might  have  been  a time  of  prosperity  for  the 
country. 

In  1877  Don  Domingo  Moriones  y Morillo  (do  min'- 


'rilli  GROUNDS  OF  THE  CAVITE  ARSENAL 


1 66  THE  STORT  OF  THE  PHILIPPINES. 


go  mo  re  6'nas  e mo  rel'yo)  became  governor-general. 
When  he  arrived  in  Manila,  the  King’s  Regiment,  the 
mainstay  of  the  Spanish  forces  in  the  islands,  was  in 
revolt.  This  revolt  had  been  kept  a secret  by  the 
retiring  governor-general,  for  fear  of  the  result  if  the 
natives  should  learn  the  truth.  The  new  governor- 
general  caused  the  regiment  to  be  drawn  up  in  line 
and  numbered.  When  this  had  been  done,  every  tenth 
man  was  told  off  to  be  shot  next  morning.  Moriones 
was  afterwards  persuaded  to  spare  many  of  these  men, 
but  the  ringleaders  were  all  shot;  some  others  were 
put  into  prison  for  long  terms,  and  about  fifty  of  them 
were  sent  back  to  Spain  in  disgrace. 

The  term  of  office  upon  which  he  entered  with  such 
vigor  was  marked  by  a number  of  very  good  acts  on 
the  part  of  the  governor-general.  His  name  should 
be  remembered  with  gratitude  in  Manila,  for  it  was  he 
who  caused  the  public  waterworks  to  be  built.  Over 
a hundred  years  before,  a patriotic  governor-general, 
Don  Fernando  Carriedo  (fer  nan'do  ca  re  a'do),  had 
left  a fund  to  provide  the  city  with  a suitable  water 
supply.  This  money  was  to  be  kept  at  interest  until 
the  fund  grew  large  enough  for  the  purpose,  and  it  had 
increased  so  much  that  work  should  have  been  begun 
a good  many  years  before.  But  those  having  the 
money  in  charge  were  not  willing  to  give  it  up,  and  it 
was  only  after  a bitter  struggle  that  Governor-General 
Moriones  was  able  to  get  Carriedo’s  wishes  carried  out. 
This  enterprise  was  a great  blessing  to  the  city  of 
Manila,  as  the  value  of  a pure  water  supply  cannot 
be  over-estimated. 

Moriones  also  did  what  he  could  to  get  appropria- 


THE  INSURRECTION  AT  CAFITE.  167 

tions  from  the  treasury  to  payoff  the  tobacco  growers, 
whose  condition  was  at  this  time  pitiful  indeed.  They 
had  not  been  paid  for  some  years,  while  at  the  same 
time  they  were  not  allowed  to  grow  any  other  crop 
by  which  they  might  maintain  themselves.  In  1881 
this  tobacco  monopoly,  which  had  worked  such  wrong 


PUMPING  STATION,  CARRIEDO  WATERWORKS. 

to  the  people,  was  ended  by  royal  decree  of  King 
Alfonso  XII. 

In  1880  there  was  a violent  earthquake  in  Manila. 
The  disturbances  lasted  from  the  14th  of  July  to  the 
25th  of  the  same  month,  and  did  a great  deal  of  dam- 
age in  the  city,  causing  loss  of  property  and  life. 
The  people  were  reduced  to  such  a state  of  terror  that 
they  dared  not  live  in  the  better  class  of  houses  in 
Manila,  but  took  to  the  nipa  huts  in  the  suburbs. 


THE  STORY  OF  THE  PHILIPPINES. 


These  houses  were  less  dangerous  because  of  their 
light  structure. 

This  same  year  cable  communication  was  set  up 
between  Spain  and  Manila. 

In  1 88 1 Governor-General  Primo  de  Rivera  (pre'mo 
da  re  va'ra)  came  to  office.  One  of  the  first  things  he 
did  was  to  organize  an  expedition  against  the  Igorrotes 
of  northern  Luzon  ; but,  like  all  other  attempts  to  sub- 
due these  people,  this  expedition  was  a failure.  The 
Spanish  soldiers  who  took  part  in  it  left  behind  them 
among  the  Igorrotes  such  a record  for  cruelty  and  vio- 
lence that  to  this  day  most  of  these  people  hate  the 
sight  of  a white  man. 

There  was  trouble  enough  for  the  people  during 
Rivera’s  rule.  In  1882  a cholera  epidemic  broke  out 
in  Manila,  and  in  less  than  three  months  30,000  people 
died  in  the  city  and  its  suburbs  and  throughout  the 
province.  There  were  also  several  typhoons  of  unusual 
violence,  and  a terrifying  eruption  of  Mayon  volcano, 
which  lasted  for  many  months. 

In  1883  Joaquin  Jovellar  y Soler  (ho  a ken'  ho  val'- 
har  e so'ler),  who  had  won  a name  for  himself  as  the 
“peacemaker”  in  Cuba,  became  governor-general  of 
the  Philippines.  He  was  well  received  by  the  Spanish, 
and  made  some  attempt  to  bring  about  reforms  in  the 
country.  The  old-time  tribute,  the  cause  of  so  many 
revolts  among  the  people,  was  replaced  by  the  “cedula 
personal,”  or  paper  of  identity,  which  every  inhabit- 
ant above  eighteen  years  of  age  was  compelled  to 
have.  During  his  time,  there  were  small  outbreaks 
among  the  people,  and  threats  of  a general  insurrec- 
tion, which  led  to  more  troops  being  sent  out  from 


THE  INSURRECTION  AT  CAVITE. 


169 


the  Peninsula.  It  became  necessary  now  to  have 
Spanish  troops  almost  altogether,  as  the  native  sol- 
diers could  not  be  depended  upon  to  fire  on  their 
own  people. 

By  now  there  was  coming  to  the  front  in  the  islands 
a considerable  body  of  thoughtful  young  men.  These 
were  beginning  to  demand  greater  liberty  for  the  Fili- 
pinos. In  the  Visayas,  Graciano  Lopez  Jaena  (gra  se- 
a'no  lo'peth  ha  a na)  had  become  a teacher  of  the  peo- 
ple. This  man  has  been  called  the  “ John  the  Baptist 
of  the  Visayas.” 

The  people  in  that  part  of  the  country  were  in  a 
position  even  more  hopeless  than  were  those  in  Luzon. 
They  knew  little  or  nothing  of  what  was  going  on  in 
the  northern  islands.  They  had  no  leaders  of  their 
own,  but  were  dominated  by  different  parties  among 
their  rulers.  These  parties  were  constantly  quarreling 
among  themselves  and  with  the  government  at  home. 
Between  these  factions  the  people  lay  like  corn  between 
the  millstones,  crushed  almost  beyond  hope  of  ever 
attaining  the  smallest  human  rights. 

Jaena  was  born  in  Jaro,  near  Iloilo,  and  was  a stu- 
dent in  the  seminario  there.  Like  many  young  men 
of  his  time,  he  had  the  desire  to  go  to  Spain  and  finish 
his  studies.  The  friars  had  taken  alarm  at  the  number 
of  young  Filipino  men  who  were  doing  this,  and  they 
refused  Jaena  permission  to  leave  his  studies  at  the 
seminario.  They  claimed  that,  as  he  was  one  of  their 
students,  they  had  a right  to  dictate  how  he  should  dis- 
pose of  his  life,  and  where  he  should  pursue  his  studies. 
An  action  so  arbitrary  and  unjust  as  this  was  not  to 
be  borne  by  a young  man  of  any  spirit.  Jaena  left  the 


170 


THE  STORY  OF  THE  PHILIPPINES. 


seminario  without  the  permission  of  his  teachers,  went 
to  Manila,  and  from  there  to  Spain. 

In  Madrid  he  made  the  acquaintance  of  a number  of 
members  of  the  Liberal  Party,  who  listened  willingly 
to  what  the  young  man  had  to  say,  and  made  great 
efforts  to  get  him  an  audience  with  the  Ministers  of 
State.  For  a time  he  was  well  received  in  Spain,  but 
the  Liberal  Party  fell  into  discredit  at  court,  and  Jaena 
was  unable  to  gain  a hearing  for  any  of  the  reforms 
that  were  so  dear  to  his  heart.  He  lived  in  great  pov- 
erty in  Madrid,  forced  to  do  menial  work  to  maintain 
himself.  He  was  never  able  to  get  back  to  his  own 
country,  for  which  he  suffered  so  much,  but  died  in 
Madrid  while  still  a comparatively  young  man.  He 
left  a great  many  writings  which  are  well  known 
throughout  the  Visayas.  His  name  is  as  much  hon- 
ored in  that  part  of  the  country  as  is  the  name  of 
Rizal  everywhere  in  the  Philippines. 

Dr.  Josd  Rizal  y Mercado  (re  thal'  e mer  ka'do) 
will  never  be  forgotten  while  there  are  patriotic  Fili- 
pinos left  to  keep  his  memory  alive.  He  was  a native 
of  Calamba  (ka  lam'ba),  in  Laguna  Province,  and  was 
born  in  the  early  sixties.  He  v^as  graduated  from  the 
Jesuit  College  in  Manila,  and  from  there  he  went  to 
Europe,  where  he  studied  medicine.  He  was  gradu- 
ated from  Madrid  University  as  Doctor  of  Medicine 
and  Philosophy. 

Afterwards  he  went  to  Paris  and  to  several  German 
universities,  from  one  of  which  he  took  another  degree. 
In  Germany  he  became  greatly  interested  in  the  social- 
istic movement  of  the  day.  He  mingled  freely  with 
the  German  students,  among  whom  he  was  very  pop- 


THE  INSURRECTION  AT  CAFTTE. 


171 


ular,  and  shared  in  their  ideas  of  human  rights  and 
political  liberty.  He  was  a true  Catholic,  but  he 
longed  to  see  his  country  freed  from  the  narrow  rule 
which  had  made  civil  government  in  the  Philippines  a 
farce. 

The  influence  of  the  Orders  in  the  islands  had  become 
known  even  in  Spain  as  a hurtful  thing  for  the  coun- 


THE  BRIDGE  OF  SPAIN. 


try.  As  far  back  as  the  year  1870  the  Spanish  Min- 
ister of  State,  in  a formal  report,  had  recommended 
that  the  friars  be  removed  from  charge  of  the  schools 
in  the  islands.  Now  the  demand  was  becoming  general 
that  their  places  should  be  taken  by  secular  priests 
who  were  natives  of  the  country. 

Rizal  believed  that  it  would  be  necessary  to  send  the 
Orders  out  of  the  Philippines  before  the  country  could 


172 


THE  STORT  OF  THE  PHILIPPINES. 


ever  be  prosperous.  While  abroad  he  wrote  a novel 
entitled  “ Nolle  me  Tangere,  ” in  which  he  showed 
plainly  the  attitude  of  the  friars  and  the  people  toward 
one  another.  This  novel  was  written  in  the  Spanish 
language,  but  was  published  in  Germany.  While  Rizal 
was  living  as  a student  in  France,  he  wrote  another 
political  novel,  “ El  Filibustero.  ” 

Later  he  returned  to  the  islands,  and  there  did 
notable  work  in  his  profession  of  medicine.  He  be- 
came actively  interested  in  the  condition  of  the  coun- 
try, as  well.  In  his  own  town  he  led  a party  which 
demanded  of  the  Dominican  Order  that  it  show  title 
deeds  to  a large  tract  of  agricultural  land  of  which 
it  had  possession.  This  brought  down  upon  him  the 
opposition  of  the  friars,  and  he  found  it  wise  to  return 
to  Europe.  In  his  absence  his  relatives  and  many  of 
the  chief  families  with  whom  he  had  been  friendly  in 
his  town  were  persecuted,  and  driven  from  the  lands 
which  they  had  rented  from  the  religious  Orders. 
Their  holdings  were  given  to  Spaniards,  and  they 
received  no  compensation  for  their  losses. 

In  1893  Rizal  went  to  Hong-Kong,  meaning  to  settle 
there  and  practise  his  profession.  A little  later  he  was 
given  to  understand  that  it  would  be  safe  for  him  to 
come  back  to  Manila,  and  he  came.  When  he  reached 
the  customs  house  at  Manila,  his  baggage  was  rigidly 
searched,  and  it  was  claimed  that  among  his  effects 
were  found  a number  of  disloyal  pamphlets.  Among 
these  were  some  proclamations  which  it  was  claimed 
he  had  written  for  the  purpose  of  starting  a revolt 
among  the  natives. 

It  is  not  common  sense  to  believe  that  Rizal  had 


THE  INSURRECTION  AT  CANITE. 


173 


any  of  these  things  in  his  trunk,  and  it  is  now  gener- 
ally understood  that  they  were  placed  there  by  those 
who  did  the  searching.  His  enemies  demanded  that 
he  should  be  executed  as  a traitor,  but  the  governor- 
general  would  not  give  him  up  to  them.  Instead  he 
was  banished  to  northern  Mindanao,  where  for  four 
years  he  lived  very  quietly.  He  practised  medicine 
there  among  the  people,  and  many  foreigners  came 
from  over  the  sea  to  consult  him.  He  performed  sev- 
eral remarkable  operations  upon  the  eyes  during  these 

% 

years. 

Then  the  Cuban  troubles  broke  out,  and,  to  prove 
his  loyalty  to  Spain,  Dr.  Rizal  asked  permission  to  go 
to  Cuba  as  an  army  doctor  in  the  Spanish  forces.  This 
favor  was  granted  him  July  28,  1896.  He  went  up  to 
Manila  by  way  of  Cebu,  just  at  the  time  of  the  out- 
break of  1896.  He  was  the  idol  of  the  people;  every- 
where his  countrymen  were  talking  about  him,  and  look- 
ing to  him  as  a leader;  his  name  brought  them  hope 
and  strengthened  their  courage.  By  them  he  was 
regarded  as  the  future  liberator  of  the  race,  and  to 
them  he  represented  the  promise  of  liberty. 

All  this  so  alarmed  his  enemies  that  they  declared  it 
dangerous  to  have  him  in  Manila.  He  was  at  once 
put  on  board  the  Spanish  cruiser  Castilla,  and  from 
there  transferred  to  the  mail  steamer  Isla  de  Panay, 
bound  for  Barcelona.  He  carried  letters  of  recom- 
mendation to  the  Ministers  of  War  and  of  the  Colonies, 
which  were  sent  to  him  by  General  Blanco  with  a per- 
sonal letter. 

His  enemies  were  determined  to  have  his  life,  and  he 
was  cabled  at  Barcelona  to  return  at  once  to  the  islands. 


174  ‘J'HE  story  of  the  PHILIPPINES. 

Certain  accusations  were  made  against  him,  and  he  was 
thrown  into  prison  at  the  Fortress  of  Montjierat  (mont- 
he  a'rat)  in  Spain,  until  a steamer  should  return  to  the 
islands.  Then  he  was  sent  back  to  Manila,  a state 
prisoner,  isolated  from  all  but  his  jailers. 

He  was  brought  to  trial  for  sedition  and  rebellion 
before  a court-martial  of  eight  captains,  with  a lieu- 
tenant-colonel presiding  ; but  there  was  no  testimony 
against  him.  How  could  there  be  ? The  facts  show 
that  it  was  quite  impossible  for  Rizal  to  have  had  any- 
thing to  do  with  the  revolution  of  1896.  He  had 
been  a prisoner  of  state,  in  seclusion,  for  years.  He 
had  had  no  communication  with  the  people  of  Luzon, 
and  there  was  nothing  to  show  that  he  had  taken  any 
part  in  the  revolt.  But  he  had  been  condemned  before- 
hand, and  of  all  the  cruel  acts  of  Governor-General 
Polavieja  (po  la  ve  a'ha),  the  cruelest  was  his  decree 
for  the  execution  of  this  man.  ■ 

There  were  but  a few  days  between  Rizal’s  sentence 
and  his  death.  He  was  engaged  to  marry  Miss  Jose- 
phine Taufer,  the  adopted  daughter  of  an  American 
gentleman  who  had  been  a patient  of  Rizal’s  in  Hong- 
Kong,  and  to  her  he  was  married  on  the  day  of  his  ex- 
ecution. He  was  shot  at  six  o’clock  in  the  morning 
of  December  30,  1896,  and  an  immense  crowd  gathered 
on  the  Luneta  to  witness  that  terrible  sacrifice. 

His  widow  joined  the  insurgents.  She  was  present 
at  the  battle  of  Silang  (se  lang'),  and  fled  with  the  rest 
before  the  Spanish,  tramping  through  twenty-three 
villages  on  her  way  to  the  northern  provinces.  She 
was  at  last  banished  from  the  country  by  Governor- 
General  Polavieja.  During  the  American  occupation 


THE  INSURRECTION  AT  CAVITE. 


175 


she  returned  for  a time  to  the  islands  whose  welfare 
was  so  dear  to  her  martyred  husband.  Later  she  went 
to  Hong-Kong,  where  she  died,  in  March,  1902. 

The  name  of  Josd  Rizal  is  now  hailed  with  honor. 
The  government  has  made  the  anniversary  of  his  birth 
a public  holiday,  and  it  is  observed  yearly  in  the  public 
schools  of  the  archipelago.  Thus  is  his  memory  kept 
alive.  His  unselfish  love  for  his  native  country  should 
be  remembered  and  shared  by  the  Filipino  boys  and 
girls  now  growing  up  to  work  for  the  good  of  the  land 
for  which  he  hoped  and  dared  so  much. 

Summary. — The  Cavite  insurrection,  which  took  place  in 
1872,  while  not  in  itself  of  great  importance,  was  the  real 
beginning  of  the  rebellion  of  1896.  It  failed  through  a mis- 
take in  regard  to  signals.  The  Spanish  authorities  overrated 
the  importance  of  this  uprising,  and  those  whom  they  accused 
of  being  concerned  in  it  were  punished  with  great  severity. 
This  course  drove  the  people  to  desperation.  Other  uprisings 
took  place,  and  there  was  great  disturbance  in  the  country. 
Many  good  public  works  went  on,  however.  The  Carriedo 
waterworks  were  built  and  put  in  operation,  and  an  effort 
was  made  to  raise  money  to  pay  off  the  tobacco  growers.  In 
1881  the  tobacco  monopoly  was  done  away  with  by  royal 
decree  of  Alfonso  XII. 

In  1882  came  the  great  cholera  epidemic  in  Manila.  Dur- 
ing the  time  it  raged,  30,000  people  died  in  the  city  and 
province.  During  these  years,  teachers  of  the  people  began 
to  rise  in  the  Visayas,  as  well  as  in  Luzon.  Jaena,  the 
Visayan  patriot,  was  in  Spain,  trying  to  obtain  justice  for  his 
people.  Later,  Dr.  Jos6  Rizal  began  writing  of  the  wrongs 
of  his  country.  He  came  back  to  Manila,  after  an  absence 
of  some  years,  but  was  banished  to  Mindanao.  When  the 


176  THE  STORT  OF  THE  PHILIPPINES. 


trouble  in  Cuba  began,  he  volunteered  to  go  there  as  a surgeon 
in  the  Spanish  army.  He  sailed  from  Manila  to  Barcelona, 
expecting  to  go  from  there  to  Cuba.  At  Barcelona,  on  the 
strength  of  despatches  from  Manila,  he  was  thrown  into  prison, 
and  later  was  sent  back  to  Manila.  His  enemies  there 
secured  his  trial  on  a false  charge  of  sedition,  and  he  was 
sentenced  to  death  and  executed. 

Questions. — What  was  the  main  cause  of  the  Cavite  insur- 
rection of  1872  ? Who  was  Don  Fernando  Carriedo  ? When 
were  the  Manila  waterworks  completed  ? When  was  the 
tobacco  monopoly  ended  ? Who  was  Jaena  ? Give  an  ac- 
count of  Dr.  Rizal  and  his  work. 


Chapter  XVII. 


THE  UPRISING  OF  1896. 

HEN  the  Jesuits  left  Manila  in  1768,  the  mis- 
sions which  they  had  founded  were  given 
to  the  Recoletos.  In  1859  the  Jesuits  came 
back  to  the  islands.  These  missions,  for 
which  the  Society  had  worked  so  hard  in  years  gone 
by,  were  returned  to  it,  and  other  places  were  made  for 
the  Recoletos.  This  was  done  at  the  expense  of  the 
native  priests,  and  the  people  resented  it.  The  feeling 
was  growing  among  them  that  the  native  clergy  were 
not  fairly  treated,  and  the  installing  of  friars  in  their 
places  increased  that  feeling. 

It  would  be  unjust  to  the  Spanish  Orders  to  over- 
look the  good  they  did  in  early  years  in  this  country. 
They  helped  the  people  in  many  ways.  To  them 
is  due  the  credit  of  introducing  chocolate,  coffee, 
cotton,  and  tobacco  into  the  islands.  They  taught  the 
people  to  weave,  and  to  make  many  things  of  use. 
But  too  great  power  fell  into  their  hands,  and  they 
did  not  keep  pace  with  the  times.  Besides  this,  the 


FORT  GENERAL  WEYLER  IN  MINDANAO. 


THE  UPRISING  OF  1896.  xjc) 

people  had  now  come  to  believe  that  their  spiritual 
leaders  should  be  men  of  their  own  race. 

Moreover,  a feeling  of  national  life,  such  as  they  had 
never  before  known,  was  awakening  among  the  Fili- 
pinos. The  many  languages  spoken  among  them,  and 
the  tribal  differences  which  existed  in  the  country, 
did  more  than  anything  else  to  keep  the  Filipino 
people  in  subjection.  Not  until  they  are  a united 
people,  with  one  language,  and  with  a common  desire 
for  the  welfare  of  their  country,  can  they  take  the 
place  which  they  should  hold  among  the  peoples  of 
the  world.  This  the  more  enlightened  among  them 
were  coming  to  see,  and  were  making  a steady  effort 
to  unite  the  tribes  in  a demand  for  reform. 

In  this  effort  the  secret  societies,  of  which  mention 
has  been  made,  played  a large  part.  These  societies 
were  in  the  beginning  Masonic  lodges.  The  first  of 
them  in  the  Philippines  was  founded  at  Cavite  in  i860. 
Only  Spaniards  were  members  at  the  outset,  but  in 
time  Filipinos  and  Mestizos  were  admitted.  Later  the 
members  began  to  take  an  interest  in  politics,  and  little 
by  little  the  Masonic  lodges  came  to  be  the  gathering 
places  of  thinkers  and  reformers.  None  of  these  socie- 
ties had  as  yet  any  idea  of  revolt  against  the  mother 
country  ; but  the  people  were  bent  upon  securing 
reforms  in  the  government  of  the  islands. 

It  was  impossible  to  get  justice  in  any  court  in  the 
archipelago.  Every  public  officer  knew  that  good  serv- 
ice and  an  honorable  record  would  not  serve  to  keep 
him  in  office  if  anyone  who  had  more  influence  than 
he  wished  his  position.  Corruption,  bribery,  and  dis- 
honesty were  the  order  in  the  government.  All  classes 


i8o  THE  STORY  OF  THE  PHILIPPINES. 

were  taxed  to  the  utmost  limit,  and  the  country  was 
in  a state  of  wretchedness  through  misrule.  The  Fili- 
pinos themselves  had  no  rights  which  anyone  seemed 
bound  to  respect. 

The  people  remembered  with  bitterness  those  noble 
words  of  the  Cortes  which  declared,  in  the  Constitu- 
tion of  1812 : “The  countries  and  provinces  of 
America  and  Asia  are  and  ought  always  to  have  been 
an  integral  part  of  the  Spanish  monarchy.  Their 
natives  and  free  inhabitants  are  equal  in  rights  and 
privileges  to  those  of  the  Peninsula.”  What  the  re- 
formers sought  was  not  separation  from  the  mother 
country.  They  desired  only  that  Filipinos  should 
be  recognized  as  among  her  citizens,  and  entitled  to 
the  rights  which  this  declaration  of  the  Cortes  said 
were  theirs. 

After  the  revolt  at  Cavite,  a new  secret  society  was 
formed,  known  as  the  Katipunan  (ka  te  po'nan)  or 
Association  of  the  Sons  of  the  Country.  One  of  the 
passwords  of  this  society  was  “ Gom-bur-za.  ” This 
word  is  made  up  of  a part  of  the  name  of  each  one  of 
the  native  padres  executed  because  of  that  trouble  at 
Cavite — Gomez,  Burgos,  and  Zamora.  The  Katipunan 
was  composed  of  the  common  people.  It  numbered 
many  thousands  of  members,  who  stood  ready  to  give 
their  lives  for  the  good  of  the  Philippines,  and  it  was 
probably  more  responsible  than  any  other  one  thing 
for  the  great  uprising  of  1896. 

In  1895  trouble  broke  out  among  the  Moros  in  the 
south,  and  in  that  year  the  Spanish  began  what  is 
known  as  the  Marauit  (mar  a wet')  campaign  in  Min- 
danao. This  was  an  expedition  against  the  Moros,  under 


THE  UPRISING  OF  i8g6. 


the  command  of  Governor-General  Blanco  himself.  This 
campaign  proved  a great  surprise  to  the  Moros,  who 
were  finally  overpowered  by  a division  of  the  Spanish 
troops  commanded  by  Brigadier-General  Gonzales  Par- 
rado  (pa  ra'do).  The  campaign  lasted  for  three  months, 
and  was  a complete  success. 

After  this,  in  order  that  the  government  might 
keep  order  there,  it  was  decided  to  settle  the  country  in 
the  Marauit  district  with  families  from  Luzon  and 
the  other  northern  islands.  This  decision  hastened  the 
downfall  of  the  Spanish  in  the  Philippines.  At  first 
the  Filipino  people  were  invited  to  go  and  live  in  this 
conquered  territory,  but  no  one  accepted  the  invita- 
tion. It  sounded  smooth  and  fair;  but  it  meant  leav- 
ing friends  and  home  and  security  for  peril,  hardship, 
and  doubtful  adventure.  So,  as  the  unwillingness  of 
the  people  was  seen,  the  invitation  was  made  more 
urgent,  and  took  the  form  of  an  order.  This  order, 
however,  was  only  sent  to  provinces  where  the  secret 
societies  were  supposed  to  be  strongest.  It  caused 
great  dissatisfaction  among  the  Filipinos,  who  quickly 
understood  its  meaning.  Many  left  their  homes  and 
went  to  live  in  the  mountains  to  avoid  trouble. 

The  government  now  made  still  greater  effort,  and 
in  1895  and  1896  there  was  a systematic  persecution  of 
the  people  to  get  them  to  go  south.  This  persecution 
proved  too  much  for  even  Filipino  patience,  and  in 
the  spring  of  1896  the  Katipunan  sent  a petition  to 
Japan,  asking  the  Mikado  to  annex  the  Philippine 
Islands  to  Japan.  It  is  said  that  5,000  Filipinos 
signed  this  petition.  The  emperor  of  Japan  sent  the 
petition  to  Spain,  and  in  this  way  the  names  of  all 


1 82  THE  STORT  OF  THE  PHILIPPINES. 

these  petitioners  became  known  to  the  government. 
The  powers  at  Manila,  however,  did  not  dare  to  act 
at  once,  but  waited  their  time ; and  the  punishment, 
when  it  came,  was  all  the  more  severe  for  the  delay. 

At  this  time  all  the  Spaniards  in  Manila  knew  that 
some  great  uprising  was  planned  among  the  people. 


THE  BRIDGE  OF  SAN  JUAN  DEL  MONTE. 

The  government,  however,  realized  the  mistake  that 
had  been  made  in  paying  too  much  attention  to  the 
revolt  at  Cavite,  and  it  now  made  the  greater  mistake 
of  not  paying  enough  attention  to  this  trouble. 

On  July  5,  1896,  an  officer  of  the  Guardia  Civil 
reported  that  over  14,000  men  in  the  valley  of  Pasig 
were  pledged  to  revolt.  Still  nothing  was  done  about 
this  by  the  Spanish  until  a month  later,  when  a large 


THE  UPRISING  OF  i8g6. 


183 


number  of  revolutionary  flags  and  ammunition  were 
found  at  Taal.  Governor-General  Blanco  then  ordered 
some  arrests  to  be  made. 

By  this  time  the  Katipunan  had  its  plans  nearly 
completed.  There  was  to  have  been  an  uprising  on 
the  20th  of  August ; but,  on  the  night  before,  the  plot 
was  discovered  by  Father  Mariano  Gil  (ma  re  a'no 
zhel),  an  Augustine  friar,  the  parish  priest  at  Tondo. 
The  authorities  then  realized  for  the  first  time  that 
the  Katipunan  was  a political  society,  and  Governor- 
General  Blanco  cabled  the  fact  to  Madrid. 

The  garrison  at  Manila  numbered  only  1,500  men, 
many  of  whom  were  natives  and  not  to  be  depended 
upon  for  help ; so  that  General  Blanco  did  not  dare 
to  take  the  field  against  the  rebels.  Nevertheless, 
arrests  were  made  daily,  and  the  prisons  were  full 
to  overflowing.  Among  the  prisoners  were  some  of 
the  leading  Filipinos  of  Luzon,  many  of  whom  were 
merely  suspected  of  disloyalty  to  the  government. 

Much  time  was  lost  by  the  Spanish  because  General 
Blanco  was  unwilling  to  use  force  until  every  honorable 
means  of  bringing  about  peace  had  been  exhausted. 
He  felt,  moreover,  that  his  army  was  too  srnall  to 
justify  an  advance  against  the  rebels,  and  so  he  cabled 
to  Madrid  for  help.  In  return  he  got  word  that  2,000 
men,  two  gunboats,  and  large  stores  of  arms  and  am- 
munition were  to  be  sent  at  once. 

By  August  30  the  uprising  was  in  full  force.  The 
rebels  were  gathered  at  San  Juan  del  Monte,  a suburb 
of  Manila,  where  the  first  battle  was  fought.  This 
took  place  between  the  Filipinos  under  command  of 
Sancho  Valenzuela  (san'ko  val  an  thu  a'la)  and  three 


i84  the  STORT  of  THE  PHILIPPINES. 


others,  and  some  native  cavalry  and  members  of  the 
Guardia  Civil.  The  Filipinos  were  driven  back,  and 
on  that  day  martial  law  was  proclaimed  in  Manila 
and  in  the  provinces  about  the  bay.  Later  the  rebel 
leaders  at  San  Juan  were  shot  on  the  Luneta.  This 
was  the  first  of  many  executions  which  took  place 
from  week  to  week  afterwards,  until  the  green  lawn 
of  the  Luneta  was  saturated  with  patriot  blood. 

Now  there  was  war  in  earnest  between  the  Spanish 
and  the  Filipinos.  The  rebellion  was  growing  daily, 
and  the  cream  of  Manila  society  was  in  the  jails.  Gov- 
ernor-General Blanco  was  still  inclined  to  look  upon, 
the  uprising  as  merely  local,  and  not  to  regard  it  seri- 
ously; but  he  was  constantly  urged  to  severe  measures 
by  certain  of  his  advisers.  They  desired  that  all  rebels 
caught  should  be  put  to  death  at  once,  and  there 
seemed  no  length  to  which  their  vindictive  spirit  was  not 
willing  to  go.  The  newspapers  of  Manila  were  forbid- 
den to  speak  of  the  uprising,  or  to  use  the  words  “ re- 
bellion ” or  “ rebel.”  The  matter  was  treated  as  of 
slight  importance,  and  the  natives  engaged  in  the  in- 
surrection were  spoken  of  as  bandits.  This  was  also 
the  tone  which  Governor-General  Blanco  adopted  in  all 
the  despatches  which  he  sent  to  the  home  government. 

Province  after  province  declared  with  the  rebels,  until 
all  southern  Luzon  was  in  revolt.  Cavite  Province 
had  become  the  center  of  the  uprising,  and  Emilio 
Aguinaldo  (a  mel'e  o ag  we  nal'do),  formerly  a school- 
master at  Cavite,  came  to  the  front  as  a leader.  He 
was  a native  of  the  city  of  Cavite,  born  March  22, 
1869,  and  at  this  time  was  about  twenty-seven  years 
old. 


THE  UPRISING  OF  i8g6. 


7 


DUNGEON  AT  CAVITE. 


By  the  middle  of  September,  troops  to  the  number 
of  6,000  had  been  sent  up  from  Zamboanga  and  south- 
ern stations  to  aid  the  government  at  Manila.  Nearly 
two-thirds  of  these  were  natives,  however,  and  the 
Spaniards  felt  that  they  had  good  reason  to  distrust 


l86  THE  STORT  OF  THE  PHILIPPINES. 


their  loyalty.  The  rebels  were  in  great  force  about 
Silang,  Imus  (e'‘ mus),  and  Novaleta  (no  va  la'ta),  and 
there  were  uprisings  in  Tarlac  (tar'lak),  Pangasinan, 
Laguna,  Morong,  and  Tayabas. 

On  October  i a steamer  arrived  from  Spain  with  a 
battalion  of  marines,  which  was  warmly  welcomed  by 
the  Spaniards.  The  next  day  came  another  steamer 
with  more  troops,  and  after  that  a large  number  of 
men  came,  until,  before  the  trouble  was  over,  there 
were  28,000  Spanish  soldiers  in  the  islands.  These, 
however,  were  raw  drafts.  The  trouble  in  Cuba  had 
taken  all  of  Spain’s  fighting  men,  and  she  had  nothing 
to  send  to  the  Philippines  but  boys.  These  young 
soldiers  were  undrilled,  without  uniforms,  and  but 
poorly  armed. 

The  Filipinos  were  no  better  off  than  the  Spanish 
troops.  They  were  hardier,  but  they  were  even  more 
poorly  armed.  They  had  some  rifles,  but  most  of  their 
guns  were  made  of  gas  or  water  pipe  wrapped  with 
telegraph  wire.  They  had  cannon  made  from  boiler 
tubes  and  from  old  bells  and  other  metal.  But  they 
were  determined  and  courageous,  and  were  fighting  for 
what  was  dearer  to  them  than  life — the  decent  treat- 
ment to  which  every  free  man  is  entitled  at  the  hands 
of  his  government. 

The  Spanish  treated  all  Filipinos  captured  with  great 
cruelty.  From  time  to  time  suspects  were  sent  in  from 
the  provinces,  bound  hand  and  foot  ; they  were  hauled 
up  from  the  holds  of  vessels  with  chain  and  hook,  and 
discharged  as  cargo,  like  bales  of  hemp. 

The  rainy  season  set  in,  and  General  Blanco  had 
not  the  force  at  his  command  which  his  successor 


THE  UPRISING  OF  i8p6. 


187 


had  afterwards.  The  native  troops  were  not  to  be 
depended  upon,  and  it  was  almost  impossible  for  the 
few  Spanish  soldiers  to  get  about  the  country.  He 
contented  himself,  therefore,  with  keeping  the  rebels 
out  of  Manila. 

In  December,  1896,  the  governor-general  went  back 
to  Spain.  At  that  time  the  total  European  force  in 
the  islands  was  10,000  men.  They  held  the  arsenals 
at  Cavite,  and  the  city  of  Manila;  but  the  rebels  were 
strongly  entrenched  throughout  the  peninsula  of  Cavite 
and  in  Laguna  Province.  “ At  that  time,”  says  For- 
man, the  historian,  ” I was  informed  by  the  secretary 
of  the  military  court  that  there  were  4,700  individuals 
awaiting  trial  by  court-martial.” 

General  Camilo  Polavieja  was  sent  out  to  the  Phil- 
ippines as  governor-general  in  Blanco’s  stead.  He 
arrived  in  June,  1896,  and  at  once  set  to  work  to 
put  down  the  rebellion.  He  was  an  energetic  mili- 
tary leader,  a man  who  had  himself  risen  from  the 
ranks.  He  had  been  in  Cuba,  and  his  experience 
there  enabled  him  to  see  at  once  how  serious  was 
the  state  of  things  in  the  Philippines.  On  the  ship 
with  him  came  500  troops,  under  command  of  Gen- 
eral Lachambre  (la  cham'bra),  and  on  another  ship 
1,500  more.  Others  quickly  followed,  so  that  in  a 
short  time,  as  we  have  stated  before,  there  were  28,000 
fighting  Europeans  in  the  islands. 

It  was  now  the  dry  season,  and  General  Lachambre 
at  once  took  the  field  against  the  rebels  in  Cavite 
Province.  The  Filipinos  at  this  time  expressly  de- 
clared that  they  were  fighting,  not  Spain,  but  the 
dominion  of  the  Spanish  friars.  Their  battle  cry  was. 


THE  STORT  OF  THE  PHILIPPINES. 


Long  live  Spain  ! Down  with  the  priests!”  The 
campaign  was  conducted  very  well  on  the  part  of 
the  Spanish.  Their  troops  were  better  armed  than 
the  Filipinos,  and  were  well  commanded,  while  the 
rebels  had  no  trained  military  officers  to  plan  their 
battles.  The  Filipinos  were  driven  from  Imus,  and 
later  from  Silang;  and  although  the  Spanish  met  with 
great  losses,  in  time  the  rebels,  unable  to  hold  any 
one  place,  were  driven  up  to  Laguna  Province.  By 
the  middle  of  March  every  rebel  band  of  importance 
had  been  scattered. 

Polavieja  cabled  for  more  troops  to  be  sent  from 
Spain.  He  wanted  these  to  garrison  the  districts  which 
he  had  taken  from  the  rebels,  as  his  army  corps  was 
needed  in  the  northern  provinces,  to  which  the  Fili- 
pinos had  been  driven  back.  But  there  were  already 
200,000  Spanish  soldiers  in  Cuba,  and  more  were 
needed  there.  The  Spanish  government,  therefore, 
refused  to  send  any  more  troops  to  the  Philippines. 

The  newspapers  at  Madrid  made  light  of  the  trouble 
in  the  islands,  and  criticised  the  governor-general’s 
rule.  Polavieja  then  cabled  that  he  was  broken  down 
in  health  and  should  be  obliged  to  resign.  Through 
much  of  the  campaign  he  was  so  ill  that  he  could  not 
sit  his  horse,  and  was  obliged  to  direct  the  campaign 
from  Paranaque  (pa  ran  ya'ke),  where  he  remained 
until  after  the  capture  of  San  Francisco  and  the  driv- 
ing back  of  the  rebels  into  the  mountains. 

In  April,  2897,  he  went  back  to  Spain.  General 
Lachambre  followed,  to  receive  great  praise  for  the 
good  work  he  had  done  in  the  Philippines.  Polavieja 
himself  arrived  in  Spain  blind,  physically  disabled,  and 


THE  UPRISING  OF  i8g6.  189 

really  ill ; but  he  had  accomplished  a great  deal  in  the 
islands,  and  had  gotten  the  rebellion  well  in  hand. 

The  next  governor-general  was  Primo  de  Rivera, 
who  had  held  that  office  before,  from  the  years 
1880  to  1883.  He  reached  Manila  on  the  23d  of 
April,  and  went  to  the  front  on  the  29th  day  of  that 
month. 

Summary. — The  growth  of  secret  societies  in  the  islands, 
and  the  rebellious  attitude  of  many  of  the  people,  led  Spain  to 
adopt  a new  measure.  It  was  decided  to  settle  the  Marauit 
district,  in  Mindanao,  with  Filipinos  from  Luzon.  Invitations, 
amounting  really  to  orders,  to  go  and  live  in  this  district  were 
sent  out  among  the  people  living  in  provinces  where  the  secret 
societies  were  supposed  to  be  strongest.  Because  of  these  invi- 
tations many  Filipinos  left  their  homes  and  went  to  live  in  the 
mountains,  to  avoid  trouble.  The  government  then  began  try- 
ing to  force  people  to  go  south  to  live.  In  1896  the  Katipu- 
nan  sent  a petition  to  the  emperor  of  Japan,  asking  him  to 
annex  the  islands  to  Japan.  The  emperor  sent  this  petition 
to  Spain.  The  government  now  awoke  to  a knowledge  of  how 
serious  was  the  revolt  in  the  islands.  Many  arrests  were  made, 
and  soon  the  jails  in  Manila  were  filled  with  prisoners. 

By  August  30  the  uprising  was  in  full  force,  and  the  first 
battle  was  fought  at  San  Juan  del  Monte,  on  that  day.  Troops 
were  now  sent  from  Spain,  while  from  all  over  the  islands 
fighting  men  gathered  to  the  aid  of  the  Filipino  leaders.  By 
December,  1896,  there  were  ro,ooo  European  troops  in  the 
islands.  They  held  the  arsenal  at  Cavite,  and  the  city  of  Ma- 
nila ; but  the  Filipinos  held  strong  positions  in  the  Cavite  penin- 
sula and  in  Laguna  Province.  Governor-General  Blanco  went 
back  to  Spain,  and  General  Camilo  Polavieja  was  sent  out 
in  his  stead.  The  new  governor-general  carried  on  the  war 


190 


THE  STORT  OF  THE  PHILIPPINES. 


with  great  vigor.  He  sent  for  more  troops,  until  there  were 
28,000  Spanish  soldiers  in  the  country.  The  Spanish  succeeded 
in  driving  the  Filipinos  back  from  their  strong  places,  but  were 
too  few  to  do  more  than  hold  them  in  check.  The  home  gov- 
ernment refused  to  send  more  troops  to  the  Philippines,  as  all 
Spain’s  armed  force  was  needed  in  Cuba.  Governor-General 
Polavieja  was  taken  very  ill,  and  went  back  to  Spain.  General 
Lachambre  followed,  soon  after.  The  next  governor-general 
was  Primo  de  Rivera,  who  reached  Manila  April  23,  1897. 

Questions. — What  were  the  secret  societies  that  now  grew  up 
in  the  islands?  What  plan  did  the  government  make  for  set- 
tling the  Marauit  district?  Give  an  account  of  the  petition 
sent  by  the  Katipunan  to  Japan.  When  was  the  first  battle 
fought  in  the  uprising  of  1896?  Outline  the  progress  of  this 
uprising. 


Chapter  XVIII. 


THE  END  OF  SPANISH  RULE. 

E of  the  first  things  that  General  Primo  de 
Rivera  did  after  his  arrival,  for  the  second 
time,  in  the  islands,  was  to  issue  a procla- 
mation offering  amnesty  to  all  who  would 
lay  down  their  arms.  Many  of  the  Filipinos  who  were 
in  revolt  accepted  the  offer,  and  pledged  allegiance  to 
Spain. 

They  were  driven  to  this  step  by  their  fears.  The 
Filipino  forces  were  weakened  and  discouraged.  Gen- 
eral Polavieja  had  carried  on  the  campaign  against 
them  with  such  savage  cruelty  that  the  people  were 
filled  with  terror.  No  quarter  had  been  given  by  the 
Spanish,  and  in  Cavite  Province  alone  over  30,000  Fili- 
pinos had  lost  their  lives.  Aguinaldo  had  left  Cavite, 
which  province  was  now  cleared  of  the  Filipino  forces, 
and  had  joined  General  Llaneras  (lyan  ar'as),  who  was 
leading  the  Filipinos  in  the  north,  beyond  Pampanga. 

The  state  of  the  country  at  this  time  was  pitiful. 
No  crops  had  been  planted;  there  was  no  food  for  the 


THE  STORY  OF  THE  PHILIPPINES. 


\C)2 

people;  their  young  carabaos  had  been  killed;  the  rice 
and  camotes  were  all  gone.  War  had  reduced  the 
country  to  a wilderness.  Everywhere  the  authorities 
were  seeking  to  put  down  the  rebellion,  but  their  cruel 
measures  actually  made  rebels  of  the  people.  The 
Filipino  priests  and  curates  were  put  in  chains,  were 
flogged  and  tortured,  to  make  them  tell  what  they 
might  have  learned,  through  the  confessional,  of  the 
secret  societies  and  the  movements  of  the  people. 

The  Spanish  campaign  in  Manila  was  being  con- 
ducted by  General  Monet  (Mo'nat),  and  there,  too,  no 
mercy  was  shown  to  natives  so  unfortunate  as  to  be 
captured.  In  Pangasinan  General  Nunez  (non'yeth) 
was  fighting  the  rebels.  The  war  was  waged  with  bit- 
terness; no  quarter  was  given  on  either  side,  and  the 
natives  lost  no  opportunity  to  avenge  the  punishment 
which  the  Spaniards  visited  upon  them. 

By  this  time  the  .rainy  weather  was  telling  severely 
on  the  unseasoned  Spanish  soldiers.  There  was  much 
sickness  among  them,  so  that  the  military  hospitals 
were  full.  The  soldiers  had  not  been  paid  for  several 
months,  and  they  were  bitterly  discontented. 

The  Filipinos,  too,  were  suffering  severely.  They 
were  poorly  fed  and  poorly  armed ; but  they  kept  up 
a constant  petty  warfare  that  was  very  trying  to  the 
Spanish,  although  it  was  useless,  so  far  as  gaining 
any  real  end  was  concerned.  They  now  held  two 
places,  Angat  (an'gat)  and  San  Mateo,  in  Bulacan 
Province.  These  had  been  fortified  securely,  and  they 
were  by  nature  such  fortresses  that  it  would  have  been 
almost  impossible  for  the  Spanish  to  dislodge  any  force 
from  them.  The  Filipinos  were  not,  however,  strong 


THE  END  OF  SPANISH  RULE. 


193 


enough  to  make  any  effective  warfare  against  the 
enemy,  but  had  to  content  themselves  with  holding 
these  two  places  and  harassing  the  Spanish  as  much 
as  they  could. 

On  the  2d  of  July,  1897,  the  governor-general  issued 
an  edict  commanding  all  who  were  concerned  in  the 
rebellion  to  report  themselves  to  the  Spanish  authori- 
ties by  July  10.  The  edict  also  ordered  all  officers, 
military  and  civil,  to  prevent  the  people  from  leaving 
the  towns  or  villages,  except  to  till  the  fields,  to  look 
after  their  farm  properties,  or  do  their  daily  work.  All 
who  were  allowed  to  go  out  on  such  business  must  be 
provided  with  passes  stating  where  they  were  going, 
by  what  road  they  should  travel,  when  they  should 
return,  and  what  was  their  errand.  Any  Filipino  stay- 
ing out  over  time,  or  found  on  any  road  or  in  any  place 
not  mentioned  in  the  pass,  was  to  be  treated  as  a rebel. 
The  edict  also  declared  that  after  July  10  all  persons  , 
would  be  obliged  to  prove  their  identity  by  “ cedula  per- 
sonal,” together  with  the  pass.  Anyone  who  failed  to 
observe  these  orders,  it  was  declared,  would  be  tried 
by  court-martial. 

This  measure  was  so  outrageous  and  so  unnecessary 
that  it  had  an  effect  on  the  people  exactly  opposite  to 
what  the  governor-general  hoped  for.  Those  Filipinos 
who  had  been  neutral  were  made  angry  by  it.  It  en- 
raged the  rebels  and  drove  many  others  into  the  insur- 
gent camp. 

The  rebels  themselves  responded  by  a document 
calling  upon  all  Filipinos  to  rise  in  defense  of  the  coun- 
try. This  document  demanded  that  the  friars  should 
be  expelled,  and  that  land  seized  by  them  should  be 
13 


194 


THE  STORY  OF  THE  PHILIPPINES. 


returned  to  the  towns  to  which  it  belonged ; that  all 
livings  and  parishes  should  be  divided  equally  between 
the  Spanish  and  the  native  priests.  It  asked  for  repre- 
sentation by  Filipinos  in  Parliament;  for  freedom  of 
the  press;  for  religious  toleration;  and  for  more  just 
laws  in  the  islands.  It  demanded  that  there  should 
be  equal  terms  and  pay  for  Spanish  and  native  civil 
servants;  that  no  citizen  should  be  banished  from  the 
Philippines;  and  that  there  should  be  equal  punish- 
ment for  Spaniards  and  Filipinos  who  should  offend 
against  the  laws  of  the  land.  It  declared  that  the  war 
would  be  prolonged  until  Spain  was  compelled  to  grant 
the  demands  of  the  people.  To  these  demands  Agui- 
naldo  added  an  appeal  to  the  people  to  join  the  rebel- 
lion. Many  Filipinos  responded,  and  the  force  of  the 
rebels  was  greatly  increased. 

General  Primo  de  Rivera  now  began  to  urge  the  home 
government  to  grant  some  of  the  demands  made  by  the 
Filipinos.  The  authorities  at  Madrid  were  coming  to 
see  that  something  must  be  done.  The  war  in  Cuba 
had  so  drained  the  resources  of  Spain  that  she  had 
neither  men  nor  money  to  expend  in  punishing  the 
rebel  Filipinos,  and  it  was  therefore  decided  to  make 
some  concessions  to  their  demands. 

In  August,  1897,  Seiior  Pedro  Alisandro  Paterno 
(al  e san'dro  pa  ter'no),  a Filipino,  educated  in  Europe, 
a man  of  means  and  position  in  Manila,  was  made 
the  agent  of  Spain  to  try  to  arrange  terms  of  peace 
with  the  rebel  leaders.  He  visited  Aguinaldo  in  the 
mountains  of  Bulacan  Province.  There  he  talked  with 
the  Filipino  leader,  and  was  given  power  to  act  in  his 
name.  Aguinaldo  stated  to  Senor  Paterno  the  terms 


THE  END  OF  SPANISH  RULE.  193 

on  which  peace  could  be  made.  It  must  always  be 
a matter  of  regret  that  these  terms  were  never  made 
public,  either  by  the  Filipinos  or  by  the  Spaniards. 
In  the  disputes  that  afterwards  arose,  the  Spanish  gov- 
ernment denied  the  claims  made  by  the  Filipinos,  and 
declared  that  the  terms  of  peace  had  included  nothing 
of  what  the  Filipinos  stated  had  been  agreed  upon.  It 


biac-na-’bato,  where  the  treaty  was  made. 

will,  therefore,  never  be  certainly  known  what  these 
terms  were. 

Certain  reforms  in  the  government  were  demanded. 
These  reforms  were  opposed  by  the  friars,  whose  power 
was  lessened  by  them.  The  friars  endeavored  to  pre- 
vent the  government  from  yielding  the  terms,  whatever 
they  may  have  been,  and  succeeded  in  prolonging  the 
trouble  for  several  months. 

At  last,  however,  Seiior  Paterno  was  given  authority 


196  THE  STORT  OF  THE  PHILIPPINES. 


to  act  for  the  captain-general  of  the  forces  in  the 
islands,  representing  the  Spanish  government.  On 
September  19  he  had  a meeting  with  Aguinaldo  and 
his  generals,  and  an  agreement  was  entered  into.  This 
conference  took  place  at  Biac-na-’bato  (be  ak'na’ba  to), 
a mountain  fastness  not  far  from  the  famous  sulphur 
springs,  near  Angat,  in  the  province  of  Bulacan. 

Here  was  made  what  is  now  known  to  history  as  the 
treaty  of  Biac-na-’bato.  It  was  made  between  Agui- 
naldo and  the  other  Filipino  generals  on  the  one  hand, 
and  Seiior  Paterno,  acting  for  the  Spanish  govern- 
ment, on  the  other.  By  its  terms  the  Filipinos  agreed 
to  deliver  up  their  arms,  all  ammunition,  etc.,  to  the 
Spaniards.  They  were  to  give  up  all  places  held  by 
them,  and  to  cease,  for  three  years,  all  plotting  against 
the  Spanish  authority.  These  three  years  the  govern- 
ment should  have  for  bringing  about  the  reforms 
demanded  and  promised.  Aguinaldo  and  thirty-four 
others  of  the  insurgent  leaders  promised  to  leave  the 
country,  not  to  return  until  they  were  given  permis- 
sion 'by  the  Spanish  government. 

The  government,  on  its  side,  agreed  to  pay  the  rebels 
$1,000,000,  Mexican,  as  indemnity,  and  to  reimburse 
the  Filipinos  not  in  arms,  but  who  had  suffered  by  the 
war,  in  the  sum  of  $700,000,  Mexican.  This  latter 
sum  was  to  be  paid  in  three  equal  installments,  the  last 
one  to  be  paid  in  six  months  after  the  Te  Deian  should 
be  sung  in  token  that  peace  was  secured. 

After  this  treaty  had  been  signed,  Aguinaldo  and  his 
thirty-four  companions  were  taken  to  Sual  (so'al),  on 
the  coast,  under  an  escort  of  Spanish  officers.  Here 
they  and  their  escort  had  a feast,  and  great  good  feel- 


THE  END  OF  SPJNISH  RULE. 


197 


ing  towards  Spain  was  expressed  by  the  Filipino  mili- 
tary leaders.  Then  the  exiles  were  taken  on  board  the 
steamship  Uramis  (6  ra'nus),  for  Hong-Kong.  They 
sailed  on  December  27,  1897,  with  an  escort  of  Span- 
iards of  high  rank.  When  they  reached  port,  they 
were  handed  a draft  on  the  Bank  of  Hong-Kong  for 
$400,000,  Mexican,  the  first  installment  on  the  sum 
agreed  to  be  paid  them. 

In  the  meantime  there  was  rejoicing  in  Manila  and 
in  Madrid.  General  Primo  de  Rivera  received  great 
commendation,  and  was  publicly  thanked  by  the  gov- 
ernment. On  every  side  were  words  of  praise  for  his 
success  as  a peacemaker.  The  Queen  Regent  pre- 
sented him  with  the  Grand  Cross  of  San  Fernando 
and  a pension  of  10,000  pesetas  a year. 

The  people  now  looked  to  see  the  promised  reforms 
carried  out;  but,  instead,  the  government  seemed  to 
forget  that  any  promises  had  been  made.  The  Fili- 
pinos had  laid  down  their  arms,  and  there  were  about 
two  months  of  quiet.  Seven  thousand  of  the  troops 
were  sent  back  to  Spain,  and  General  Primo  de  Rivera 
evidently  thought  that  he  had  broken  the  back  of  the 
revolt.  Business  was  resumed  in  Manila.  The  Span- 
iards went  on  with  their  pleasures,  and  matters  in 
Luzon  seemed,  on  the  surface,  to  be  as  usual;  but 
trouble  was  still  in  store  for  the  islands. 

Persons  who  had  taken  part  in  the  rebellion  were 
arrested,  on  slight  charges,  from  time  to  time,  and 
put  into  prison ; others  were  openly  insulted  and  re- 
garded with  suspicion,  as  rebels  against  the  country. 
There  were  many  executions,  and  instead  of  the  gen- 
eral pardon  which  was  taken  for  granted  as  a part  of 


198  THE  STORY  OF  THE  PHILIPPINES. 


the  treaty  of  peace,  only  a few  pardons  were  bestowed. 
Time  went  on.  No  steps  were  taken  toward  making 
the  reforms,  and  the  Filipinos  began  to  see  that  the 
government  had  once  more  deceived  them. 

At  this  time  the  Seventy-fourth  Regiment  of  native 
infantry  was  in  garrison  at  Cavite.  This  was  a very 
old  regiment  in  the  Philippines.  P'or  many  years  it 
had  been  known  as  the  First  Regiment  of  the  Visayas. 
In  1886  it  was  thought  that  by  making  the  native 
regiments  a part  of  the  Spanish  army  another  tie 
would  be  formed  between  the  islands  and  Spain.  So 
these  were  all  numbered  in  line  with  the  Spanish  regi- 
ments, and  the  First  Visayas  became  the  Seventy- 
fourth  Regiment  of  infantry. 

Early  in  1898,  companies  of  armed  men,  whom  the 
government  called  ladrones,  were  infesting  the  prov- 
ince. The  country  was  in  an  unsettled  state,  and 
some  of  these  companies — really  insurgents  who  had 
taken  up  arms  again — came  into  Cavite  Province.  On 
March  24,  the  Seventy-fourth  Regiment  was  ordered 
out  against  them;  but,  to  the  surprise  of  everybody,  it 
refused  to  go.  The  soldiers  declared  that  they  were 
ready  to  fight  the  enemies  of  Spain  or  of  the  islands, 
but  that  they  would  not  march  against  their  own  peo- 
ple. Eight  corporals  were  called  out  of  the  regiment, 
and  the  men  were  again  ordered  to  advance,  on  penalty 
of  death  to  all.  All  refused,  and  the  entire  regiment 
was  sent  to  the  barracks  to  await  sentence.  By  morn- 
ing it  had  deserted  in  a body.  On  the  following  day 
another  regiment  joined  them. 

On  March  25  occurred  in  Manila  one  of  the  most 
senseless  of  the  many  tragedies  which  marked  Spanish 


THE  END  OF  SPANISH  RULE. 


199 


rule  in  the  islands.  This  is  known  as  the  massacre 
of  Calle  de  Camba  (kal'ya  da  kam'ba).  A number  of 
Visayan  soldiers,  in  a public  house  on  this  street,  fell 
into  a discussion  of  matters  of  no  especial  importance; 


EMILIO  AGUINALDO. 


but  they  got  to  talking  loudly,  and  became  excited 
over  their  talk.  Some  one  overheard  them  and  re- 
ported to  the  police. 

Without  stopping  to  ask  any  questions,  a band  of 
the  Guardia  Civil  came  and  raided  the  place.  They 
shot  down  a large  number  of  the  people,  and  made 


200 


THE  STORT  OF  THE  PHILIPPINES. 


between  sixty  and  seventy  of  them  prisoners.  Some 
of  these  latter  were  men  who  had  not  been  in  the  build- 
ing at  all,  but  were  merely  passing  in  the  street  and 
were  taken  along  with  the  rest.  Next  morning  the 
whole  company  of  sixty-two  were  taken  out  to  the 
cemetery  and  shot.  The  rebellion  now  flamed  up 
again,  and  among  the  insurgents  were  two  battalions 
of  well-trained  veteran  soldiers. 

On  the  3d  of  April,  1898,  a party  of  5,000  natives 
made  a raid  on  the  city  of  Cebu.  The  leaders  were 
armed  with  rifles,  but  the  rank  and  file  had  only  bolos. 
The  Spanish  fled  before  them,  and  the  natives  cut 
the  cable  to  Manila,  so  that  the  refugees  could  not 
communicate  with  the  garrison  there.  A gunboat 
came  in  from  Mindanao  that  afternoon,  however,  and 
two  small  boats  were  sent  to  Iligan  (e  le  gan')  and 
Iloilo  for  troops.  These  arrived  two  or  three  days 
later,  and  were  followed  by  reenforcements  from  Ma- 
nila. The  rebels  were  forced  out  of  the  city  on  the 
8th  of  April,  and  sustained  a crushing  defeat.  After 
that  the  Spanish  chased  them  back  into  the  moun- 
tains, where  they  took  refuge. 

This  new  movement  was  more  serious  than  any  that 
had  gone  before.  All  trust  in  Spain  was  swept  away. 
The  earlier  leaders  had  desired  reform,  but  the  Fili- 
pinos now  in  the  field  sought  first  of  all  vengeance  for 
the  wrongs  which  had  been  heaped  upon  them. 

It  had  been  understood  in  connection  with  the  treaty 
of  Biac-na-’bato  that  General  Primo  de  Rivera  would 
stay  in  the  islands  and  see  that  the  reforms  were  car- 
ried out.  Instead  of  his  doing  this,  however,  the  home 
government  recalled  him  early  in  1898,  and  appointed 


THE  END  OF  SPANISH  RULE. 


201 


in  his  place  General  Basilic  Augusti  (ba  se'li  o au  gus'te), 
a stranger  to  the  Philippines.  He  arrived  in  the  islands 
early  in  April,  and  in  the  second  week  of  that  month 
Prime  de  Rivera  left  Manila  for  Spain.  Before  he 
reached  Madrid,  Spain’s  disaster  in  Manila  had  taken 
place,  and  the  islands  were  fated  never  again  to  come 
under  Spain’s  rule. 

Summary. — One  of  Primo  de  Rivera’s  first  acts  was  to  offer 
amnesty  to  all  Filipinos  who  would  lay  down  their  arms  and 
pledge  their  allegiance  to  Spain.  This  was  a good  move,  and 
many  accepted  the  offer.  Later,  however,  another  edict  was 
issued,  which  forbade  people  to  leave  their  towns  or  villages 
without  passes  stating  their  business,  the  roads  they  might 
travel,  and  the  time  when  they  should  return.  All  persons  were 
also  required  to  prove  identity  by  “cedula  personal.”  This 
measure  was  so  unreasonable  and  so  severe  that  it  enraged  the 
people,  and  the  rebellion  blazed  up  anew.  The  rebels  issued  a 
proclamation  calling  upon  the  people  to  join  them,  and  stating 
their  grievances  and  demands.  The  governor-general  advised 
the  authorities  in  Spain  to  grant  some  of  these  demands.  In 
August,  1897,  Pedro  A.  Paterno,  a Filipino,  was  sent  in  behalf 
of  Spain  to  confer  with  the  Filipino  leaders.  He  met  them  at 
Biac-na-’bato,  and  there  a treaty  was  arranged.  War  was  to 
cease ; and  the  rebel  leaders  would  leave  the  country  and  give  up 
all  plotting  against  Spanish  authority.  The  government  agreed 
to  pay  certain  sums  to  the  revolutionists  ; to  reimburse  Filipinos 
not  in  rebellion,  who  had  suffered  from  the  war ; and  to  grant 
the  reforms  demanded  by  the  rebels. 

When  this  treaty  had  been  signed,  the  thirty-five  rebel  leaders 
were  escorted  to  Sual,  whence  they  sailed  for  Hong-Kong,  on 
December  27,  1897,  with  an  escort  of  Spaniards  of  high  rank. 
At  Hong-Kong  they  were  handed  a draft  for  $400,000,  Mexican, 


202 


THE  STORT  OF  THE  PHILIPPINES. 


the  first  installment  of  a sum  agreed  to  be  paid  them.  Business 
now  went  on  in  Manila.  Many  of  the  Spanish  troops  were 
sent  home ; but  no  steps  were  taken  toward  the  promised 
reforms,  and  the  people  began  to  see  that  they  had  again  been 
deceived.  On  March  24,  1898,  the  Seventy-fourth  Regiment 
of  native  infantry  revolted  when  ordered  to  go  against  certain 
Filipinos  who  had  taken  up  arms  in  Cavite  Province.  Next  day 
this  regiment  deserted  in  a body,  and  on  the  following  day 
another  regiment  joined  them.  On  March  25  occurred  the 
massacre  of  Calle  de  Camba.  All  trust  in  Spain  was  now  at  an 
end,  and  the  people  again  began  arming  themselves.  Contrary 
to  the  understanding  claimed  under  the  treaty  of  Biac-na-’bato, 
a new  governor-general,  Basilio  August!,  was  sent  out,  and 
Primo  de  Rivera  left  Manila  in  April,  1898. 

Questions. — What  was  the  edict  that  caused  the  rebellion  to 
break  out  afresh  ? What  proclamation  did  the  patriot  leaders 
issue  ? What  did  Rivera  advise  the  government  to  do?  What 
was  the  treaty  of  Biac-na-’bato  ? How  was  this  trea'ty  kept  on 
the  part  of  Spain  ? 


Chapter  XIX. 


THE  BEGINNING  OF  AMERICAN  OCCUPATION. 


N the  month  of  April,  1898,  war  was  declared 
between  the  United  States  and  Spain.  The 
cause  of  this  war  was  the  feeling  of  the  peo- 
ple of  the  United  States  in  regard  to  the 
way  in  which  Spain  was  treating  the  people  of  Cuba 
and  Porto  Rico.  These  were  the  only  colonies  left  of 
the  many  Spain  had  once  possessed  in  the  New  World. 

For  years  Spain  had  oppressed  and  ill-treated  the 
Cubans  until  human  nature  could  no  longer  bear  such 
bitter  injustice,  and  the  people  rose  against  it.  Spain 
poured  her  armies  into  the  island,  and  the  means  which 
she  used  to  put  down  the  rebellion  were  contrary  to 
humane  ideas  among  civilized  people.  The  United 
States  more  than  once  protested  against  them.  Spain, 
however,  paid  no  attention  to  these  protests.  She  did 
not  show  in  any  way  what  the  American  Declaration 
of  Independence  calls  “ a decent  respect  for  the  opin- 
ions of  mankind.”  Instead,  she  continued  her  barba- 
rous course  in  Cuba  until  other  nations  began  to  feel 


204 


THE  STORY  OF  THE  PHILIPPINES. 


that  the  United  States,  as  the  nearest  neighbor  of  that 
unhappy  country,  should  interfere. 

At  last,  during  the  night  of  February  15,  1898,  the 
United  States  battleship  Jkfatne,  while  lying  in  Havana 
harbor,  was  blown  up.  A mine  had  been  placed  in  the 
harbor  exactly  where  the  battle-ship  was  allowed  to 
anchor.  This  mine  had  exploded,  and,  as  a result,  266 


lives  were  lost  of  the  353 
officers  and  men  who 
were  on  the  ship. 


A court  was  held  to 
inquire  into  this  awful 
event,  but  it  was  not 
possible  to  say  where 
the  blame  for  the  catas- 
trophe belonged.  It  was 
evident,  however,  that 
the  state  of  affairs  in 
Cuba  was  becoming  dan- 
gerous to  other  nations, 
and  was  no  longer  to  be 
borne.  The  President  of 
the  United  States,  in  a 


ADMIRAL  MONTOJO. 


special  message  to  Congress,  stated  plainly  that  the  war 
in  Cuba  must  end.  Congress  then  passed  a resolution 
to  declare  war  against  Spain  if  that  nation  did  not  at 
once  take  her  army  out  of  Cuba  and  restore  peace  there. 
As  Spain  refused  to  do  this,  war  was  declared,  first  by 
the  United  States,  and  then  by  Spain. 

At  this  time  Commodore  George  Dewey  was  in 
command  of  the  South  Pacific  squadron  of  the  United 
States.  This  fleet,  which  numbered  ten  ships,  was 


BEGINNING  OF  AMERICAN  OCCUPATION.  205 


lying  in  the  harbor  of  Hong-Kong.  As  that  har- 
bor is  under  English  control,  and  as  Great  Britain  was 
friendly  to  both  Spain  and  the  United  States,  she  was 
compelled  to  treat  both  nations  fairly.  To  allow  the 
fleet  of  one  of  these  nations  to  remain  in  the  harbor 
would  have  been  unfair  to  the  other  one;  so  Commo- 
dore Dewey  was  notified  that  his  ships  must  leave 
Hong-Kong.  At  the  same  time  he  received  orders 
from  his  own  government  to  go  in  search  of  the  Span- 
ish fleet  and  to  capture  or  destroy  it. 

This  fleet,  as  Dewey  knew,  was  in  Manila  harbor; 
and,  obeying  orders,  he  at  once  set  out  for  Manila. 
The  Spanish  ships,  seven  in  number,  with  ten  small  gun- 
boats, were  anchored  off  Cavite.  Commodore  Dewey 
entered  Manila  harbor  under  cover  of  the  night,  and 
when  day  broke  on  Sunday,  May  i,  1898,  his  ships  lay 
at  anchor  in  front  of  Manila. 

At  six  o’clock  that  morning  began  the  famous  battle 
of  Manila  Bay.  By  half-past  seven  the  Spanish  flag- 
ship was  in  flames,  and  the  commander  of  the  fleet. 
Admiral  Montojo  (mon  to'ho)  was  forced  to  take  refuge 
on  another  ship  of  the  fleet,  the  Isla  de  Ciiba.  By 
noon  of  that  day  the  Spanish  fleet  was  wholly  de- 
stroyed, and  the  admiral  and  all  survivors  had  fled  into 
Manila.  The  Americans  had  sustained  no  loss  of  life, 
and  only  a slight  injury  to  one  of  the  ships,  the  Boston. 

They  next  opened  fire  on  the  arsenal  and  fort  at 
Cavite,  and  kept  this  up  until  a flag  of  truce  was  shown. 
By  sunset  Cavite  was  under  control  of  the  United 
States,  and  the  Stars  and  Stripes  floated  over  the  town 
and  the  forts  at  Cancao  (kan  ka'o),  Punta  (pon'ta),  and 
Sangley  (sang'li). 


2o6 


THE  STORT  OF  THE  PHILIPPINES. 


Commodore  Dewey  now  demanded  the  surrender  of 
Manila,  which  was  refused  by  Governor-General  Au- 
gusti.  Dewey  refrained  from  taking  the  city  by  force, 
but  declared  the  port  blockaded.  On  the  following 
day  he  demanded  control  of  the  telegraph  station,  and 
on  this  being  refused  he  ordered  the  cable  cut.  The 
officials  in  Manila  had  just  time  to  send  the  dire  news 

to  Spain  before  this  order 
was  carried  out. 

Admiral  Dewey  — for 
his  government  at  once 
rewarded  him  by  promot- 
ing him  to  the  rank  of 
admiral — now  held  the 
key  to  the  situation  in 
the  Philippines.  He  was 
in  possession  of  the  isl- 
and of  Corregidor  (kor- 
rag'edor),  of  the  arsenal 
at  Cavite,  the  city  of 
Cavite,  and  the  surround- 
ing country.  His  fleet 
lay  in  the  harbor,  ready 
at  any  moment  to  force  the  surrender  of  Manila;  but 
he  was  awaiting  instructions  from  home  and  the  arrival 
of  land  forces,  for  which  he  had  asked,  before  complet- 
ing his  victory. 

The  Filipinos  in  arms  had  taken  fresh  courage  on 
the  approach  of  the  Americans,  and  had  closed  in  about 
Manila,  so  that  the  Spaniards  were  literally  prisoners 
within  the  city  limits.  Outside,  in  Manila  Bay,  the  Amer- 
ican fleet  lay,  cutting  off  all  chance  of  escape  by  sea. 


GOVERNOR-GENERAL  AUGUSTI. 


BEGINNING  OF  AMERICAN  OCCUPATION.  207 


In  the  meantime  the  Filipino  leader,  Emilio  Agui- 
naldo,  had  come  to  Cavite  from  Hong-Kong,  with  a 
number  of  his  companions  in  exile.  They  had  been 
given  arms  from  the  arsenal  by  Admiral  Dewey,  and 
Aguinaldo  had  the  admiral’s  permission  to  organize 
his  countrymen  into  an  army.  It  was  intended  that 
this  army  should  act  with  the  American  forces,  when 
the  latter  should  be  ready  to  take  the  city  and  occupy 
the  islands.  Aguinaldo,  however,  took  advantage  of 
this  opportunity  to  attempt  to  organize  a dictatorial 
government,  with  himself  at  the  head.  Out  of  his 
misguided  ambition  to  rule,  great  trouble  grew,  for 
Filipinos  and  Americans  alike.  The  country,  already 
suffering  from  a long  period  of  misrule  and  warfare, 
was  plunged  into  still  deeper  misery.  The  Americans 
were  seriously  hampered  in  their  efforts  to  restore 
order,  and  the  establishment  of  peace  was  hindered. 

The  first  reenforcements  sent  out  to  Admiral  Dewey 
from  America  reached  Manila  Bay  in  June,  1898,  and 
were  landed  on  the  30th  day  of  that  month.  Others 
followed  very  soon,  and  on  the  25th  of  Jul)-  General 
Wesley  Merritt  (wes'li  mer'it),  the  first  American 
governor-general  of  Manila,  joined  Admiral  Dewey. 
On  August  7 these  two  officers  together  demanded 
the  surrender  of  the  city,  and  again  on  August  9; 
but  the  Spaniards  refused  both  demands. 

On  the  13th  of  August  the  Americans  made  a final 
demand,  and  on  receiving  a third  refusal  they  sent 
their  land  forces  against  Manila.  At  the  same  time 
the  fleet  began  the  bombardment  of  the  forts  and 
trenches  south  of  the  city.  The  walled  city  and  the 
business  district  of  Binondo  were  purposely  spared. 


208 


THE  STORT  OF  THE  PHILIPPINES. 


as  it  was  not  the  wish  of  the  Americans  to  do  any 
more  damage  than  was  necessary.  The  battle  was 
very  short,  lasting  hardly  more  than  an  hour.  At 
the  end  of  that  time  the  Spaniards  yielded  to  superior 
force,  and  a white  flag  was  hoisted  in  token  of  their 
capitulation. 

A few  hours  later  the  Spanish  and  the  American 
commanders  met,  terms  were  arranged,  and  Manila 
and  the  Philippine  archipelago  were  surrendered  to 
the  United  States.  The  Spanish  flag,  which  floated 
over  Fort  Santiago,  was  hauled  down,  and  the  Stars 
and  Stripes  took  its  place. 

In  the  meantime,  on  the  day  before,  August  12, 
1898,  a protocol  of  peace  had  been  signed  between 
Spain  and  the  United  States.  Such  a protocol  is  an 
agreement  between  two  nations  who  are  at  war  with 
each  other  to  cease  fighting  until  terms  of  permanent 
peace  can  be  arranged.  By  the  terms  of  the  protocol 
it  was  agreed,  among  other  things,  that  the  United 
States  government  was  to  occupy  and  hold  Manila 
Bay  and  the  city  and  harbor  of  Manila  until  a treaty 
of  peace  should  be  made  between  that  government  and 
Spain.  It  was  also  agreed  that  Spain  and  the  United 
States  should  each  appoint  not  more  than  five  commis- 
sioners, to  meet  in  Paris  at  a date  not  later  than  Oc- 
tober I,  These  commissioners  were  to  arrange  terms 
of  peace,  and  in  the  meantime  all  fighting  between  the 
two  nations  should  be  suspended. 

The  commissioners  were  chosen  by  the  two  coun- 
tries, and  met  in  Paris  as  had  been  agreed.  It  was 
not  until  the  loth  of  December,  however,  that  they 
succeeded  in  arranging  terms.  A treaty  of  peace  was 


BEGINNING  OF  AMERICAN  OCCUPATION.  209 

completed  and  signed  in  Paris  on  that  date.  It  was 
ratified  in  Washington  on  the  loth  of  February,  1899, 
by  the  President  of  the  United  States  and  a represent- 
ative of  the  Queen  Regent  of  Spain. 

Under  this  treaty  of  peace  Spain,  as  had  been 
planned  in  the  protocol,  gave  up  all  claim  to  Cuba; 
she  ceded  to  the  United  States  Porto  Rico  and  all  of  her 


THE  FIRST  AMERICAN  FLAG  RAISED  IN  MANILA. 


Other  islands  in  the  West  Indies,  and  also  the  island 
of  Guam,  one  of  the  Ladrone  group  in  the  Pacific. 
Resides  this,  she  ceded  “ the  archipelago  known  by  the 
name  of  the  Philippine  Islands,”  which  for  over  three 
hundred  years  had  been  one  of  her  richest  colonies. 
The  United  States  was  to  pay  Spain  the  sum  of 
$20,CX)0,000,  gold,  within  three  months  after  this  rati- 
fied treaty  was  exchanged  between  the  two  nations. 

14 


210 


THE  STORY  OF  THE  PHILIPPINES. 


Other  matters  were  dealt  with  in  the  treaty,  but 
this  transfer  of  the  Philippine  archipelago  is  the  point 
which  vitally  interests  us  now.  It  is  because  of  the 
facts  which  have  been  set  forth  in  these  chapters  that 
the  United  States  is  now  in  possession  of  the  Philip- 
pines, and  that  this  history  of  the  country  is  written 
in  the  English  language. 

But  the  real  history  of  the  Philippine  Islands  has 
only  begun.  The  events  that  make  up  the  past  record 
of  this  beautiful  land  have  been  but  a sad  preface  to 
the  future  which  we  hope  may  be  hers.  The  Filipino 
people  have  had  much  to  bear.  They  have  been  shut 
away  from  the  rest  of  the  world,  and  from  a knowledge 
of  the  world’s  progress.  They  have  been  governed  by 
unjust  laws  until  the  great  mass  of  the  people,  left  to 
themselves,  would  scarcely  know  how  to  go  about  to 
rule  their  own  lives.  But  they  have  a history;  they 
have  a country;  they  have  a future.  It  is  not  the 
policy  of  the  United  States  either  to  forget  these  things 
or  to  let  the  people  themselves  forget  them.  As  the 
late  President  McKinley  expressed  it — the  United 
States  desires  not  conquest,  but  a benevolent  assimila- 
tion of  these  islands,  that  they  may  become  one  country 
and  one  united,  prosperous,  and  happy  people. 

Stimmary. — In  April,  1898,  war  was  declared  between  the 
United  States  and  Spain.  Commodore  George  Dewey,  in  com- 
mand of  the  American  squadron  in  the  Pacific,  being  ordered 
to  go  in  search  of  the  Spanish  fleet  in  the  Pacific,  and  capture 
or  destroy  it,  sailed  for  the  Philippine  Islands,  where  he  knew 
the  fleet  to  be.  He  entered  Manila  Bay  under  cover  of  night, 
April  30,  and  at  daybreak  on  May  i his  ships  lay  at  anchor 
off  Cavite.  At  six  o’clock  that  same  morning  the  battle  of 


BEGINNING  OF  AMERICAN  OCCUPATION.  211 


]\Ianila  Bay  was  begun.  By  noon  the  Spanish  fleet  was  de- 
stroyed, and  the  admiral  and  all  survivors  had  fled  into  the  city. 
By  sunset  Cavite  was  taken.  Two  months  later,  American  troops 
arrived  in  Manila  Bay,  and  on  August  13  the  city  of  Manila 
surrendered  to  the  Americans.  On  February  10,  1899,  a treaty 
of  peace  was  signed  betv'een  the  United  States  and  Spain. 
Under  this  treaty,  Spain  ceded  the  Philippine  Islands  to  the 
United  States. 

Questions. — When  was  war  declared  between  the  United 
States  and  Spain  ? I\Tat  causes  led  up  to  this  war  ? Why 
did  Dewey  have  to  leave  Hong- Kong  harbor?  What  were  his 
orders?  How  did  he  carry  them  out?  When  did  Manila  sur- 
render to  the  Americans?  When  did  the  first  body  of  American 
troops  arrive  ? When  was  the  treaty  of  peace  signed  ? What 
were  the  terms  of  that  treaty  relating  to  the  Philippine  Islands  ? 


Chapter  XX. 


CIVIL  GOVERNMENT  FOR  THE  PHILIPPINES. 


HE  United  States  is  often  spoken  of  as  a 
free  country.  Its  people  are  free  because 
they  have  a voice  in  the  making  and  up- 
holding of  their  government.  There  are 
strong  laws  in  the  land  to  protect  their  freedom.  No 
man  and  no  state  can  be  really  free  without  such  laws. 
If  a man  would  enjoy  liberty,  and  freedom  from  the 
power  of  evil,  he  must  obey  the  laws  of  goodness.  So 
a people  must  honor  and  uphold  the  laws  of  the  state, 
if  the  state  is  to  be  strong  enough  to  protect  their  lib- 
erties. We  can  easily  see  that  if  there  were  no  laws, 
and  each  man  were  free  to  do  as  he  pleased,  no  man’s 
life  or  property  would  be  safe.  Every  man  would  have 
to  take  care  of  himself,  and  the  land  where  such  a con- 
dition existed  would  cease  to  be  a civilized  country. 
Laws  are  made  for  the  protection  of  a people,  and 
without  them  there  would  be  an  end  to  liberty  and 
progress. 

For  a great  many  years  the  government  in  the  Phil- 


CIVIL  GOVERNMENT. 


213 


ippine  Islands  was  by  force  of  arms.  It  was  not  a 
government  in  which  the  people  had  any  voice.  They 
were  ruled  by  laws  made  by  a power  outside  of  them- 
selves, and  often  these  laws  were  against  their  interests 
and  welfare.  It  is  hard  to  make  a people  uphold  such 
laws.  The  government  that  tries  to  do  this  will  always, 
in  the  end,  have  to  call  in  force  to  its  aid.  A govern- 
ment cannot  long  rule,  however,  by  force  alone.  Even 
a military  government,  to  be  successful,  must  be  based 
upon  just  laws.  It  must  recognize  and  uphold  what  is 
just  and  right. 

At  the  beginning  of  American  rule  in  these  islands, 
a good  many  reforms  had  to  be  made  at  once.  It  was 
necessary  to  set  the  country  in  order,  so  that  business 
might  go  on,  justice  might  be  done,  and  safety  insured 
to  the  people.  Life  and  property  were  in  danger,  and 
even  among  themselves  the  people  hardly  knew  who 
were  their  friends  and  who  were  their  foes.  The  coun- 
try needed  wise,  just  laws,  strongly  upheld,  to  bring 
about  peace,  order,  and  safety.  At  that  time  a mili- 
tary rule  was  the  best  form  of  government  to  meet 
this  need,  and  military  rule  was  therefore  set  up  in 
the  islands. 

This  government  made  many  changes  in  the  country. 
Courts  were  established,  and  every  effort  was  made  to 
carry  out  the  laws  with  justice  to  all.  Many  prisoners 
who  had  been  for  years  wrongfully  imprisoned  were 
released  from  jail.  Steps  were  taken  at  once  to  open 
schools  where  the  children  might  be  taught ; and  many 
other  reforms  were  made  that,  in  time,  will  show  good 
results  in  the  country.  They  are  of  a sort  that  will  make 
this  a much  richer  and  happier  land.  This  is  what  the 


214 


THE  STORT  OF  THE  PHILIPPINES. 


United  States  wishes  to  do.  It  is  a great  and  powerful 
nation,  and  other  nations  expect  it  to  build  up  a good 
government  in  these  islands.  The  government  at 
Washington  has  declared  that  the  aim  of  American  rule 
in  the  Philippines  is  to  prepare  the  people  for  self-gov- 
ernment and  to  teach  them  what  true  liberty  really  is. 

In  January,  1899,  the  President  of  the  United  States 
appointed  a body  of  men  wise  in  government  to  come 
to  the  Philippine  Islands  from  America.  These  men 
were  to  learn  all  that  they  could  about  the  country  and> 
its  people,  in  order  that  they  might  recommend  a just 
form  of  government  for  the  country.  They  had  to 
find  out  what  were  the  ideas  of  the  Filipino  people  in 
regard  to  government,  and  to  study  the  needs  of  the 
country,  before  they  could  make  any  recommendations. 

The  commissioners  came  to  Manila  early  in  April, 
1899,  and  began  work  at  once.  They  traveled  about 
the  country  to  see  what  it  was  like.  They  held  meet- 
ings in  Manila  and  elsewhere,  and  invited  leading  Fili- 
pinos to  come  and  meet  with  them.  They  did  this  in 
order  to  ask  them  about  matters  of  interest  to  the 
country  and  its  people.  They  promised  the  people 
that  just  laws  should  be  established  in  the  country, 
and  the  government  is  keeping  that  promise. 

The  members  of  the  commission  saw  that  good 
schools  are  a great  need  in  the  country.  An  attempt 
was  made  to  provide  these  at  once,  and  the  commander 
of  the  army  established  a great  many  schools,  with  sol- 
diers as  teachers.  It  was  seen,  however,  that  to  make 
the  schools  what  the  people  needed  would  require 
experienced  teachers.  These  could  not  be  provided 
immediately;  but  a couple  of  years  later  hundreds  of 


C/^/Z  GOFERNMENT. 


215 


trained  American  teachers  were  brought  to  the  islands. 
In  time,  when  there  are  enough  trained  Filipino 
teachers  to  carry  on  the  work,  this  country  will  have 
a school  system  as  good  as  any  in  the  world.  The 
American  Government  has  pledged  itself  to  bring  edu- 
cation to  these  islands,  and  to  see  that  the  people  have 
justice  and  fair 
treatment  in  all 
that  touches 
their  lives.  It 
will  not  cease  its 
efforts  until  the 
Filipinos  are  as 
able  to  maintain 
themselves  se- 
curely in  their 
rights  and  liber- 
ties as  are  the 
Americans. 

The  president 
of  the  first  Philip- 
pine commission 
was  the  Hon. 

Jacob  Schurman, 
and  this  commission  is  known  as  the  Schurman  Com- 
mission, The  members  did  the  work  which  they  were 
sent  here  to  do,  and  made  a full  report  to  Congress. 
This  report  sets  forth  all  that  the  commission  had 
learned  about  the  country.  The  views  of  the  Fili- 
pinos who  appeared  before  the  commission  are  given 
in  their  own  words,  which  were  written  down  at  the 
time.  The  report  was  printed,  in  order  that  both 


GOVERNOR  WILLIAM  H.  'lAFl. 


2i6 


THE  STORT  OF  THE  PHILIPPINES. 


Filipinos  and  Americans  might  know  all  that  had  been 
said  and  done. 

In  April,  1900,  a new  commission  was  appointed 
to  come  to  the  islands  and  do  further  work.  This 
commission  was  known  as  the  Taft  Commission,  its 
president  being  the  Hon.  William  H.  Taft.  To  its 
members  was  given  the  task  of  forming  a government 
for  the  country. 

A central  government  was  set  up  in  Manila  in  Sep- 
tember, 1900.  Central  government  means  the  gov- 
ernment for  the  whole  country.  The  government  of 
provinces,  towns,  and  barrios  is  called  local  government. 
The  local  government  is  carried  on  by  the  provincial 
governors,  by  presidentes,  alcaldes,  and  lesser  officers. 
These  have  authority  in  their  own  districts,  subject  to 
that  of  the  central  government. 

The  central  government  at  Manila  was  what  is  called 
a military  government — that  is,  the  commander  of 
the  army  in  the  islands  was  governor-general  of  the 
country.  He  was  the  executive,  or  officer  whose  busi- 
ness it  is  to  execute,  or  carry  out,  the  laws  of  a land. 
As  we  have  seen,  the  government  in  Spanish  times  was 
almost  wholly  a military  government.  It  was  a differ- 
ent sort  of  military  government,  however,  from  that 
in  which  Americans  believe.  Americans  believe  that 
even  armed  force  is  only  for  upholding  the  law.  It 
can  never,  justly,  be  law  in  itself. 

The  executive  of  a country  is,  as  we  have  said,  the 
official  who  executes  the  laws.  In  the  United  States 
the  President  is  the  executive.  The  laws  are  framed 
by  men  whom  the  people  elect  to  do  the  work.  The 
men  thus  elected  become  what  is  called  a legisla- 


CIFIL  GOVERNMENT. 


217 


tive,  or  law-making,  body.  The  chief  legislative  body 
in  the  United  States  is  Congress.  When  the  central 
government  was  set  up  here  in  the  Philippines,  in 
September,  1900,  the  executive,  or  governor,  was 
Major-General 


MacArthur,  com- 
mander of  the 
army.  The  Taft 
Commission 
acted  as  the  leg- 
islative body,  and 

had,  as  well,  some 

. / 

executive  powers. 

This  govern- 
ment remaine  d 
in  force  until  July 
4,  1901.  At  that 
time  Major-Gen- 
eral Adna  R . 

Chaffeesucceeded 
Major  - Gener  al 
MacArthur  as 
commander  of  the 
army,  and  Judge 
Taft,  president  of 
the  commission, 

was  made  governor  of  the  islands.  All  the  authority 
formerly  held  by  the  military  governor  and  the  com- 
mission now  passed  to  Governor  Taft. 

The  new  government  was  not  military,  but  civil. 
Under  a civil  government  the  law  is  maintained 
through  the  courts  and  police  powers.  Only  when  the 


GENERAL  ADNA  R.  CHAFFEE. 


2I8 


THE  STORT  OF  THE  PHILIPPINES. 


country,  or  a section  of  it,  is  in  a state  of  rebellion  is 
the  military  power  called  upon  to  act.  Even  then  it 
does  not  act  for  itself,  but  as  an  arm  of  the  civil  gov- 
ernment, to  carry  out  the  laws.  The  civil  government 
in  the  Philippines  was  set  up  July  4,  1901,  the  anniver- 
sary of  American  independence.  On  that  day  Governor 
Taft  was  formally  inaugurated,  or  established,  in  office. 

September  l,  1901,  three  Filipino  members  were 
added  to  the  commission.  They  were  Dr.  T.  H. 
Pardo  de  Tavera  and  Sefior  Benito  Legardo,  of  Manila, 
and  Senor  Jose  Luzuriaga,  of  Negros.  The  American 
members,  besides  President  (now  Governor)  Taft,  were 
Hon.  Luke  E.  Wright,  Hon.  Henry  C.  Ide,  Hon. 
Bernard  Moses,  and  Hon.  Dean  Worcester.  Besides 
carrying  on  the  present  government,  the  commissioners 
were  charged  with  the  task  of  planning  a permanent 
government  for  the  islands.  To  do  this  it  was  neces- 
sary to  have  the  aid  of  Filipino  members,  and  the 
gentlemen  thus  added  to  the  commission  were  a great 
help  to  the  Americans  in  drawing  up  a form  of  gov- 
ernment suitable  to  the  country. 

The  plan  which  has  been  made  and  submitted  to 
Congress  is  somewhat  as  follows: 

There  should  be  a governor  and  four  heads  of  de- 
partments. These  should  be  appointed  by  the  Presi- 
dent of  the  United  States.  There  should  also  be  a 
body  to  be  called  the  Executive  Council.  This  council 
would  be  made  up  of  the  governor,  the  four  heads  of 
departments,  and  four  other  members,  to  be  appointed 
by  the  President.  Members  of  the  council  should  be 
both  Filipinos  and  Americans.  Besides  the  council 
there  should  be  an  assembly,  of  not  more  than  thirty 


CIVIL  GOVERNMENT. 


219 


representatives,  all  to  be  elected  by  the  Filipino  peo- 
ple. The  members  of  this  assembly  should  serve  for 
two  years.  Under  such  a government  the  Executive 
Council  and  the  Assembly  would  have  the  power  to 
elect  two  delegates  to  represent  the  interests  of  the 
islands  and  of  the  Filipino  people  before  Congress. 
These  delegates  would  be  residents  of  the  islands. 

Such  a system  would  give  the  Filipino  people  what 
is  called  a representative  government — that  is,  they 
would  have  a voice  in  making  their  own  laws.  In 
time  they  would  have  just  as  much  self-government  as 
they  could  fit  themselves  for.  The  report  of  the  com- 
mission to  Congress  recommends  that  such  a govern- 
ment be  begun  here  January  i,  1904..  If  this  is  done, 
the  success  of  the  government  must  depend  to  a great 
extent  upon  the  efforts  and  faithfulness  of  the  Filipino 
people  themselves. 

Summary. — At  the  beginning  of  American  rule  in  the  Phil- 
ippines, the  government  was  military.  The  commander  of  the 
army  in  the  islands  was  also  governor-general.  In  January, 
1899,  the  President  of  the  United  States  appointed  a commis- 
sion to  come  to  the  archipelago  and  study  the  country.  This 
commission  is  known  as  the  Schurman  Commission.  The  com- 
missioners came  to  Manila  early  in  April,  1899.  They  held 
meetings  in  Manila  and  elsewhere,  and  invited  leading  Filipinos 
to  come  and  talk  with  them  on  matters  of  government  and  the 
needs  of  the  country.  They  spent  the  year  in  learning  all  that 
they  could  about  the  islands,  and  then  made  a report  to  Con- 
gress. During  this  year,  schools  were  opened  in  many  parts  of 
the  archipelago,  and  certain  needed  reforms  were  made  in  the 
courts.  In  April,  1900,  a new  commission,  known  as  the  Taft 
Commission,  was  appointed.  It  was  charged  with  the  task  of 


220 


THE  STORT  OF  THE  PHILIPPINES. 


forming  a government  for  the  country.  The  government  con- 
tinued for  another  year  to  be  military,  but  on  July  4,  1901,  civil 
government  was  set  up,  and  Hon.  William  H.  Taft,  president  of 
the  commission,  became  the  first  civil  governor.  Three  Filipino 
members  were  added  to  the  commission  the  following  Septem- 
ber. The  civil  government  proceeded  to  draw  up  plans  for  a 
permanent  government  in  the  islands,  and  submitted  them  to 
the  President  and  Congress. 

Questions. — Why  is  the  United  States  often  called  a free 
country  ? Why  can  there  be  no  real  liberty  where  there  is  no 
law  ? What  are  some  of  the  changes  Americans  have  made 
in  this  country  ? When  was  the  first  Philippine  commission 
appointed  ? What  did  it  do  ? What  was  the  second  commis- 
sion called  ? What  sort  of  government  was  established  here 
in  September,  1900  ? When  was  the  civil  government  begun  ? 
Who  was  made  first  civil  governor  ? When  were  the  first 
Filipino  commissioners  appointed  ? How  does  the  form  of 
government  recommended  by  the  commission  give  the  Fili- 
pinos a voice  in  making  their  own  laws  ? 


Chapter  XXL 


PHYSICAL  GEOGRAPHY  OF  THE  • ARCHIPELAGO. 

E of  the  things  which  history  should  teach 
us  is  how  to  make  the  future  better  than 
the  past  has  been.  History  teaches  people 
about  the  brave  deeds  done  by  their  ances- 
tors, and  about  what  has  been  suffered  for  the  good  of 
the  land  by  those  who  have  passed  away.  It  is  well 
for  a people  to  consider  from  time  to  time  what  man- 
ner of  country  theirs  has  been.  Only  by  doing  this  can 
they  know  how  to  serve  its  interests,  and  to  secure  for 
it  the  best  future  that  is  possible. 

For  the  Philippine  Islands  a very  bright  future  may 
be  hoped.  How  soon  prosperity  and  happiness  will 
come  to  the  country  depends,  however,  more  largely 
upon  its  own  people  than  upon  any  outside  influence. 
The  Americans  in  the  Philippines  can  only  advise  and 
teach ; the  actual  work  of  building  up  the  country,  and 
of  making  it  a power  in  the  Orient,  must  be  done  by 
the  Filipinos. 

Let  us  take  a look  at  the  country  as  it  is  to-day. 


222 


THE  STORT  OF  THE  PHILIPPINES. 


and  learn  something  of  its  nature  and  of  its  resources. 
Of  all  the  islands,  Luzon  is  the  largest,  and,  at  the 
present  time,  the  most  important.  It  is  a delightful 
place,  with  lofty  mountains,  fertile  plains,  and  beautiful 
rivers.  But  beautiful  as  it  is  to-day,  it  possesses  possi- 
bilities which,  if  developed,  will  make  it  indeed  what 
the  Spanish  were  wont  so  proudly  to  call  it,  “ the  Pearl 
of  the  Orient.” 

On  the  west  coast  of  Luzon  are  two  important  bays, 
Lingayen  (lin  gl  an')  and  Manila,  with  several  smaller 
ones,  as  Subig  (sd'big),  Balayan  (ba  ll'an),  Batangas, 
and  Tyabas,  on  the  west  and  south.  On  the  northern 
side  most  of  the  great  mountain  ranges  sweep  down  to 
the  sea,  sending  out  spurs  of  land  that  form  little  coves 
or  harbors;  while  on  the  south  coast  lies  the  safely 
sheltered  harbor  of  Sorsogon  (sor  so  gon'). 

The  mountains  in  the  western  part  of  the  island  are 
broken  up  into  practically  three  ranges,  none  more 
than  thirty  or  forty  miles  long,  and  all  known  by  one 
name.  Sierra  de  Ilocos  (se  e'ra  da  e lo'cos).  Short 
spurs  of  hills  run  out  from  all  these,  so  that  there  is 
very  little  level  land  in  this  section.  A plain  of  small 
extent  lies  about  Vigan  (ve  gan'),  and  there  is  also  the 
valley  of  the  Abra  (a'bra),  which  is  long  and  narrow. 
East  of  the  central  cordillera  and  stretching  out  toward 
the  Sierra  Madres  (ma'dras)  hills,  is  a beautiful  valley 
over  a hundred  miles  long,  and  in  some  parts  very  wide. 
Through  it  runs  the  Rio  Grande  de  Cagayan  (ka  gl  an'), 
with  several  smaller  streams  emptying  into  it. 

Here  is  some  of  the  best  tobacco  land  in  the  country, 
and  tobacco  is  about  the  only  crop  raised.  It  was 
made  the  main  crop  during  the  years  of  government 


GEOGRAPHT  OF  THE  ARCHIPELAGO.  223 


monopoly,  so  that  the  cultivation  of  rice,  of  cocoa,  and 
of  all  the  native  products  was  driven  out.  This  has 
been  a great  misfortune  to  the  country.  The  land  is 
adapted  to  a variety  of  crops.  It  is  rich  and  fertile, 
and  could  be  made  to  raise  nearly  all  the  food  crops 
needed  by  its  inhabitants.  The  people  have  come, 
however,  to  depend  entirely  upon  one  crop,  and  in 
years  when  the  tobacco  crop  fails  there  is  great  need 
in  the  country. 

Another  great  valley,  the  finest  and  richest  in  Luzon, 
stretches  from  the  bay  of  Lingayen  to  Manila  Bay.  It 
has  some  3,000  square  miles  of  fine  farming  land.  The 
provinces  of  Pangasinan,  Tarlac,  Nueva  Ecija,  Pam- 
panga,  and  Manila  lie  in  this  valley.  It  is  a well 
watered  region.  The  Rio  Grande,  the  Chico,  the 
Agno,  and  the  Dagupan  rivers  flow  through  it,  be- 
sides numerous  smaller  streams. 

In  the  central  part  of  the  plain  rises  Mount  Arayat 
(a  rl  at'),  a volcanic  mountain  which  in  a clear  day  can 
be  seen  from  Manila.  It  is  claimed  that  this  mountain 
rose  suddenly  from  the  plain  in  a single  night,  during 
some  earthquake  disturbance  in  the  year  1700.  We 
find  this  statement  made  in  apparent  good  faith  by 
some  scientific  authorities.  We  know  that  the  moun- 
tain is  of  volcanic  origin,  and  that  it  was  formed  only 
a few  hundred  years  ago;  but  there  is  no  reliable  rec- 
ord of  when  it  made  its  appearance,  or  of  how  long  it 
was  in  forming. 

Southward,  in  Batangas  Province,  is  Lake  Bombon. 
In  the  middle  of  this  lake  is  Taal  volcano,  whose  many 
eruptions  have  in  times  past  worked  destruction  in  that 
neighborhood.  The  lake,  also,  is  of  volcanic  origin. 


224 


THE  STORT  OF  THE  PHILIPPINES. 


There  must  once  have  been  a great  mountain  here, 
which  sank  during  some  upheaval,  forming  the  lake 
and  the  present  volcano  of  Taal. 

The  country  all  about  the  lake  is  very  fertile,  and 
under  good  cultivation.  The  principal  crop  there  is 
coffee,  of  which  an  excellent  quality  is  grown  ; and  for- 
merly it  was  produced  in  very  great  quantities.  Rice, 
Indian  corn,  cotton,  and  all  kinds  of  vegetables  com- 
mon to  the  tropics,  grow  there  in  great  abundance. 
These  can  be  made  a source  of  profit  in  supplying  the 
markets  of  Manila.  There  is  a great  deal  of  alum  about 
Taal  volcano,  and  it  is  said  that  a good  quality  of  iron 
is  found  in  the  mountains  of  this  province. 

In  Laguna  Province  is  Bay  (bl)  Lake,  or  Laguna  de 
Bay.  This  is  a body  of  fresh  water,  with  an  outlet 
by  the  Pasig  River,  which  flows  down  to  Manila  Bay. 
Light  draft  steamers  run  up  the  Pasig  and  through  the 
lake,  and  on  this  beautiful  waterway  is  a constant 
throng  of  craft,  going  up  and  down  with  produce  for 
the  different  ports. 

There  is  very  fine  timber  in  the  island  of  Luzon, 
particularly  in  Tayabas,  Camarines  Norte,  and  Ilocos 
Norte.  Some  gold  has  been  found  in  the  mountains 
about  these  provinces,  and  specimens  of  many  other 
minerals  have  been  brought  to  Manila. 

In  Camarines  Sur  lies  the  valley  of  the  Vigan,  in 
which  are  several  small  lakes.  There  are  large  rice 
fields  here,  and  the  quality  of  the  rice  is  very  fine. 
Large  quantities  of  it  are  sent  to  Manila. 

One  of  the  richest  and  most  fertile  parts  of  the  whole 
island  is  Albay  (al  bl')  Province,  in  the  southeastern 
corner.  This  is  a particularly  beautiful  part  of  the 


GEOGRAPHT  OF  THE  ARCHIPELAGO.  225 


island.  Here  is  Mayon  volcano,  which  is  called  by 
scientists  the  most  beautiful  volcano  in  the  world.  It 
is  the  most  perfectly  formed  and  symmetrical,  but  it  is 
no  more  desirable  a neighbor  than  are  volcanoes  any- 
where. In  past  years  it  has  wrought  great  destruction 


MAYON  VOLCANO. 

in  the  country,  but  of  late  has  been  quiet,  and  seems 
to  be  on  its  good  behavior. 

The  rich  volcanic  soil  of  this  district  will  produce 
almost  anything  that  can  be  made  to  grow  in  a tropical 
country.  Very  fine  hemp  grows  here,  probably  the 
best  that  the  islands  produce.  Cocoa,  coffee,  sugar, 
and  rice  all  do  well.  Cocoanuts,  bananas,  all  the  fruits 
and  vegetables  of  the  islands,  grow  in  Albay,  with 
scarcely  any  cultivation.  The  climate  is  mild,  and  very 
15 


226  THE  STORY  OF  THE  PHILIPPINES. 


healthful,  and  near  Tibi  are  hot  sulphur  springs  which 
are  said  to  cure  rheumatism  and  numerous  other  ills. 

The  most  Important  of  the  smaller  islands  lying  out 
from  Luzon  are  Mindoro  (men  do'ro)  and  Masbate 
(mas  ba'ta).  These  are  small  and  very  mountainous. 
Mindoro  is  deeply  wooded,  but  only  a little  is  known 
of  the  interior  of  the  island. 

The  great  bay  of  Manila  is  twenty  miles  long  and 
thirty-two  miles  wide.  It  has  a depth  in  some  places 
of  seventy  feet.  It  is  entered  by  two  channels,  one  on 
either  side  of  Corregidor  Island.  The  main  one  is  called 
the  Boca  Grande  (bo'ka  gran'da) ; the  other,  which  is 
smaller,  the  Boca  Chica  (bo'ka  che'ka).  The  bay  is  so 
large  that  it  is  more  like  an  inland  sea  than  a bay;  in 
fact,  it  is  too  large  to  afford  secure  anchorage  for  ves- 
sels during  great  storms. 

The  Visayas  form  the  second  large  division  of  the 
Philippine  archipelago.  This  is  a group  of  islands,  six 
in  number,  which  lie  between  Luzon  and  Mindanao. 
They  are  very  thickly  populated.  The  Visayan  people 
seem  almost  a distinct  race — different  from  those  of 
Luzon,  and  from  their  neighbors  of  Mindanao.  They 
speak  a language  of  their  own,  and  are  inclined  to  re- 
gard themselves  as  a separate  people.  Now  that  new 
conditions  prevail  in  the  islands,  and  there  is  better 
communication  between  the  Visayas  and  Luzon,  much 
of  this  feeling  of  separation  among  the  people  will 
probably  soon  be  overcome.  It  is  to  be  hoped  that 
it  will  be.  The  people  of  the  Philippines  must  come 
to  feel  that  they  are  one  people,  with  common  inter- 
ests, and  that  all  must  work  together  to  develop  the 
whole  country. 


GEOGRAPHT  OF  THE  ARCHIPELAGO.  227 

Iloilo,  the  principal  city  of  the  Visayas,  is  on  the 
island  of  Panay.  It  is  an  open  seaport,  and  will  in 
time  become  a very  important  city.  It  was  destroyed 
during  the  insurrection,  but  is  now  rapidly  building 
up  again..  Under  good  management  it  will  some  day 
be  one  of  the  main  shipping  centers  of  the  archipelago. 

Iloilo  Province  is  a great  sugar  and  rice  growing 


WEAVING  JUSI. 

district.  It  is,  besides,  noted  for  the  fine  fabrics  which 
its  people  make.  This  is  the  center  for  the  manufac- 
ture of  the  cloth  known  as  jusi.  The  women  manu- 
facture also  most  exquisite  pifia  cloth.  Some  of  this 
is  of  so  fine  a quality  that  it  has  to  be  woven  in  closed 
rooms,  for  the  slightest  breeze  would  serve  to  break 
the  delicate  threads  of  which  it  is  made.  Very  beau- 
tiful silk  and  cotton  goods  are  also  made  in  this  prov- 


228 


THE  STORT  OF  THE  PHILIPPINES. 


ince.  Since  the  American  occupation  there  has  come 
to  be  a large  demand  in  America  for  these  goods,  so 
that  the  people  engaged  in  the  industry  are  kept  very 
busy. 

The  island  of  Negros,  which  lies  to  the  southeast 
of  Panay,  is  an  important  agricultural  island.  A great 
deal  of  sugar  is  grown  here,  and  there  is  much  wealth 
in  the  island.  Many  of  the  large  sugar  estates  are 
owned  by  Filipinos.  Considerable  modern  machinery 
has  been  introduced  into  the  island.  Steel  plows  are 
in  use,  and  in  many  places  sugar  is  manufactured  by 
improved  modern  methods.  All  of  these  things  have 
helped  to  make  Negros  very  prosperous.  If  the  plant- 
ers here  would  combine  and  introduce  machinery  for 
refining  their  own  sugar  they  would  come  in  time  to 
an  even  greater  measure  of  prosperity  and  independ- 
ence than  they  now  enjoy.  Rice,  hemp,  and  some 
tobacco  are  raised  in  Negros,  and  fine  cocoanuts  and 
bananas  grow  wild. 

The  island  of  Cebu  is  little  more  than  the  top  of  a 
mountain  rising  from  the  sea.  A good  deal  of  historic 
interest  centers  here,  however.  The  city  of  Cebu  was 
the  first  seat  of  Spanish  government,  and  remained 
the  capital  of  the  archipelago  until  Legaspi  went  to 
Luzon  and  set  up  his  government  in  Manila.  Cebu 
was  made  an  open  seaport  by  the  Spanish,  and  although 
its  exports  are  not  large  now,  when  the  resources  of 
this  island  are  developed  the  city  will  become  an  im- 
portant shipping  center.  There  is  a large  Malay  popu- 
lation in  the  island.  There  are  no  rivers  or  valleys; 
the  land  is  broken  up  into  small  farms,  and  hemp  is 
the  principal  crop.  The  island  produces  also  a good 


GEOGRAPHY  OF  THE  ARCHIPELAGO.  229 


deal  of  copra  and  raw  sugar,  and  the  people  raise  most 
of  their  own  foodstuffs. 

Bohol,  Leyte,  and  Samar  are  all  volcanic  islands. 
They  are  mountainous,  and  subject  to  frequent 
earthquakes  and  similar  disturbances.  There  is  not 
much  agricultural  land  in  Bohol,  and  the  soil  is  poor 
and  thin;  but  a good  deal  of  hemp  is  raised,  and 
some  cocoa.  The  people  are  fishermen  and  sailors, 
and  earn  their  living  from  the  sea.  Although  Bohol 
is  much  smaller  than  Cebu,  it  has  a larger  population. 

Leyte  ships  more  hemp  than  does  any  other  of  the 
Visayan  islands.  There  are  several  good  harbors  on 
this  island,  but  Tacloban  is  the  chief  shipping  point. 
Very  little  is  known  of  the  interior  of  Leyte,  for  the 
country  has  not  been  developed. 

Samar  is  the  largest  of  the  Visayan  islands,  but  has 
the  smallest  population.  It  is  a very  mountainous 
country,  wind-swept  and  beaten  upon  by  the  sea.  It 
lies  directly  in  the  track  of  the  northeast  monsoons, 
which  visit  it  with  great  fury.  Its  chief  port,  Catbalo- 
gan,  is  well  sheltered  and  a safe  harbor. 

Between  the  north  of  Samar  and  the  southern  end'* 
of  Luzon  lies  the  famous  Strait  of  San  Bernardino. 
This  is  one  of  the  principal  entrances  into  the  archi- 
pelago from  the  Pacific  Ocean.  It  has  been  the  scene 
of  many  a famous  sea  battle,  for  here  the  Dutch  and 
the  English  ships  used  to  lie  in  wait  for  the  galleons 
of  Spain  which  brought  treasure  from  Mexico  to  the 
Philippines  and  carried  out  rich  freights  for  Acapulco. 

Next  in  size  to  Luzon  is  the  island  of  Mindanao.  It 
was  on  the  north  coast  of  this  island  that  Magellan 
made  his  first  landing  in  the  Philippines.  There  are 


2^0  THE  STORY  OF  THE  PHILIPPINES. 


THE  FALLS  OF  BOTOCAN  IN  LUZON. 

four  great  mountain  ranges  in  Mindanao,  with  many- 
high  peaks.  The  island  is  rich  in  vast  forests,  and 
some  day  the  world  will  draw  its  main  supply  of  fine 
building  lumber  from  them. 


GEOGRAPHY  OF  THE  ARCHIPELAGO.  231 


Although  Mindanao  is  of  volcanic  formation,  and  has 
even  within  historic  times  undergone  great  changes, 
there  is  only  one  active  volcano  in  the  island.  This 
is  Mount  Apo  (a'po),  a few  miles  from  the  coast  of 
Davao  (da  va'o)  Gulf.  The  mountain  has  three  peaks. 
The  top  is  covered  with  sulphur,  which  sometimes 
gleams  white  as  snow  in  the  sunshine  and  at  other 
times  makes  Apo  look  like  a mountain  of  gold. 

There  are  a number  of  fine  rivers  and  lakes  on  Min- 
danao. The  best  port  in  the  island  is  Balanag  (ba  la- 
nag'),  in  the  Gulf  of  Davao.  The  harbor  of  Zamboanga 
is  very  good,  and  there  is  a still  better  harbor  at  Lin- 
dangan  (len  dan'gan).  Nowhere  on  the  island,  how- 
ever, are  there  such  sheltered  harbors  as  are  found  on 
the  southern  coast  of  Luzon. 

Very  few  storms  visit  this  part  of  the  archipelago. 
The  typhoons  only  touch  one  corner  of  it  in  the  far 
northeast.  The  climate  of  Mindanao  is  more  health- 
ful than  it  has  in  the  past  been  supposed  to  be.  The 
soil  is  very  rich  and  fertile,  and  almost  any  tropical 
crop  can  be  readily  grown  there.  Hemp,  sugar-cane, 
tobacco,  coffee,  cocoa,  rice,  Indian  corn,  and  many 
other  things  are  raised,  and  all  do  well ; but  the  island 
is  backward  as  regards  development.  No  serious  at- 
tempt has  ever  been  made  to  build  up  its  agriculture 
or  its  commerce.  There  are  many  tribes  living  among 
its  mountains  whose  names,  even,  are  not  known  to  the 
civilized  people  of  the  archipelago.  There  are  few 
Malays  in  Mindanao,  and  their  manufactures  and  in- 
dustries have  never  been  encouraged.  Some  gold  has 
been  found  in  the  hills,  and  silver  is  plentiful.  Coal 
has  also  been  discovered  in  the  mountains. 


5^2  THE  STORT  OF  THE  PHILIPPINES. 


It  is  likely,  however,  that  when  Mindanao  is  opened 
up  and  its  resources  are  better  known,  it  will  be  found 
that  its  wealth  consists  less  in  minerals  than  in  vege- 
table growths.  We  already  know  that  the  vegetation 
of  the  island,  little  as  it  has  been  developed,  sur- 
passes that  of  Luzon  and  the  Visayas.  The  soil  is  of 
excellent  quality,  and  the  rains  are  so  abundant  and 
the  climate  is  so  favorable  that  the  entire  island  is  cov- 
ered with  vegetation.  In  the  forests  are  found  India 
rubber  vines,  mahogany,  ironwood,  teak,  ebony,  and 
other  trees  of  great  value.  There  are  immense  tangles 
of  bamboo  and  rattan ; hemp  and  banana  trees  grow 
well,  and  cloves,  nutmegs,  and  cinnamon. 

This  great  island  is  divided  into  seven  districts — 
Zamboanga,  Misamis,  Suragao  (so  ra  ga'o),  Davao, 
Cottabato  (kot  ta  ba'to),  Basilan  (bas  e Ian'),  and  Lanay 
(Ian  l').  Although  the  population  is  small  in  compari- 
son with  the  great  extent  of  the  island,  seventeen  dif- 
ferent dialects  are  spoken  among  its  people.  Zam- 
boanga is  the  capital  town  of  Mindanao.  It  has  a good 
port,  although  somewhat  open  to  the  sea,  and  in  the 
river  Masdong,  three  miles  to  the  southeast,  is  safe 
anchorage,  protected  from  all  winds. 

South  of  Mindanao  lies  the  Sulu  archipelago.  It  is 
made  up  of  four  groups.  The  population  of  this  archi- 
pelago is  estimated  at  between  20,000  and  30,000;  but 
so  very  little  is  known  about  it  that  this  estimate  is  not 
likely  to  be  correct.  Jold,  the  capital  city,  on  the 
island  of  Sulu,  is  the  residence  of  the  sultans.  It  is 
a beautiful  town,  clean  and  well-kept.  It  has  a good 
port,  and  a line  of  steamers  runs  direct  from  Jold  to 
Singapore,  and  another  to  Manila.  The  vegetation  of 


GEOGRJPHT  OF  THE  ARCHIPELAGO.  233 


A RIVER  SCENE  ON  THE  ISLAND  OF  LUZON. 

this  archipelago  is  very  like  that  of  Mindanao.  There 
is  abundance  of  teak,  mahogany,  cedar,  and  other 
highly  prized  woods.  Horses,  cattle,  buffaloes,  and 


234  THE  STORT  OF  THE  PHILIPPINES. 


goats  are  plentiful.  The  people  of  Jol6  manufacture 
fine  knives  and  chisels.  The  pearl  fisheries  of  the  archi- 
pelago are  also  very  important. 

Lying  far  off  to  the  west,  with  the  Sulu  Sea  on  one 
side  and  the  China  Sea  on  the  other,  with  Borneo 
on  the  south  and  the  island  of  Mindoco  to  the 
north,  is  the  long,  narrow  island  of  Palauan  (pal  a- 
wan').  The  Spanish  called  it  Paragua  (par'a  gwa). 
This  island  is  inhabited  chiefly  by  the  wild  tribes. 
There  are  some  10,000  or  more  of  the  native  Christian 
population,  and  perhaps  10,000  Moros. 

Palauan,  on  account  of  its  geographical  position,  is 
very  important  to  the  archipelago.  It  will  become 
important  also  from  a commercial  point  of  view,  as  it 
forms,  with  the  island  Balabac  (bal'a  bak),  the  Strait 
of  Balabac.  At  certain  times  of  the  year  sailing  ves- 
sels are  compelled  to  pass  through  this  strait  to  enter 
the  archipelago. 

The  rattan  grown  in  this  island  is  very  fine.  It  is 
the  best  that  comes  to  Manila,  and  the  trade  in  it  is 
enormous.  The  tree  from  which  gum  mastic  is  ob- 
tained grows  there  in  great  abundance,  as  well  as  other 
trees  producing  resin.  The  island  has  fine  pasture 
lands,  with  large  numbers  of  cattle,  carabao,  goats, 
and  wild  hogs;  and  there  are  found  the  famous  edible 
birds’  nests  so  much  prized  by  the  Chinese  that  they 
sometimes  pay  for  them  twice  their  weight  in  silver. 
The  island  has  not  been  very  well  explored,  but  it  is 
said  to  be  rich  in  minerals. 

South  of  Palauan  lies  the  little  island  of  Balabac. 
It  is  only  thirty-six  miles  long  and  eight  or  ten  wide, 
with  a population  of  3,000  or  4,000.  Its  only  town  is 


GEOGRAPHY  OF  THE  ARCHIPELAGO.  235 


Balabac.  Its  forest  growths  are  like  those  of  Palauan, 
and  there  is  said  to  be  an  abundant  deposit  of  coal 
there. 

Questions. — Name  some  of  the  principal  rivers  of  Luzon. 
Where  is  the  best  tobacco  land  in  this  island  ? Where  does 
the  finest  hemp  grow  ? What  minerals  are  found  on  Luzon  ? 
Where  is  Laguna  de  Bay  ? What  is  its  outlet  ? AVhere  on 
Luzon  is  the  best  timber  found  ? How  large  is  Manila  Bay  ? 

What  are  the  Visayas  ? What  is  the  principal  city  of  this 
group  ? A\Tiere  is  it  ? What  are  its  manufactures  ? What 
are  the  principal  products  of  Negros  ? Why  is  Cebu  of  interest 
historically  ? AVhat  is  the  principal  crop  on  this  island  ? What 
sort  of  soil  has  Bohol  ? How  do  the  people  live  there  ? What 
is  the  principal  crop  on  Leyte  ? AVhat  is  its  chief  city  ? 
AA'hich  is  the  largest  of  the  Visayan  islands  ? How  does  its 
population  compare  with  that  of  the  other  islands  of  the  group  ? 
AVhat  sort  of  country  is  it  ? AA'here  is  the  Strait  of  San  Ber- 
nardino ? AA"hy  is  it  famous  ? 

AA^here  is  Mindanao  ? AA'here,  on  Mindanao,  did  Magellan 
first  land  ? Are  there  any  active  volcanos  on  the  island  ? 
AA^hat  sort  of  climate  has  Mindanao  ? Is  it  a well-watered 
country  ? AA^’hat  are  its  products  ? AA’hat  is  its  capital  city  ? 
Has  it  any  good  harbors  ? AA'here  is  the  Sulu  archipelago  ? 
AVhat  is  its  capital  city  ? AA'^hat  sort  of  town  is  it  ? AVhat  do 
the  people  manufacture  ? AA'here  is  Palauan  ? AA'here  is  the 
Strait  of  Balabac  ? AA"hy  is  this  strait  important  ? AA^here 
is  the  island  of  Balabac  ? 


Chapter  XXII. 

THE  FUTURE. 


have  now  learned  something  of  the  differ- 
ent islands  of  the  Philippine  archipelago 
and  of  the  possibilities  that  lie  in  them. 
Much  has  been  done  in  the  past  to  make 
this  country  a source  of  income  to  the  Spanish  crown; 
much,  however,  remains  to  be  done,  to  make  of  the 
islands  a country  whose  prosperity  shall  help  the 
people  themselves. 

The  wealth  of  a country  is  not  to  be  estimated  by 
the  amount  of  its  exports,  or  by  the  number  of  its 
great  buildings,  fine  harbors,  or  splendid  cities.  A 
nation  may  have  all  of  these  while  the  people  them- 
selves are  poor.  The  United  States  is  a great  and  rich 
nation,  not  because  of  the  value  of  its  national  posses- 
sions, but  because  the  great  mass  of  the  people  are 
fairly  well  off.  There  can  be  no  real  prosperity  in  a 
country  unless  the  people  themselves  share  it ; there 
can  be  no  just  government  if  that  government  is  con- 
sidered as  something  apart  from  the  people.  The 


THE  FUTURE.  237 

people  must  have  a part  in  it  before  it  can  be  a good 
government. 

But  before  a people  can  take  any  real  part  in  the 
government  of  a civilized  land,  they  must  understand 
something  of  the  principles  on  which  good  government 
is  based.  They  must  know  something  of  the  world’s 
history  and  of  the  government  of  other  countries. 
They  must  have  a common  language,  and  must  be 
a united  people,  all  ready  to  work  for  the  common 
good.  That  country  can  never  prosper  which  is  di- 
vided by  a feeling  of  race  difference,  or  by  jealousies 
that  make  hard  feeling  among  its  people. 

It  is  because  the  United  States  has  learned  these 
things  by  experience  that  it  has  opened  public  schools 
in  the  Philippine  Islands.  It  seeks  to  have  all  the 
people  learn  English,  because  only  by  means  of  a com- 
mon language  can  the  Americans  and  the  Filipinos 
come  to  understand  one  another;  only  by  means  of 
such  a language  can  the  different  peoples  among  the 
Philippines  come  into  real  harmony. 

The  time  is  coming,  too,  when  English  will  be  the 
language  of  the  whole  commercial  world.  Already  the 
people  of  other  great  countries  know  that  they  must 
learn  to  speak  it  for  business  uses,  and  it  is  taught  as 
a matter  of  course  in  most  of  the  schools  of  Europe. 

A people  must  have  even  more  than  a common  lan- 
guage, common  interests,  and  modern  education,  to 
become  a prosperous  people.  Not  only  must  men  be 
wise  enough  to  take  part  in  their  own  government, 
but  they  must  have  control  of  the  trades  and  indus- 
tries and  commercial  ventures  of  their  own  land.  So 
long  as  the  commercial  business  of  a country  is  almost 


'1HE  CAGAYAN  DE  ORO  RIVER. 


THE  FUTURE. 


239 


wholly  carried  on  by  foreigners,  that  country  will  never 
become  rich.  It  is  not  meant  by  this  that  foreigners 
should  not  be  allowed  to  do  business  in  the  country; 
that  is  an  idea  which  belongs  to  dark  ages  of  the 
world’s  history.  But  there  should  be  no  need  for 
them  in  the  country.  The  people  should  have  such 
patriotic  pride  in  the  welfare  of  their  own  land  as 
to  conduct  its  business  themselves. 

Nevertheless,  wherever  there  is  a demand  for  any- 
thing in  the  commercial  world,  there  will  surely,  in 
time,  be  a supply.  There  must  be  merchants  in  the 
Philippine  Islands.  There  must  be  tradesmen,  arti- 
sans, mechanics,  workers  in  wood,  iron,  and  leather, 
and  followers  of  the  arts  and  crafts  known  to  civiliza- 
tion. If  the  Filipino  people  do  not  take  up  these 
lines  of  work,  and  carry  them  out  well  and  wisely, 
outsiders  will  come  in  and  monopolize  them.  They 
have  already  come  to  the  archipelago.  Moreover, 
they  will  continue  to  come,  from  China  and  Japan, 
from  India  and  Ceylon,  and  from  all  the  countries  of 
Europe,  if  the  people  of  the  country  do  not  themselves 
learn  to  take  their  places.  So  long  as  the  foreigners 
are  here,  there  will  be  nothing  for  the  native  people  to 
do  but  to  work  as  laborers,  or  as  clerks  and  servants. 

The  great  resource  of  the  Philippine  Islands  must 
always  be  agriculture.  When  modern  methods  of 
farming  are  adopted  here,  and  modern  machinery  has 
taken  the  place  of  the  wooden  implements  and  the  out- 
of-date  tools  now  in  use;  when  we  have  large  sugar 
mills  and  refineries  in  place  of  the  small  and  primitive 
ones  now  here,  we  shall  see  great  progress  made. 

With  peace  in  the  country,  and  good  government 


240 


THE  STORT  OF  THE  PHILIPPINES. 


making  every  man  secure  in  his  right  to  life,  liberty, 
and  the  pursuit  of  happiness,  farm  work  will  be  very 
different  here.  Nearly  the  entire  population  of  the 
archipelago  ought  then  to  draw  a good  living  from 
the  land.  When  all  the  good  land  is  brought  under 
cultivation,  the  crops  raised  in  the  islands  ought  to 
increase  tenfold  over  what  are  now  grown. 

Before  much  can  be  accomplished,  however,  a great 
deal  of  government  work  must  be  carried  out.  This 
the  Americans  have  in  view ; already  some  millions 
of  dollars  have  been  set  aside  by  the  civil  government 
to  make  roads,  harbors,  and  bridges,  and  for  public 
works  of  many  sorts  in  the  archipelago.  A day  of 
hope  seems  opening,  not  merely  for  the  Americans 
to  whom  the  task  has  fallen  of  carrying  on  the  work, 
but  for  the  whole  Filipino  people.  They  and  the 
Americans  must  work  together  to  bring  the  promises 
of  this  day  into  full  fruitage. 

No  word  about  the  islands  can  be  complete  unless  it 
touches  upon  the  wonderful  beauty  of  this  country. 
This  is  a great  part  of  the  good  inheritance  of  the 
people.  It  ought  to  quicken  the  pleasure  and  pride 
of  every  Filipino  in  his  beautiful  land.  Its  lofty 
mountains,  its  lovely  plains  and  noble  rivers,  the  rich 
verdure  that  clothes  the  country,  all  go  to  make  up 
beautiful  pictures  everywhere.  There  is  much  that  can 
and  must  be  done  to  make  the  cities  and  towns  more 
fit  and  beautiful  places  for  people  to  live  in ; but  for 
the  outside  country  nature  has  done  great  things. 

The  banana  plants  and  the  nipa  and  cocoanut  palms 
are  beautiful  as  well  as  useful.  So  are  the  great  mango 
trees  and  the  fields  of  growing  rice.  In  all  nature  there 


THE  FUTURE. 


241 


is  nothing  more  graceful  than  the  giant  bamboos  that 
grow  by  every  stream.  Their  beauty  is  of  a very 
perfect  sort.  This  plant  does  more  than  delight  the 
eye;  of  all  tropical  growths  it  is  the  most  useful  to 
man.  In  a little  composition  which  was  written  by  a 
Chinese  schoolboy  in  his  own  country,  a fine  account 


MANILA  SCHOOLBOYS. 


is  given  of  the  many  uses  to  which  the  bamboo  can  be 
put.  He  says: 

“ We  have  a bamboo  hedge  in  our  grounds,  and 
nothing  could  be  better.  I am  writing  with  a bamboo- 
handled  pencil;  I have  seen  bamboo  masts  on  vessels. 
On  the  whole,  the  bamboo  is  one  of  the  most  precious 
possessions  of  China.  Its  tapering  stalks  supply  joists 
16 


242 


THE  STORT  OF  THE  PHILIPPINES. 


for  houses,  ribs  for  sails,  shafts  for  spars,  tubes  and 
buckets  for  water,  fishing-rods,  and  the  handles  and  ribs 
of  our  fans.  The  great  bamboo,  split,  makes  an  excel- 
lent roof.  Rafts  are  made  of  the  bamboo ; baskets  are 
woven  of  it.  The  Chinaman  sits  in  a bamboo  chair  at 
a bamboo  table;  and  he  may  rest  himself,  in  the  heat 
of  the  day,  beneath  the  bamboo  tree,  with  a bamboo 
hat  upon  his  head.  When  I have  been  all  about  the 
edges  of  the  world,  and  have  seen  all  kinds  of  strange 
people,  I ask  nothing  better  than  to  come  back  home 
and  sit  under  the  shade  of  a bamboo  veranda,  and 
when  my  life  is  finished,  to  go  to  heaven  from  a bam- 
boo bed.” 

To  how  many  other  uses  than  even  these  do  the 
Filipino  people  put  bamboo!  They  make  the  sails  of 
ships  from  it;  they  build  bridges  of  it;  boats,  rafts, 
water-pipes,  scaffolds  for  building  houses,  and  all  kinds 
of  baskets  and  furniture.  Indeed  this  plant,  with  the 
India  rubber  plant  and  the  bijuca,  would  enable  almost 
any  Filipino  to  build  and  furnish  a house  that  would 
answer  all  the  needs  of  the  climate. 

We  have  now  studied  the  main  facts  in  the  history 
of  these  islands.  The  Story  of  the  Philippines  has 
many  sad  chapters,  but  there  need  be  no  more  such. 
The  Filipino  people  have  been  patient  under  trial. 
They  have  been  forbearing  through  much  injustice 
and  misrule.  They  have  been  brave  and  patriotic 
always.  Now  we  may  hope  that  a new  day  has 
dawned  upon  the  land.  What  this  day  will  bring 
forth  depends,  to  a great  extent,  upon  the  Filipino 
boys  and  girls  who  are  now  growing  up.  They  must 


THE  FUTURE. 


243 


learn  to  be  good  citizens.  They  must  be  able,  when 
they  are  men  and  women,  to  take  a wise  part  in  gov- 
erning the  country. 

The  night  before  Jose  Rizal  was  shot,  he  said  to  a 
friend:  “ What  is  death  to  me  ? I have  sown;  others 
are  left  to  reap.” 

Rizal  would  have  been  glad  to  see  this  new  day. 
He  would  have  been  glad  to  see  schoolhouses  opening 
everywhere  in  the  country,  for  he  knew  that  knowl- 
edge is  power.  The  seeds  which  he  helped  to  sow 
are  those  of  liberty,  justice,  and  peace.  The  Filipino 
people  must  be  wise  enough  to  cherish  these  seeds  into 
strong,  healthy  growth.  If  they  do  this  the  country 
will  surely  reap  the  harvest  which  he  foresaw,  of  peace- 
ful days,  full  of  hope  and  happiness. 


INDEX. 


Acuna,  Bravo  de,  71. 

Aetas,  44. 

Agriculture,  239. 

Aguinaldo,  Emilio,  184,  194,  196, 
207. 

Albay  Province,  224. 

Alexander  VI.,  Pope,  33. 

Alfonso  XII.  of  Spain,  167. 

Alum,  224. 

American,  fleet,  204  ; occupation, 
203  ; Revolution,  135  ; teachers, 
214,  215. 

Anda,  Simon  de,  120-122,  126. 
Apo,  Mount,  231. 

Arandia,  Pedro  de,  103,  105,  109, 
112,  113. 

Arayat,  Mount,  223. 

Archbishopric  of  Manila  created,  65. 
Arsenal,  Cavite,  165,  205,  206. 
Artillery  regiment,  Spanish,  164. 
Assembly,  Filipino,  recommended, 
218,  219. 

Augusti,  Governor-General,  201, 
206. 

Augustines,  30,  64,  125. 

Azaldegin,  General  Lopez,  85,  86. 

Balabac,  234. 

Balanguengi  Islands,  152. 

Balboa,  14,  17. 


Bamboo,  232,  241,  242. 

Bandits,  157,  158. 

Barbosa,  Captain  Duarte,  23. 
Barcelona,  173. 

Bautista,  Fray  Pedro,  67. 
Biac-na-’bato,  195  ; treaty  of,  196, 
200. 

Birds’  nests,  edible,  234. 

Bishop  of  Manila,  63-65. 

Blanco,  Governor-General,  173,181, 
183,  184,  186. 

Bohol,  229. 

Bombon,  Lake,  iii,  223. 

Boston^  U.  S.  cruiser,  205. 

Bridge  of  Spain,  23,  164,  171. 
British  in  Manila,  1 17-122. 

Burgos,  Dr.  Jose,  163,  164,  180. 
Butuan,  chief  of,  19,  21,  23. 

Cabeza  de  barangay,  62. 

Cable  cut,  206. 

Calle  deCamba,  massacre  of,  199. 
Canary  Islands,  16. 

Cancao,  205. 

Caraballo,  Juan,  25. 

Carabaos,  192,  234. 

Castillo,  Captain  Gregorio,  91. 
Cathedral,  Manila,  67,  93,  156,  157, 
159. 

Cavite  Arsenal,  165,  205,  206. 


246 


INDEX. 


Cavite,  insurrection  of,  162,  182. 
Cebu,  228  ; King  Charles  I.  of, 
21  ; King  Tupas  of,  32,  37  ; raid 
on,  200  ; women  of,  153. 

“ Cedula  personal,”  168,  193. 
Censorship  of  native  books,  151. 
Chaffee,  Major-General,  217. 
Charles  I.,  King,  15,  16,  19,  21. 
China,  emperor  of,  71. 

Chinese  in  Manila,  56-59,  72,  105, 
106,  155. 

Cholera  in  Manila,  138,  168. 
Christina,  Queen,  146. 

Church  and  State,  relations  be- 
tween, 62-65,  89. 

Civil  government,  American,  217, 
Spanish,  156. 

Claveria,  Governor-General,  152. 
Coffee,  224,  225. 

Columbus,  13,  14. 

Commission,  Schurman,  214,  215  ; 

Taft,  216,  217. 

Commissioners,  Filipino,  218. 
Comparvano,  Spanish  Minister,  147. 
Concepcion,  the,  16,  25. 

Congress,  217,  218. 

Constitution  of  1812,  136,  138,  180. 
Corregidor  Island,  206,  226. 

Cortes,  de  Cadiz,  135,  180;  Spanish, 
135,  136- 
Cotton,  144. 

Cuba  ceded  to  United  States,  209. 
Cuesta,  Filipino  leader,  154. 

Dattos,  48. 

Davao  Gulf,  231. 

Del  Cano,  Juan  Sebastian,  27,  29. 
Delegates  toCongress,  Filipino,  219. 
Desmarinas,  Gomez  Perez,  64,  65, 
67  ; Luis  Perez,  68,  73. 


Dewey,  Admiral  George,  204-207. 
Draper,  British  general,  117,  119, 
121. 

Dutch,  the,  74,  75,  76,  229. 

Earthquakes,  84,  156,  167. 
Education,  138,  214,  237. 

“El  Fllibustero,”  172. 

English  language,  237. 

Executive,  216  ; Council,  218. 

Fajardo,  Governor-General,  84,  85. 
Ferdinand  VIL,  136. 

Fernate,  king  of,  67. 

Filipino,  Assembly,  159;  clergy,  162; 
commissioners,  218;  people,  44, 
45,  48,  214. 

Folgueras,  Governor-General,  140. 
Foreigners  in  trade,  103,  137,  145, 
239- 

Forests,  232,  233. 

Forman,  John,  historian,  187. 
Freemasons,  164. 

Friars,  64,  82,  125,  147,  162,  169, 
171,  177,  187. 

Galleons,  75,  76,  99-103,  135. 

Gil,  Padre  Mariano,  183. 

Goiti,  Martin  de,  36,  39,  54,  57,  70. 
Gold,  224,  231. 

Gomez,  Dr.  Mariano,  164. 
Government,  central,  216 ; civil, 
156,  217  ; form  of,  recommended, 
218. 

Guam,  209. 

Guardia  Civil,  157,  182,  184,  199. 
Guzman,  Don  Francisco  Tello  de, 
68. 

Head  of  a hundred,  48,  62. 


INDEX. 


247 


Hemp,  225,  228,  229,  231,  232. 
History  of  Philippines,  210,  221. 
Holland,  peace  with,  77. 

Hot  Springs,  226. 

Ide,  Hon.  Henry  C.,  218. 
Igorrote-Chinese,  59. 

Igorrotes,  45,  112,  113,  168. 

Iloilo,  227. 

Insurrection  of  Cavite,  162,  182. 

See  Revolts. 

Iron,  224. 

Isabella  II.,  158,  159. 

Isla  de  Cuba,  205. 

Isla  de  Panay,  173. 

Islas  Pilipinas,  named,  28. 

Jaena,  Graciano  Lopez,  169,  170. 
Japan,  emperor  of,  65,  82,  181. 
Jesuits,  126,  159,  177. 

J0I6,  114,  153,  232;  a Moro  of,  47. 
Jomohol,  r8. 

Jusi  weaving,  227. 

Katipunan,  180,  181,  183. 

Kieman,  Farranda,  65,  66. 

King  of  the  Tagals,  the,  148,  149. 
King’s  Regiment,  the,  105,  137, 
140,  166. 

Koxinga,  92-94. 

Lachambre,  General,  187. 
Lacondola,  37-39. 

Ladrone  Islands,  18,  209. 

Ladrbnes,  bands  of,  198. 

Laguna  de  Bay,  224. 

Lara,  Governor-General,  88,  90. 

La  Trmidad,  16,  17. 

Lavazares,  Governor-General,  52, 
57- 

Laws,  object  of,  212. 

Legardo,  Sr.  Benito,  218. 


Legaspi,  Miguel  Lopez  de,  18,  28- 

40,  52. 

Legaspi,  port  of,  164. 

Legislative  bodies,  217. 

Leyte,  port  of,  164,  229. 

Liberal  Party,  135,  170. 
Li-ma-hong,  54,  56-59. 

Lingayen,  bay  of,  222. 

Llaneras,  General,  191. 

Louis  Philippe,  146,  147. 

Luneta,  the,  30,  184. 

Luzon,  34,  37,  136,  222. 

MacArthur,  Major-General,  217. 
Machinery,  improved,  228. 

Mactan,  island  of,  21. 

Magellan,  Ferdinand,  14-24,  229  ; 

Straits  of,  17,  19. 

Alahie,  the,  204. 

Malhon,  18. 

Malong’s  revolt,  91. 

Mandarins  in  Manila,  71. 

Mango  trees,  240. 

Manila,  137,  145,  207,  208  ; arch- 
bishopric of,  65  ; cathedral,  67, 
93.  156,  157,  159- 

Manila  Bay,  207,  222,  226  ; battle 
of,  205. 

Marauit  campaign,  180. 

Martinez,  Governor-General,  140, 
142. 

Masbate,  226. 

Matanda,  Rajah,  37. 

Maynila,  34,  38. 

Ma)’on  volcano,  168,  225. 

McKinley,  President,  210. 

Merritt,  Gen.  Wesley,  207. 

Mexico,  79,  128,  137  ; High  Court 
of,  52. 

Military  government,  213. 


248 


INDEX. 


Mindanao,  18,  70,  229-232. 
Mindoro,  226. 

Monet,  General,  192. 

Montjierat,  fortress  of,  174. 
Montojo,  Admiral,  204,  205. 

Morga,  Governor-General,  70. 
Morgado,  Capt.  Alonzo,  142. 
Moriones,  Governor-Genei'al,  164, 
166. 

Moro  pirates,  71,  94,  138,  142,  152. 
Moros,  46,  47,  70,  180. 

Moses,  Hon.  Bernard,  218. 
Municipal  school,  159. 

Native  clergy,  147,  162,  177,  192. 
Navidad,  28,  30. 

Negritos,  44,  50. 

Negros,  152,  228. 

“ Nolle  me  Tangere,”  172. 

Normal  school,  159. 

Norzagaray,  Governor-General,  154. 
Novales,  Captain,  140. 

Nuevo  Segovia,  Bishop  of,  113. 
Nunez,  General,  192. 

Order  of  Safety,  the,  152. 

Outlaws,  155. 

Palauan,  234. 

Pampangans,  revolt  of,  91. 

Parado,  General  Gonzales,  181. 
Parian,  the,  156  ; gate,  155,  156. 
Paris,  peace  of,  I2r. 

Paterno,  Sr.  Pedro  A.,  194-196. 
Peace,  Commission,  208  ; of  Paris, 
121  ; treaty  of,  208-210. 

Pearl  fisheries,  234. 

Philip  II.,  King,  28,  29,  30,  63,  68. 
Philip  III.,  King,  68. 

Pina  cloth,  227. 

Pirates,  Chinese,  54-59;  see  Moro. 


Polavieja,  Governor-General,  174, 
187,  191. 

Pope  Alexander  VI.,  33. 

Porto  Rico,  203,  209. 

President  of  U.  S.,  204,  209,  214, 
216,  218. 

Prisoners  released  by  U.  S.,  213. 
Problete,  Archbishop,  89,  96. 
Protocol  of  peace,  208. 

Punta,  205. 

Raon,  Governor-General,  126. 

“ Real  Situado,”  103. 

Recoletos,  177. 

Reformers  in  Spain,  145. 

Report  of  Schurman  Commission, 
215. 

Representative  government,  2ig. 
Revolts — 

Sumoroy’s,  85,  86. 

Malong’s,  91. 

Silan’s,  124. 

Luzon,  136. 

Novales’,  140. 

• Bohol,  145. 

Tayabas,  148. 

Tagal  regiment,  148. 

Cuesta’s,  154. 

Cavite,  162. 

Zamboanga,  164. 

Seventy-fourth  Regiment,  198. 
Reyes,  Ventura  de  Los,  136. 
Ricafort,  Governor-General,  144, 
145. 

Riccio,  friar-mandarin,  92-94. 

Rio  de  Janeiro,  16. 

Rivera,  Governor-General,  168, 189, 
191,  194,  197,  201. 

Rlzal,  Dr.  Jose;  170-175,  243  ; his 
widow,  174. 


INDEX. 


249 


Roderigues,  Estevan,  70. 

Rojo,  Archbishop,  117,  120,  122. 
Royal  dues,  106. 

St.  Lazarus  Hospital,  83. 

Salazar,  Archbishop,  65. 

Salazar,  Simon  de  Anda  y,  117,  120- 
122,  126. 

Salcedo,  Governor-General,  96. 
Salcedo,  Juan,  34-37,  51,  53,  54. 
58,  59.  61. 

San  Antonio,  16,  17. 

San  Bernardino  Strait,  229. 

Sanchez,  Alonzo,  63. 

Sangley,  205. 

San  Fausto  Chapel,  40. 

San  Jose  College,  126. 

San  Juan  del  Monte,  182,  183. 

San  Lazarus  Islands,  19. 

San  Lucar  Barrameda,  16,  27. 
Santiago,  16,  1 7. 

Santo  Tomos,  125. 

Schools  in  the  Philippines,  138, 
213,  214,  237. 

Schurman,  Hon.  Jacob,  215;  Com- 
mission, 214. 

Secret  societies,  164,  179. 
Self-government,  159,  213,  214. 
Sepoy  troops,  118,  120. 

Serrano,  Juan,  23. 

Seventy-fourth  Regiment,  revolt  of 
the,  ig8. 

Silan,  revolt  of,  124,  125. 

Silang,  battle  of,  174. 

Sioco,  Japanese  pirate,  57. 

Soldiers  as  teachers,  214. 

Soler,  Governor-General,  16S. 
Soliman,  chief  of  Maynila  ,36,38,  39. 
South  Pacific  squadron,  204. 
Spanish-Americans,  144. 


Spanish  Cortes,  135,  136. 

Spanish,  fleet,  205;  friars,  162,  i6g, 
171,  177,  187;  troops,  1S6,  188. 
Steam  gunboats,  152. 

Steel  plows,  228. 

Strait,  of  Balabac,  234;  of  San  Ber- 
nardino, 229. 

Students,  Filipino,  154,  i6g,  241. 
Study  of  English,  237. 

Sual,  196. 

Suez  canal,  164. 

Sultan  of  Sulu,  113,  115. 

Sulu  archipelago,  232. 

Sumoroy’s  revolt,  85,  86. 

Supreme  Court,  61,  62,  68,  iig, 
120. 

Suragao,  18  ; district,  232. 

Taal,  town  of,  destroyed,  iii;  vol- 
cano, log,  223. 

Tacloban,  164,  229. 

Tagals,  48  ; king  of  the,  148,  149. 
Taufer,  Miss  Josephine,  174. 
Tavera,  Dr.  Pardo  de,  218. 

Te  Den7}i  sung  in  Manila,  196. 
Tibi,  226. 

Tobacco,  inspectors,  130 ; land, 
222,  228;  monopoly,  129,  130, 

134,  155,  167. 

Torre,  Governor-General,  158. 
Torre’s  guard,  158. 

Trade,  99-107  ; control  of,  135  ; 

restrictions  on,  74,  100,  loi. 
Treaty  of  Paris,  121  ; of  Peace, 
208  ; of  Trent,  162. 

Trent,  treaty  of,  162. 

Trinidad,  La,  16. 

Trinidad,  galleon  captured  by 
British,  118. 

Typhoons,  231. 


2^0 


INDEX. 


United  States,  203-210,  212,  214, 
216,  236. 

Uranus,  island  steamer,  197. 
Urbiztondo,  Governor-General,  153. 
Urdaneta,  Padre  Andres  de,  30,  33, 
42. 

Valenzuela,  Sancho,  183. 

Vargas,  Don  Jose,  Basco  y,  128, 
130. 

Venenchillo,  Fray  Francisco,  iii. 
Vicos,  125. 


Victoria,  16,  17. 

Vigan,  222,  224. 

Villalobos,  Ruy  Lopez  de,  28. 
Visayans,  48. 

Visayas,  the,  226. 

War,  declaration  of,  203. 
Worcester,  lion.  Dean,  218. 
Wright,  Hon.  Luke  E.,  218. 

Zamboanga,  231. 

Zamora,  Dr.  Jacinto,  164. 


The  Wofid  and  Its  People 

A series  of  geographical  readers  that  describe  the  countries  and  the 
inhabitants  of  all  parts  of  the  world;  graded  to  suit  the  needs  of  young 
people  from  primary  to  high  school  age;  prepared  by  well-informed 
writers  who  combine  entertainment  with  instruction;  and  filled  with  a 
wealth  of  maps  and  illustrations:  a series  of  recognized  value  as  a 
preparation  for  the  regular  text-books,  and  a supplement  to  them. 


Book  I.  FIRST  LESSONS 

Edited  by  Larkin  Dunton,  LL.D.  160  pages  . . . 36  cents 

Book  U.  GLIMPSES  OF  THE  WORLD 

Edited  by  Larkin  Dunton,  LL.D.  160  pages  ...  36  cents 

Book  m.  OUR  OWN  COUNTRY 

By  Minna  C.  Smith.  222  pages 50  cents 

Book  IV.  OUR  AMERICAN  NEIGHBORS 

By  Fannie  E.  Coe.  332  pages 60  cents 

Book  V.  MODERN  EUROPE 

By  Fannie  E.  Coe.  404  pages 60  cents 

Book  VI.  LIFE  IN  ASIA 

By  Mary  Cate  Smith.  334  pages 60  cents 

Book  vn.  VIEWS  IN  AFRICA 

By  Anna  B.  Badlam.  450  pages 72  cents 

Book  Vin.  AUSTRALIA  AND  THE  ISLANDS  OF  THE  SEA 

By  Eva  M.  C.  Kellogg.  450  pages 68  cents 

Book  IX.  HAWAn  AND  ITS  PEOPLE 

By  Alexander  S.  Twombly.  384  pages 68  cents 

Book  X.  THE  SOUTH  AMERICAN  REPUBLICS 

By  W.  Fisher  Markwick  and  William  A.  Smith,  M.A. 

362  pages 60  cents 


The  prices  above  indicated  are  for  introduction 


Silver,  Bxirdett  S*  Compacrvy 

'Publishers 
Boston 


New  York 


Chicaigo 


Date  Due 

(iiC  ? 

5 '5, 

#8  1 1 'S2, 

mA.  ' 

"WtTW 

/ 

f 

i 

Form  335.  25M— 7-38— S 

991.4  K673 

385895 

Knapp 

Story  of  the 

Philiopines 

i 

ISSUED  TO 

991.4  K67S 

035395 

3 ^ ^ 


Q.'X 


rj  3 » . , 


HE 


iT 


